Add Ukrainian translation

102 files changed, 20629 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk.po b/docs/mcc-help/uk.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..340137dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk.po
@@ -0,0 +1,12562 @@
+# Copyright (C) YEAR Mageia
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia rpmdrake help package.
+#
+# Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>, 2012, 2013.
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Mageia rpmdrake help 3.0\n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-10-09 20:58+0400\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-10-09 21:38+0300\n"
+"Last-Translator: Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>\n"
+"Language-Team: Ukrainian <kde-i18n-uk@kde.org>\n"
+"Language: uk\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Plural-Forms: nplurals=1; plural=0;\n"
+"X-Generator: Lokalize 1.5\n"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:11
+msgid "Access WebDAV shared drives and directories"
+msgstr "Доступ до дисків і каталогів WebDAV спільного використання"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:14
+msgid "diskdrake --dav"
+msgstr "diskdrake --dav"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"diskdrake--dav1.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"diskdrake--dav-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"diskdrake--dav1.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"diskdrake--dav-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">diskdrake --dav</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">diskdrake --dav</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia "
+"Control Center, under the Network Sharing tab, labeled <guilabel>Configure "
+"WebDAV shares</guilabel>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:30 en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:22 en/diskdrake--smb.xml:21
+#: en/drak3d.xml:15 en/drakconnect.xml:16 en/draknetcenter.xml:29
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:27 en/drakvpn.xml:16 en/keyboarddrake.xml:17
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:21
+msgid "Introduction"
+msgstr "Вступ"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebDAV\">WebDAV</link> is a "
+"protocol that allows to mount a web server's directory locally, so that it "
+"appears as a local directory. It is necessary that the remote machine run a "
+"WebDAV server. This is not the aim of this tool to configure the WebDAV "
+"server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:40
+msgid "Creating a new entry"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"The first screen of the tool displays the already configured entries, if "
+"any, and a <guibutton>New</guibutton> button. Use it to create a new entry. "
+"Insert the server URL in the field of the new screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"Then you get a screen with radio buttons to select some actions.  Continue "
+"with the action <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> by clicking "
+"<guibutton>OK</guibutton> after selecting the radio button, as the "
+"<guibutton>Server</guibutton> is already configured. You can however correct "
+"it, if needed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--dav3.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--dav3.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"The content of the remote directory will be accessible through this mount "
+"point."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"In the next step, give your user name and password. If you need some other "
+"options, you can give them in the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--dav4.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--dav4.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:71
+msgid ""
+"The option <guibutton>Mount</guibutton> allows you to mount immediately the "
+"access."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:74
+msgid ""
+"After you accepted the configuration with the radio button <guibutton>Done</"
+"guibutton>, the first screen is displayed again and you new mount point is "
+"listed. After you choose <guibutton>Quit</guibutton>, you are asked to save "
+"or not the modifications in <emphasis>/etc/fstab</emphasis>. Choose this "
+"option if you want that the remote directory is available at each boot. If "
+"your configuration is for one-time usage, do not save it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:3
+msgid "Share your hard disk partitions"
+msgstr "Налаштування доступу до розділів жорсткого диска"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:6
+msgid "diskdrake --fileshare"
+msgstr "diskdrake --fileshare"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--fileshare.png\" revision=\"1\" "
+"xml:id=\"diskdrake--fileshare-im1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" /> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--fileshare.png\" revision=\"1\" "
+"xml:id=\"diskdrake--fileshare-im1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" /> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">diskdrake --fileshare</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">diskdrake --fileshare</emphasis> від імені "
+"адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:15
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"This simple tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you, the "
+"administrator, to allow users to share parts of their own /home "
+"subdirectories with other users of a same local network which may have "
+"computers running either Linux or Windows operating system."
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою цієї простої програми ви, як адміністратор, зможете надати "
+"користувачам змогу надавати підкаталоги з каталогу користувача у /home у "
+"спільне користування іншим користувачам у локальній мережі. Комп’ютери цих "
+"інших користувачів можуть працювати під керуванням операційних систем Linux "
+"або Windows."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"It is found in the Mageia Control Center, under the Local Disk tab, labelled "
+"\"Share your hard disk partitions\"."
+msgstr ""
+"Доступ до цього модуля можна отримати з Центру керування Mageia, вкладка "
+"«Локальні диски», пункт «Налаштувати доступ до розділів жорсткого диска»."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"First, answer the question : \"<guilabel>Would you like to allow users to "
+"share some of their directories ?</guilabel>\", click on <guibutton>No "
+"sharing</guibutton> if the answer is no for all users, click on "
+"<guibutton>Allow all users</guibutton> for all users and click on "
+"<guibutton>Custom</guibutton> if the answer is no for some users and yes for "
+"the others. In this last case, the users that are authorised to share their "
+"directories must belong to the fileshare group, which is automatically "
+"created by the system. You will be asked about this later."
+msgstr ""
+"Спочатку вам слід дати відповідь на питання: «<guilabel>Чи хотіли б ви "
+"дозволити користувачам надавати доступ до деяких з їхніх тек?</guilabel>» "
+"Позначте пункт <guibutton>Без спільного доступу</guibutton>, якщо доступ "
+"слід заборонити всім користувачам, пункт <guibutton>Дозволити всім "
+"користувачам</guibutton>, якщо доступ слід дозволити всім, і "
+"<guibutton>Спеціальний</guibutton>, якщо слід деяким користувачам заборонити "
+"доступ, а деяким надати. У останньому випадку, користувачі, які матимуть "
+"доступ до надання каталогів у спільне користування, мають належати до групи "
+"fileshare, яку буде автоматично створено системою. Додаткове питання щодо "
+"цього буде задано програмою на наступних кроках налаштовування."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guilabel>OK</guilabel>, a second screen appears which asks you "
+"choose between <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> or <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>.  "
+"Check <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> if Linux is the only operating system on "
+"the network, check <guibutton>SMB</guibutton> if the network includes both "
+"Linux and Windows machines and then click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Any "
+"required packages will be installed if necessary."
+msgstr ""
+"Після натискання кнопки <guilabel>Гаразд</guilabel> з’явиться друга сторінка "
+"налаштувань, за допомогою якої ви зможете вибрати тип спільних ресурсів, "
+"<guibutton>NFS</guibutton> або <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>. Виберіть варіант "
+"<guibutton>NFS</guibutton>, якщо єдиною операційною системою у локальній "
+"мережі є Linux. Якщо ж у мережі є комп’ютери під керуванням  Windows, "
+"виберіть пункт <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>. Щойно вибір буде зроблено, "
+"натисніть кнопку <guibutton>Гаразд</guibutton>. Якщо це потрібно, система "
+"виконає встановлення необхідних для роботи з новими налаштуваннями пакунків."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"The configuration is now complete unless the Custom option was chosen.  In "
+"this case, an extra screen prompts you to open Userdrake. This tool allows "
+"you to add users authorised to share their directories to the fileshare "
+"group. In the User tab, click on the user to add to the fileshare group, "
+"then on <guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem>, In the Groups tab. Check the "
+"fileshare group and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. For more information "
+"about Userdrake, see <link ns2:href=\"userdrake.xml\">this page</link>"
+msgstr ""
+"Якщо не було вибрано варіант «Спеціальний», на цьому налаштовування буде "
+"завершено. Якщо ж ви вибрали варіант «Спеціальний», з’явиться додаткова "
+"сторінка, на якій програма попросить вас відкрити вікно програми Userdrake. "
+"За допомогою Userdrake ви зможете додати користувачів, яким буде дозволено "
+"надавати каталоги у спільне користування, до групи fileshare. На вкладці "
+"«Користувачі» натисніть пункт користувача, якого слід додати до цієї групи, "
+"потім натисніть кнопку <guimenuitem>Виправити</guimenuitem>, на вкладці "
+"«Групи». Позначте пункт групи fileshare і натисніть кнопку "
+"<guibutton>Гаразд</guibutton>. Докладніший опис програми Userdrake можна "
+"знайти на <link ns2:href=\"userdrake.xml\">цій сторінці</link>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"When adding a new user to the fileshare group, you have to disconnect and "
+"reconnect the network for the modifications to be taken into account."
+msgstr ""
+"Щоб внесені вами зміни набули чинності, після додавання нового користувача "
+"до групи fileshare, слід від’єднати комп’ютер від локальної мережі, а потім "
+"встановити з’єднання повторно."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"From now on each user belonging to the fileshare group can select in his/her "
+"file manager the directories to be shared, although not all file managers "
+"have this facility."
+msgstr ""
+"Після цієї операції кожен з учасників групи fileshare зможе просто позначити "
+"у програмі для керування файлами свого графічного середовища пункт каталогу, "
+"дані з якого слід надати у спільне користування, і скористатися можливостями "
+"з надання спільного доступу цієї програми (такі можливості передбачено не у "
+"всіх програмах)."
+
+#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:1 en/mageia-doc-readme.xml:3 en/mcc-boot.xml:3
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:2 en/mcc-localdisks.xml:3 en/mcc-networkservices.xml:2
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:2 en/mcc-network.xml:1 en/mcc-security.xml:3
+#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:2 en/mcc-system.xml:2 en/MCC.xml:1
+#: en/software-management.xml:2 en/transfugdrake.xml:1
+msgid "en"
+msgstr "uk"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:3
+msgid "Access NFS shared drives and directories"
+msgstr "Налаштування спільного доступу до дисків і тек NFS"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:6
+msgid "diskdrake --nfs"
+msgstr "diskdrake --nfs"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"2\" xml:id=\"diskdrake--nfs-im1\" align="
+"\"center\" fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"2\" xml:id=\"diskdrake--nfs-im1\" align="
+"\"center\" fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:17
+msgid "."
+msgstr "."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">diskdrake --nfs</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">diskdrake --nfs</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to declare "
+"some shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The "
+"protocol used for this is NFS which is available on most Linux or Unix "
+"systems. The shared directory will be thus available directly at boot. "
+"Shared directories can be also accessible directly in a single session for a "
+"user with tools such as file browsers."
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою цієї програми<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> ви "
+"можете оголосити деякі з каталогів спільного користування доступними всім "
+"користувачам комп’ютера. Використаний для цього протокол — NFS, протокол, що "
+"використовується у більшості систем Linux або Unix. Такі спільні каталоги "
+"стануть доступними для користувачів одразу після завантаження системи. "
+"Доступ до спільних каталогів можна здійснювати безпосередньо з робочого "
+"сеансу користувача за допомогою програм для керування файлами."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:36 en/diskdrake--smb.xml:38
+msgid "Procedure"
+msgstr "Процедура"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers "
+"which share directories."
+msgstr ""
+"Натисніть кнопку <guibutton>Пошук серверів</guibutton>, щоб отримати список "
+"серверів, які надають каталоги у спільне користування."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:41
+msgid ""
+"Click on the > symbol before the server name to display the list of the "
+"shared directories and select the directory you want to access."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"The button <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> will be available and you have "
+"to specify where to mount the directory."
+msgstr ""
+"Стане доступною кнопка <guibutton>Точка монтування</guibutton>, за допомогою "
+"якої ви зможете вказати точку монтування для каталогу."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs3.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs3.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"After choosing the mount point, You can mount it. You can also verify and "
+"change some options with the <guibutton>Options</guibutton> button. After "
+"mounting the directory, you can unmount it with the same button."
+msgstr ""
+"Після вибору точки монтування ви можете наказати системі змонтувати каталог. "
+"Ви також можете перевірити або змінити параметри монтування за допомогою "
+"кнопки <guibutton>Параметри</guibutton>. Після монтування каталогу його "
+"можна демонтувати за допомогою тієї самої кнопки."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs4.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs4.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:72 en/diskdrake--smb.xml:71
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs5.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs5.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:77
+msgid ""
+"On accepting the configuration with the Done button, a message will "
+"displayed, asking \"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab modifications\". This "
+"will make the directory available at each boot, if the network is "
+"accessible. The new directory is then available in your file browser, for "
+"example in dolphin."
+msgstr ""
+"Після підтвердження налаштувань натисканням кнопки <guibutton>Зроблено</"
+"guibutton> система попросить вас відповісти на питання щодо того, чи бажаєте "
+"ви зберегти внесені зміни до /etc/fstab. Внесення змін до цього файла "
+"зробить каталог доступним одразу після завантаження системи, якщо локальна "
+"мережа є доступною. Після цього доступ до нового каталогу можна буде "
+"здійснювати за допомогою програми для керування файлами вашої системи, "
+"наприклад Dolphin."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:84
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs6.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--nfs6.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:3
+msgid "CD/DVD burner"
+msgstr "Програма для запису КД/DVD"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:3
+msgid "diskdrake --removable"
+msgstr "diskdrake --removable"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"diskdrake--removable-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"diskdrake--removable.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"diskdrake--removable-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"diskdrake--removable.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:12 en/drakinvictus.xml:12
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:187 en/draknetprofile.xml:12 en/drakups.xml:12
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:12 en/drakwizard_bind.xml:12
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:12 en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:12
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:12 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:12
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:12 en/drakxservices.xml:12 en/msecgui.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you "
+"can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/"
+"en/Documentation_team\"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">diskdrake --removable</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">diskdrake --removable</emphasis> від імені "
+"адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:11
+msgid "Access Windows (SMB) shared drives and directories"
+msgstr "Налаштування спільного доступу до дисків і тек Windows (SMB)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:14
+msgid "diskdrake --smb"
+msgstr "diskdrake --smb"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">diskdrake --smb</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">diskdrake --smb</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:23
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to declare "
+"which shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The "
+"protocol used for this is SMB which has been popularized on Windows(R) "
+"systems. The shared directory will be available directly at boot. Shared "
+"directories can be also accessed directly in a single session by a user with "
+"tools such as file browsers."
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою цієї програми ви можете вказати каталоги, доступ до яких "
+"зможуть отримувати всі користувачі комп’ютера. Для доступу буде використано "
+"протокол SMB, який набув популярності разом з операційними системами "
+"Windows®. Доступ до каталогу спільного користування можна буде отримати "
+"одразу після завантаження системи. Доступ до каталогів спільного "
+"користування можна також отримати в межах окремого сеансу за допомогою "
+"програм для керування файлами."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"Before starting the tool, it is a good idea to declare the names of "
+"available servers, for example with <xref linkend=\"drakhosts\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+"До запуску цієї програми варто визначити назви доступних серверів, наприклад "
+"за допомогою <xref linkend=\"drakhosts\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers who "
+"share directories."
+msgstr ""
+"Натисніть кнопку <guibutton>Пошук серверів</guibutton>, щоб отримати список "
+"серверів, які надають каталоги у спільне користування."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"Click on the server name and on &gt; before the server name to display the "
+"list of the shared directories and select the directory you want to access."
+msgstr ""
+"Натисніть пункт з назвою сервера, а потім кнопку «&gt;» перед цією назвою, "
+"щоб переглянути список спільних каталогів. Позначте пункт каталогу, до якого "
+"ви хочете отримати доступ."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"The <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> button will become available, you "
+"have to specify where to mount the directory."
+msgstr ""
+"Стане доступною кнопка <guibutton>Точка монтування</guibutton>, за допомогою "
+"якої ви зможете вказати точку монтування для каталогу."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--smb2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--smb2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"After choosing the mount point, it can be mounted with the <guimenu>Mount "
+"button</guimenu>. You can also verify and change some options with the "
+"<guibutton>Options</guibutton> button."
+msgstr ""
+"Після вибору точки монтування ви можете наказати системі змонтувати каталог "
+"за допомогою кнопки <guimenu>Монтувати</guimenu>. Ви також можете перевірити "
+"або змінити параметри монтування за допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Параметри</"
+"guibutton>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"In options, you can specify the user name and the password of those able to "
+"connect to the SMB server. After mounting the directory, you can unmount it "
+"with the same button."
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою вікна параметрів ви можете вказати ім’я користувача і пароль, "
+"яким мають користуватися ті, хто хоче з’єднатися з сервером SMB. Після "
+"монтування каталогу його можна демонтувати за допомогою тієї самої кнопки."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--smb3.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--smb3.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"After accepting the configuration with the Done button, a message will ask "
+"\"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab modifications\". Saving, will allow "
+"directory to made available at each boot, if the network is accessible. The "
+"new directory is then available in your file browser, for example in dolphin."
+msgstr ""
+"Після підтвердження налаштувань натисканням кнопки <guibutton>Зроблено</"
+"guibutton> система попросить вас відповісти на питання щодо того, чи бажаєте "
+"ви зберегти внесені зміни до /etc/fstab. Внесення змін до цього файла "
+"зробить каталог доступним одразу після завантаження системи, якщо локальна "
+"мережа є доступною. Після цього доступ до нового каталогу можна буде "
+"здійснювати за допомогою програми для керування файлами вашої системи, "
+"наприклад Dolphin."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:83
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--smb5.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"diskdrake--smb5.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:3
+msgid "3D Desktop Effects"
+msgstr "Ефекти 3D-стільниці"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:5
+msgid "drak3d"
+msgstr "drak3d"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drak3d-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center"
+"\" fileref=\"drak3d.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drak3d-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center"
+"\" fileref=\"drak3d.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drak3d</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drak3d</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> lets you manage the 3D "
+"desktop effects on your operating system. 3D effects are turned off by "
+"default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:25
+msgid "Getting Started"
+msgstr "Початкові зауваження"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"To use this tool, you need to have the glxinfo package installed. If the "
+"package is not installed, you will be prompted to do so before drak3d can "
+"start."
+msgstr ""
+"Щоб скористатися цим інструментом, вам слід встановити пакунок glxinfo. Якщо "
+"цей пакунок ще не було встановлено, система попросить вас встановити його до "
+"того, як запустить drak3d."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:31
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"After starting drak3d, you will be presented with a menu window.  Here you "
+"can choose either <guilabel>No 3D Desktop Effects</guilabel> or "
+"<guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>. Compiz Fusion is part of a composite/"
+"window manager, which includes hardware-accelerated special effects for your "
+"desktop. Choose <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel> to turn it on."
+msgstr ""
+"Після запуску drak3d буде показано вікно меню. За допомогою цього вікна ви "
+"зможете вибрати варіант роботи: <guilabel>Без ефектів 3D-стільниці</"
+"guilabel> або <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>. Compiz Fusion є частиною "
+"композитної системи керування вікнами, яка уможливлює використання "
+"спеціальних ефектів з апаратним прискоренням на вашій стільниці. Виберіть "
+"варіант <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>, щоб увімкнути таку композитну "
+"систему керування вікнами."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:38
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"If this is your first time using this program after a clean installation of "
+"Mageia, you will get a warning message telling you which packages need to be "
+"installed in order to use Compiz Fusion. Click on the <guibutton>Ok</"
+"guibutton> button to continue."
+msgstr ""
+"Якщо ви вперше користуєтеся цією програмою після початкового встановлення "
+"Mageia, система покаже повідомлення з попередженням щодо того, що для роботи "
+"Compiz Fusion слід встановити деякі пакунки. Натисніть кнопку "
+"<guibutton>Гаразд</guibutton>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drak3d-im3\" fileref="
+"\"drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drak3d-im3\" fileref="
+"\"drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"Once the appropriate packages are installed, you will notice that Compiz "
+"Fusion is selected in the drak3d menu, but you must log out and log back in "
+"for the changes to take effect."
+msgstr ""
+"Щойно буде встановлено відповідні пакунки, ви побачите позначений пункт "
+"Compiz Fusion у меню drak3d. Втім, для користування новими ефектами слід "
+"вийти з облікового запису користувача і знову увійти до нього."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"After logging back in, Compiz Fusion will be activated. To configure Compiz "
+"Fusion, see the page for the ccsm (CompizConfig Settings Manager)  tool."
+msgstr ""
+"Після повторного входу до системи буде задіяно Compiz Fusion. Налаштувати "
+"Compiz Fusion можна за допомогою програми ccsm (CompizConfig Settings "
+"Manager)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:59
+msgid "Troubleshooting"
+msgstr "Вирішення проблем"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:62
+msgid "Can't See Desktop after Logging in"
+msgstr "Після входу до системи не видно стільниці"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"If after turning on Compiz Fusion you attempt to log back into your desktop "
+"but can't see anything, restart your computer to get back to the log in "
+"screen. Once there, click on the Desktop icon and select drak3d."
+msgstr ""
+"Якщо після вмикання Compiz Fusion і спроби увійти до облікового запису, ви "
+"нічого не побачите, перезавантажте операційну систему, щоб повернутися до "
+"вікна входу до системи. У цьому вікні натисніть кнопку «Стільниця» і "
+"виберіть drak3d."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:70
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"When you log in, if your account is listed as an administrator, you will be "
+"prompted for your password again. Otherwise, use the administrator login "
+"with his/her account. Then you can undo any changes that may have caused the "
+"log in problem."
+msgstr ""
+"Після входу до системи, якщо ваш обліковий запис є адміністративним, система "
+"попросить вас ввести пароль до вашого облікового запису. Якщо ж ваш "
+"обліковий запис не є адміністративним, скористайтеся обліковим записом "
+"адміністратора. Після входу до адміністративного облікового запису ви "
+"зможете скасувати зміни у системі, які призвели до її непрацездатності."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakauth.xml:9
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Authentication"
+msgstr "Розпізнавання"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakauth.xml:11
+msgid "drakauth"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakauth.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"drakauth.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakauth-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"drakauth.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakauth-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakauth.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakauth</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakauth</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakauth.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> enables you to modify the "
+"manner in which you can be recognized as user of the machine or on the net."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakauth.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"By default, information for your authentication is stored in a file on your "
+"computer. Modify it only if your network administrator invites you to do so "
+"and give information about that."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:3
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Set up boot system"
+msgstr "Налаштувати спосіб завантаження системи"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:5
+msgid "drakboot --boot"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"drakboot--boot.png\" align="
+"\"center\" xml:id=\"drakboot--boot-im1\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"drakboot--boot.png\" align="
+"\"center\" xml:id=\"drakboot--boot-im1\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:15 en/drakboot--boot.xml:126
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakboot --boot</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakboot --boot</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to configure "
+"the boot options (choice of the bootloader, set a password, the default "
+"boot, etc.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"It is found under the Boot tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled \"Set "
+"up boot system\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"Don't use this tool if you don't know exactly what you are doing.  Changing "
+"some settings may prevent your machine from booting again !"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"In the first part, called <guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>, it is possible to "
+"choose which <guibutton>Bootloader to use</guibutton>, Grub or Lilo, and "
+"with a graphical or a text menu. It is just a question of taste, there are "
+"no other consequences. You can also set the <guibutton>Boot device</"
+"guibutton>, don't change anything here unless you are an expert. The boot "
+"device is where the bootloader is installed and any modification can prevent "
+"you machine from booting."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"In the second part, called <guilabel>Main options</guilabel>, you can set "
+"the <guibutton>Delay before booting default image</guibutton>, in seconds. "
+"During this delay, grub or Lilo will display the list of available operating "
+"systems, prompting you to make your choice, if no selection is made, the "
+"bootloader will boot the default one once the delay elapses."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"In the third and last part, called <guibutton>Security</guibutton>, it is "
+"possible to set a password."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:46
+msgid "The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button gives some extra options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:49
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "<guibutton>Enable ACPI:</guibutton>"
+msgstr "Увімкнути ACPI"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for the "
+"power management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices, this was "
+"the method used before APM. Check this box if your hardware is ACPI "
+"compatible."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:56
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "<guibutton>Enable SMP:</guibutton>"
+msgstr "Увімкнути SMP"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"SMP stands for Symmetric Multi Processors, it's an architecture for "
+"multicore processors."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"If you have a processor with HyperThreading, Mageia will see it as a dual "
+"processor and enable SMP."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Enable APIC</guibutton> and <guibutton>Enable Local APIC:</"
+"guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:69
+msgid ""
+"APIC stands for Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. There are two "
+"components in the Intel APIC system, the local APIC (LAPIC) and the I/O "
+"APIC. This one routes the interrupts it receives them from peripheral buses "
+"to one or more local APICs that are in the processor. It is really useful "
+"for multi-processor systems. Some computers have problems with the APIC "
+"system which can cause freezes or incorrect device detection (error message "
+"\"spurious 8259A interrupt: IRQ7\"). In this case, disable APIC and/or Local "
+"APIC."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:78
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "<guibutton>Clean /tmp at each boot:</guibutton>"
+msgstr "Очищати /tmp при кожному перезавантаженні"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:80
+msgid ""
+"If checked, this option will empty the /tmp directory at each boot, "
+"preventing it from become too big and clearing the trackings that don't need "
+"to be kept."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:85
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakboot1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakboot1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:90
+msgid ""
+"In the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> screen, you can see the list of all the "
+"available entries at boot time. The default one is asterisked. To change the "
+"order of the menu entries, click on the up or down arrows to move the "
+"selected item. If you click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> or "
+"<guibutton>Modify </guibutton>buttons, a new window appears to add a new "
+"entry in the Grub menu or to modify an existing one. You need to be familiar "
+"with Lilo or Grub to be able to use these tools."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:99
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakboot2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakboot2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:104
+msgid ""
+"The <guilabel>Label</guilabel> field is freeform, write here what you want "
+"to be displayed in the menu. It matches the Grub command \"title\". For "
+"example: Mageia3."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:108
+msgid ""
+"The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> field contains the kernel name. It matches "
+"the Grub command \"kernel\". For example /boot/vmlinuz."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:111
+msgid ""
+"The <guilabel>Root</guilabel> field contains the device name where the "
+"kernel is stored. It matches the Grub command \"root\". For example (hd0,1)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:115
+msgid ""
+"The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to "
+"the kernel at boot time."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:118
+msgid ""
+"If the box <guilabel>Default</guilabel> is checked, Grub will boot this "
+"entry by default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:121
+msgid ""
+"In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to "
+"chose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>, an <guilabel>initrd</guilabel> "
+"file and a Network profile in the drop-down lists. (Complements needed)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:3
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Set up autologin to automatically log in"
+msgstr "Налаштувати автореєстрацію"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:6
+msgid "drakboot"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakboot-im1\" fileref="
+"\"drakboot.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakboot-im1\" fileref="
+"\"drakboot.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakboot</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakboot</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to "
+"automatically login the same user, in her/his desktop environment, without "
+"asking for any password. It's called autologin.  This is generally a good "
+"idea when there is only one user like to be using the machine."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"It is found under the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Boot</emphasis> tab in the "
+"Mageia Control Center labelled \"Set up autologin to automatically log in\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:26
+msgid "The interface buttons are pretty obvious:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"Check <guibutton>Launch the graphical environment when your system starts</"
+"guibutton>, if you want X Window System to be executed after the boot. If "
+"not, the system will start in text mode. Nevertheless, it will be possible "
+"to launch the graphic interface manually."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"If the first box is checked, two other options are available, check either "
+"<guibutton>No, I don't want autologin</guibutton>, if you want the system to "
+"continue to ask for which user to connect (and password) or check "
+"<guibutton>Yes, I want autologin with this (user, desktop)</guibutton>, if "
+"needed. In this case, you also need to supply the <guilabel>Default "
+"username</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Default desktop</guilabel>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:3
+msgid "Manage date and time"
+msgstr "Керування параметрами дати і часу"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:5
+msgid "drakclock"
+msgstr "drakclock"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakclock.png\" xml:id=\"drakclock-im1\" "
+"revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakclock.png\" xml:id=\"drakclock-im1\" "
+"revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakclock</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakclock</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:14
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the tab "
+"System in the Mageia Control Center labelled <guilabel>\"Manage date and time"
+"\"</guilabel>. In some desktop environments it is also available by a right "
+"click / Adjust date and Time ... on the clock in the system tray."
+msgstr ""
+"Цю програму можна запустити за допомогою сторінки «Система» Центру керування "
+"Mageia. Відповідний пункт підписано <guilabel>Налаштувати дату і час<"
+"/guilabel>. У деяких стільничних середовищах програму можна запустити за "
+"допомогою клацання правою кнопкою миші на віджеті годинника у системному "
+"лотку з наступним вибором пункту «Скоригувати дату і час...»."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:21
+msgid "It's a very simple tool."
+msgstr "Це дуже проста програма."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"On the upper left part, is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">calendar</emphasis>. "
+"On the screenshot above, the date is September (on the upper left), 2012 (on "
+"the upper right), the 2nd (in blue)  and it is a Sunday. Select the month "
+"(or year) by clicking on the little arrows on each side of September (or "
+"2012). Select the day by clicking on its number."
+msgstr ""
+"У верхній лівій частині розташовано панель <emphasis role=\"bold\">календаря<"
+"/emphasis>. На наведеному вище знімку вікна показано дату: «квітень» (у "
+"верхньому лівому куті), 2013 (у верхньому правому куті), 6 число (синім "
+"кольором), неділя. Вибрати місяць (або рік) можна натисканням маленьких "
+"стрілочок з боків від напису «квітень» (або «2013»). День можна вибрати "
+"натисканням відповідного пункту у календарі."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"On the bottom left is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Network Time Protocol</"
+"emphasis> synchronising, it is possible to have a clock always on time by "
+"synchronising it with a server. Check <guilabel>Enable Network Time "
+"Protocol</guilabel> and choose the closest server."
+msgstr ""
+"У нижній лівій частині вікна розташовано панель синхронізації <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">Протокол Network Time</emphasis>. Ви можете підтримувати завжди "
+"точні покази годинника за допомогою синхронізації часу з сервером. Позначте "
+"пункт <guilabel>Увімкнути протокол Network Time</guilabel> і виберіть "
+"найближчий до вашого розташування сервер."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"On the right part is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">clock</emphasis>. It's "
+"useless to set the clock if NTP is enabled. Three boxes display hours, "
+"minutes and seconds (15, 28 and 22 on the screenshot). Use the little arrows "
+"to set the clock to the correct time. The format can't be changed here, see "
+"your desktop environment settings for that."
+msgstr ""
+"У правій частині вікна розташовано панель <emphasis role=\"bold\">годинника<"
+"/emphasis>. Якщо увімкнено NTP, зміна показаний на ній даних не має сенсу. У "
+"трьох полях годинника показано значення годин, хвилин та секунд (17, 8 і 13 "
+"на знімку вікна). Скористайтеся невеличкими стрілочками, щоб встановити на "
+"годиннику належне значення часу. Формат показу часу змінити не можна. Для "
+"зміни формату показу скористайтеся відповідною програмою з вашого "
+"стільничного середовища."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"At least, on the bottom right, select your time zone by clicking on the "
+"<guibutton>Change Time Zone</guibutton> button and choosing in the list the "
+"nearest town."
+msgstr ""
+"Нарешті, у правій нижній частині вікна можна вибрати часовий пояс. Для цього "
+"слід натиснути кнопку <guibutton>Змінити часовий пояс</guibutton> і вибрати "
+"відповідний пункт з наданого списку."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"Even if it isn't possible to choose a date or time format in this tool, they "
+"will be displayed on your desktop in accordance with the localisation "
+"settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:3
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Remove a connection"
+msgstr "Вилучити з'єднання"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:3
+msgid "drakconnect --del"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakconnect--del-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakconnect--del.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakconnect--del-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakconnect--del.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakconnect --del</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakconnect --del</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"Here, you can delete a network interface<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id="
+"\"0\"/>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"Click on the drop down menu, choose the one you want to remove and then "
+"click <emphasis>next</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You'll see a message that the network interface has been deleted "
+"successfully."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:3
+msgid "Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, ADSL, ...)"
+msgstr "Налаштовування нового мережевого інтерфейсу (LAN, ISDN, ADSL, ...)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:6
+msgid "drakconnect"
+msgstr "drakconnect"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakconnect-im1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakconnect.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakconnect-im1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakconnect.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakconnect</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakconnect</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:18
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to configure much "
+"of local network or Internet access. You have to know some information from "
+"your access provider or your network administrator."
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою цього модуля ви можете налаштувати доступ вашого комп’ютера до "
+"локальної мережі або інтернету. Вам знадобляться деякі дані від вашої "
+"компанії-надавача послуг або адміністратора вашої мережі."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"Select the type of connection you want to set, according to which hardware "
+"and provider you have."
+msgstr ""
+"Виберіть тип з’єднання, яке слід налаштувати. Тип визначається використаним "
+"вами обладнанням та параметрами роботи компанії-надавача послуг."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:30
+msgid "A new Wired connection (Ethernet)"
+msgstr "Нове дротове з’єднання (Ethernet)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:34 en/drakconnect.xml:162
+msgid ""
+"The first window lists the interfaces which are available.  Select the one "
+"to configure."
+msgstr ""
+"У першому вікні буде показано список доступних інтерфейсів. Виберіть той з "
+"них, який слід налаштувати."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:39 en/drakconnect.xml:167
+msgid ""
+"At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP "
+"address."
+msgstr ""
+"На цьому кроці можна визначитися зі способом отримання комп’ютером IP-"
+"адреси: автоматично або вручну."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:44 en/drakconnect.xml:187 en/drakconnect.xml:557
+msgid "Automatic IP"
+msgstr "Автоматична IP"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers "
+"are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained "
+"below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The "
+"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, "
+"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default.  "
+"The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option "
+"<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers "
+"have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address "
+"from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis>Ethernet/Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід визначити, отримуватиме "
+"комп’ютер дані щодо серверів DNS з сервера DHCP чи ці дані буде вказано "
+"вручну, у спосіб описаний нижче. У другому випадку вам слід буде вказати "
+"адреси серверів DNS. Тут також можна вказати назву вузла комп’ютера. Якщо "
+"назву вузла вказано не буде, буде призначено типову назву, "
+"<literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>. Назву вузла може бути надано "
+"сервером DHCP, якщо буде позначено пункт <emphasis>Визначити назву вузла з "
+"адреси DHCP</emphasis>. Можливість визначення назви вузла передбачено не на "
+"всіх серверах DHCP. Якщо ви налаштовуєте ваш комп’ютер на отримання IP-"
+"адреси з домашнього маршрутизатора ADSL, навряд чи слід позначати цей пункт."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:61
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakconnect5.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakconnect5.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:68 en/drakconnect.xml:205 en/drakconnect.xml:572
+msgid "The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:"
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Додатково</guibutton> можна додатково вказати "
+"такі параметри:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:72 en/drakconnect.xml:209 en/drakconnect.xml:576
+msgid "Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)"
+msgstr "Домен пошуку (не можна вказати, якщо адреса надається сервером DHCP)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:77 en/drakconnect.xml:214 en/drakconnect.xml:581
+msgid "the DHCP client"
+msgstr "Клієнт DHCP"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:81 en/drakconnect.xml:218 en/drakconnect.xml:585
+msgid "DHCP timeout"
+msgstr "Затримку DHCP"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:85 en/drakconnect.xml:222
+msgid "Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server"
+msgstr "Отримати сервери YP з DHCP (типово позначено): вкажіть сервер NIS"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:90 en/drakconnect.xml:227 en/drakconnect.xml:594
+msgid "Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)"
+msgstr "Отримати сервери NTPD з DHCP (визначає сервер синхронізації часу)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:95 en/drakconnect.xml:232 en/drakconnect.xml:599
+msgid ""
+"the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server "
+"requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP address. "
+"This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers."
+msgstr ""
+"DHCP потрібна назва вузла. Позначайте цей пункт, лише якщо сервер DHCP "
+"вимагає від своїх клієнтів вказувати назву вузла до призначення IP-адреси. "
+"Цей пункт може не працювати на деяких серверах DHCP."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:104 en/drakconnect.xml:241
+msgid ""
+"After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection "
+"configurations are explained: <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+"Після підтвердження внесених змін наступні кроки налаштовування може бути "
+"виконано у загальний для всіх типів з’єднання спосіб: <xref linkend="
+"\"drakconnect-end\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:111 en/drakconnect.xml:248 en/drakconnect.xml:615
+msgid "Manual configuration"
+msgstr "Налаштування вручну"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:115
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS "
+"servers to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no "
+"HOSTNAME is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is "
+"attributed by default."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis>Ethernet/Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід визначити, отримуватиме "
+"комп’ютер дані щодо серверів DNS з сервера DHCP чи ці дані буде вказано "
+"вручну, у спосіб описаний нижче. У другому випадку вам слід буде вказати "
+"адреси серверів DNS. Тут також можна вказати назву вузла комп’ютера. Якщо "
+"назву вузла вказано не буде, буде призначено типову назву, "
+"<literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:121 en/drakconnect.xml:258
+msgid ""
+"For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like "
+"<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is <emphasis>255.255.255.0</"
+"emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are available from your service "
+"provider's website."
+msgstr ""
+"У будинкових мережах IP-адреси завжди мають такий формат: <emphasis>192.168."
+"x.x</emphasis>. Маскою мережі є <emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>. А дані "
+"щодо шлюзу та серверів DNS можна отримати з сайта вашого постачальника "
+"послуг."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:126
+msgid ""
+"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</"
+"emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your computer is "
+"called \"splash\", and it's full domain name is \"splash.boatanchor.net\", "
+"the Search Domain would be \"boatanchor.net\". Unless you specifically need "
+"it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, domestic ADSL would not need "
+"this setting."
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою додаткових параметрів ви можете вказати <emphasis>Домен пошуку</"
+"emphasis>. Він має збігатися з назвою вашого вузла без першої частини, до "
+"крапки. Наприклад, якщо ваш комп’ютер має назву «comp1», а його повна назва "
+"у домені — «comp1.domivka.net», доменом пошуку має бути «domivka.net». Якщо "
+"вам точно не відомо, чи слід вказувати якийсь домен пошуку, його можна "
+"просто не вказувати. Знову ж таки, цей пункт не потрібен для налаштування "
+"домашнього ADSL."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:135
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakconnect30.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakconnect30.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:142 en/drakconnect.xml:279 en/drakconnect.xml:351
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:458 en/drakconnect.xml:636 en/drakconnect.xml:688
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:780
+msgid "The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>"
+msgstr "Наступні кроки описано у розділі <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:150
+msgid "A new Satellite connection (DVB)"
+msgstr "Нове супутникове з’єднання (DVB)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:152 en/drakconnect.xml:696 en/draknetcenter.xml:136
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:142 en/draknetcenter.xml:203
+msgid ""
+"This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you "
+"can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/"
+"en/Documentation_team\"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:158
+msgid "A new Cable modem connection"
+msgstr "Нове кабельне з’єднання за допомогою модема"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:172
+msgid "You have to specify a authentication method:"
+msgstr "Вам слід вказати спосіб розпізнавання (автентифікації):"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:176
+msgid "None"
+msgstr "Немає"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:180
+msgid ""
+"BPALogin (necessary for Telstra). In this case you have to provide User name "
+"and password."
+msgstr ""
+"BPALogin (потрібен для Telstra). У цьому випадку вам слід вказати ім’я "
+"користувача і пароль."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:191
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers "
+"are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained "
+"below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The "
+"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, "
+"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default.  "
+"The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option "
+"<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers "
+"have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address "
+"from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis>Кабельний/Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід визначити, "
+"отримуватиме комп’ютер дані щодо серверів DNS з сервера DHCP чи ці дані буде "
+"вказано вручну, у спосіб описаний нижче. У другому випадку вам слід буде "
+"вказати адреси серверів DNS. Тут також можна вказати назву вузла комп’ютера. "
+"Якщо назву вузла вказано не буде, буде призначено типову назву, "
+"<literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>. Назву вузла може бути надано "
+"сервером DHCP, якщо буде позначено пункт <emphasis>Визначити назву вузла з "
+"адреси DHCP</emphasis>. Можливість визначення назви вузла передбачено не на "
+"всіх серверах DHCP. Якщо ви налаштовуєте ваш комп’ютер на отримання IP-"
+"адреси з домашнього маршрутизатора ADSL, навряд чи слід позначати цей пункт."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:252
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS servers "
+"to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME "
+"is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is "
+"attributed by default."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis>Кабельний/Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід визначити, "
+"отримуватиме комп’ютер дані щодо серверів DNS з сервера DHCP чи ці дані буде "
+"вказано вручну, у спосіб описаний нижче. У другому випадку вам слід буде "
+"вказати адреси серверів DNS. Тут також можна вказати назву вузла комп’ютера. "
+"Якщо назву вузла вказано не буде, буде призначено типову назву, "
+"<literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:263
+msgid ""
+"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</"
+"emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your computer is "
+"called \"splash\", and it's full domain name is \"splash.boatanchor.net\", "
+"the Search Domain would be \"boatanchor.net\". Unless you specifically need "
+"it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, domestic connection would not "
+"need this setting."
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою додаткових параметрів ви можете вказати <emphasis>Домен пошуку</"
+"emphasis>. Він має збігатися з назвою вашого вузла без першої частини, до "
+"крапки. Наприклад, якщо ваш комп’ютер має назву «comp1», а його повна назва "
+"у домені — «comp1.domivka.net», доменом пошуку має бути «domivka.net». Якщо "
+"вам точно не відомо, чи слід вказувати якийсь домен пошуку, його можна "
+"просто не вказувати. Знову ж таки, цей пункт не потрібен для налаштування "
+"домашнього з’єднання."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:272
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakconnect32.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakconnect32.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:287
+msgid "A new DSL connection"
+msgstr "Нове DSL-з’єднання"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:291
+msgid ""
+"If the tool detects network interfaces, it offers to select one and to "
+"configure it."
+msgstr ""
+"Якщо програмою буде виявлено інтерфейси мережі, вона запропонує вибрати один "
+"з них і налаштувати його."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:296 en/drakconnect.xml:663
+msgid ""
+"A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries.  Select your "
+"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</"
+"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave."
+msgstr ""
+"Програма запропонує список компаній, які буде розподілено за країнами. "
+"Виберіть вашу компанію. Якщо її пункту немає у списку, виберіть пункт "
+"<guilabel>Не показано</guilabel>, а потім вкажіть параметри, надані вам "
+"постачальником послуг."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:303 en/drakconnect.xml:380
+msgid "Select one of the protocols available:"
+msgstr "Виберіть один з доступних протоколів:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:307
+msgid "Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)"
+msgstr "Протокол динамічної конфігурації клієнта (DHCP)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:311
+msgid "Manual TCP/IP configuration"
+msgstr "Налаштування TCP/IP вручну"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:315
+msgid "PPP over ADSL (PPPoA)"
+msgstr "PPP через ADSL (PPPoA)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:319
+msgid "PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)"
+msgstr "PPP через Ethernet (PPoE)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:323
+msgid "Point to Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP)"
+msgstr "Протокол тунелю точка-до-точки (PPTP)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:329
+msgid "Access settings"
+msgstr "Параметри доступу"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:333 en/drakconnect.xml:678
+msgid "Account Login (user name)"
+msgstr "Рахунок користувача (ім'я користувача)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:337 en/drakconnect.xml:414 en/drakconnect.xml:682
+msgid "Account password"
+msgstr "Пароль рахунка"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:341
+msgid "(Advanced) Virtual Path ID (VPI)"
+msgstr "(Додатково) Віртуальний шлях ID (VPI)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:345
+msgid "(Advanced) Virtual Circuit ID (VCI)"
+msgstr "(Додатково) Віртуальний коловий ID (VCI)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:289 en/drakconnect.xml:359 en/drakconnect.xml:646
+msgid "<placeholder type=\"orderedlist\" id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr "<placeholder type=\"orderedlist\" id=\"0\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:357
+msgid "A new ISDN connection"
+msgstr "Нове ISDN-з’єднання"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:361 en/drakconnect.xml:706
+msgid "The wizard asks which device to configure:"
+msgstr "Програма-майстер попросить вас вказати пристрій для налаштовування:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:365
+msgid "Manual choice (internal ISDN card)"
+msgstr "Вибір вручну (Внутрішня плата ISDN)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:369
+msgid "External ISDN modem"
+msgstr "Зовнішній модем ISDN"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:375
+msgid ""
+"A list of hardware is proposed, classified by category and manufacturer. "
+"Select your card."
+msgstr ""
+"Програма запропонує вам список обладнання, розподіленого за категоріями та "
+"виробниками. Виберіть вашу картку."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:384
+msgid "Protocol for the rest of the world, except Europe (DHCP)"
+msgstr "Протокол для всього іншого світу, окрім Європи (DHCP)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:389
+msgid "Protocol for Europe (EDSS1)"
+msgstr "Європейський протокол (EDSS1)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:395
+msgid ""
+"A list of providers is then offered, classified by countries.  Select your "
+"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</"
+"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave you. Then it is "
+"asked for parameters:"
+msgstr ""
+"Програма запропонує список компаній, які буде розподілено за країнами. "
+"Виберіть вашу компанію. Якщо її пункту немає у списку, виберіть пункт "
+"<guilabel>Не показано</guilabel>, а потім вкажіть параметри, надані вам "
+"постачальником послуг. Після цього програма попросить вас вказати такі дані:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:402
+msgid "Connection name"
+msgstr "Назва зв'язку"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:406
+msgid "Phone number"
+msgstr "Номер телефону"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:410
+msgid "Login ID"
+msgstr "ID користувача"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:418
+msgid "Authentication method"
+msgstr "Метод автентифікації"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:424
+msgid ""
+"After that, you have to select if you get the IP address by automatic or "
+"manual method. In the last case, specify IP address and Subnet mask."
+msgstr ""
+"Після цього виберіть спосіб отримання IP-адреси: автоматично чи вручну. У "
+"другому випадку вкажіть IP-адресу і маску підмережі."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:430
+msgid ""
+"The next step is to choose how DNS servers address are obtained, by "
+"automatic or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to "
+"put:"
+msgstr ""
+"На наступному кроці слід вибрати спосіб отримання адрес серверів DNS: "
+"автоматично чи вручну. У випадку визначення вручну вам слід вказати такі "
+"дані:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:436
+msgid "Domain name"
+msgstr "Назва домену"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:440
+msgid "First and second DNS Server"
+msgstr "Перший і другий сервер DNS"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:444
+msgid ""
+"Select if the hostname is set from IP. This option is to select only if you "
+"are sure that your provider is configured to accept it."
+msgstr ""
+"Вкажіть, чи слід визначати назву вузла на основі IP-адреси. Цей пункт слід "
+"позначати, лише якщо вам відомо, що постачальником послуг передбачено таке "
+"визначення."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:452
+msgid ""
+"The next step is to choose how the gateway address is obtained, by automatic "
+"or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to enter the "
+"IP address."
+msgstr ""
+"На наступному кроці слід вибрати спосіб, у який комп’ютер отримуватиме "
+"адресу шлюзу, автоматично чи вручну. Якщо ви виберете спосіб отримання "
+"вручну, вам доведеться вказати IP-адресу."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:464
+msgid "A new Wireless connection (WiFi)"
+msgstr "Нове бездротове з’єднання (WiFi)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:468
+msgid ""
+"A first window lists the interfaces which are available and an entry for "
+"Windows driver (ndiswrapper). Select the one to configure.  Use ndiswrapper "
+"only if the other configuration methods did not work."
+msgstr ""
+"На першій сторінці буде показано список доступних інтерфейсів та пункт для "
+"драйвера Windows (ndiswrapper). Виберіть інтерфейс, який ви хочете "
+"налаштувати. Скористайтеся пунктом ndiswrapper, лише якщо інші способи "
+"налаштовування не призведуть до бажаних результатів."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:475
+msgid ""
+"At this step, the choice is given between the different access points that "
+"the card has detected."
+msgstr ""
+"На цьому кроці ви зможете вибрати потрібну вам точку доступу зі списку "
+"точок, які було виявлено карткою."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:480
+msgid "Specific parameter for the wireless card are to provide:"
+msgstr "Специфічний параметр для карток бездротового зв’язку:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:483
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakconnect31.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakconnect31.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:490
+msgid "Operating mode:"
+msgstr "Режим роботи:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:494
+msgid "Managed"
+msgstr "Керується"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:497
+msgid "To access to an existing access point (the most frequent)."
+msgstr "Для отримання доступу до точки доступу (найпоширеніший випадок)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:503
+msgid "Ad-Hoc"
+msgstr "Ad-Hoc"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:506
+msgid "To configure direct connection between computers."
+msgstr "Для налаштовування безпосереднього з’єднання між комп’ютерами."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:514
+msgid "Network Name (ESSID)"
+msgstr "Мережне ім'я (ESSID)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:518
+msgid "Encryption mode: it depends of how the access point is configured."
+msgstr ""
+"Режим шифрування, залежить від параметрів налаштування вашої точки доступу."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:523
+msgid "WPA/WPA2"
+msgstr "WPA/WPA2"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:526
+msgid "This encryption mode is to prefer if your hardware allows it."
+msgstr ""
+"Варто використовувати саме цей режим шифрування, якщо його підтримку "
+"передбачено з боку вашого обладнання."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:532
+msgid "WEP"
+msgstr "WEP"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:535
+msgid "Some old hardware deals only this encryption method."
+msgstr ""
+"На застарілому обладнанні можливе використання лише цього способу шифрування."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:543
+msgid "Encryption key"
+msgstr "Ключ шифрування"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:545
+msgid "It is generally provided with the hardware which give the access point."
+msgstr "Зазвичай надається разом з обладнанням, яке працює як точка доступу."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:552
+msgid ""
+"At this step, the choice is given between an automatic IP address or a "
+"manual IP address."
+msgstr ""
+"На цьому кроці можна вибрати між автоматичним призначенням IP-адреси та "
+"визначенням її вручну."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:561
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers are "
+"declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained below. "
+"In the last case, IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The HOSTNAME of "
+"the computer can be specified here.  If no HOSTNAME is specified, the name "
+"localhost.localdomain is attributed by default. The Hostname can also be "
+"provided by the DHCP server with the option <emphasis>Assign host name from "
+"DHCP server</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis>Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід визначити, отримуватиме "
+"комп’ютер дані щодо серверів DNS з сервера DHCP чи ці дані буде вказано "
+"вручну, у спосіб описаний нижче. У другому випадку вам слід буде вказати "
+"адреси серверів DNS. Тут також можна вказати назву вузла комп’ютера. Якщо "
+"назву вузла вказано не буде, буде призначено типову назву, "
+"<literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>. Назву вузла може бути надано "
+"сервером DHCP, якщо буде позначено пункт <emphasis>Визначити назву вузла з "
+"адреси DHCP</emphasis>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:589
+msgid "Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS servers"
+msgstr "Отримати сервери YP з DHCP (типово позначено): вкажіть сервери NIS"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:608
+msgid ""
+"After accepting the configuration the step, which is common to all "
+"connection configurations, is explained: <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+"Після підтвердження налаштувань, визначених цим кроком, програма перейде до "
+"кроку, який є спільним для всіх налаштовувань з’єднань: <xref linkend="
+"\"drakconnect-end\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:619
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to declare DNS servers. The "
+"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, "
+"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis>Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід вказати сервери DNS. Тут також "
+"можна вказати назву вузла комп’ютера. Якщо назву вузла не буде вказано, "
+"типово буде призначено назву <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:625
+msgid ""
+"For a residential network, the IP address always looks like "
+"<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is <emphasis>255.255.255.0</"
+"emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are available from your providers "
+"website."
+msgstr ""
+"У будинкових мережах IP-адреси завжди мають такий формат: <emphasis>192.168."
+"x.x</emphasis>. Маскою мережі є <emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>. А дані "
+"щодо шлюзу та серверів DNS можна отримати з сайта вашого постачальника "
+"послуг."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:630
+msgid ""
+"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</"
+"emphasis>. It must seem to your hostname without the first name, before the "
+"period."
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою додаткових параметрів ви можете вказати <emphasis>Домен пошуку</"
+"emphasis>. Він має збігатися з назвою вашого вузла без першої частини, до "
+"крапки."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:644
+msgid "A new GPRS/Edge/3G connection"
+msgstr "Нове з’єдднання GPRS/Edge/3G"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:648
+msgid ""
+"If the tool detects wireless interfaces, it offers to select one and to "
+"configure it."
+msgstr ""
+"Якщо програмою буде виявлено інтерфейси бездротової мережі, вона запропонує "
+"вибрати один з них і налаштувати його."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:653
+msgid "The PIN number is asked. Keep left if this PIN number is not required."
+msgstr ""
+"Програма попросить вас вказати PIN-код. Не вказуйте, якщо PIN не потрібен."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:658
+msgid ""
+"The wizard asks for network. If it is not detected, select the option "
+"<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:670
+msgid "Provide access settings"
+msgstr "Вкажіть параметри доступу"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:674
+msgid "Access Point Name"
+msgstr "Назва точки доступу"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:694
+msgid "A new Bluetooth Dial-Up Networking connection"
+msgstr "Нове з’єднання комутованого доступу до мережі з Bluetooth"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:702
+msgid "A new Analog telephone modem connection (POTS)"
+msgstr "Нове аналогове телефонне з’єднання за допомогою модема (POTS)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:710
+msgid "Manual choice"
+msgstr "Вибір вручну"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:714
+msgid "Detected hardware, if any."
+msgstr "Виявлене обладнання, якщо обладнання вдасться виявити."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:720
+msgid "A list of ports is proposed. Select your port."
+msgstr "Список запропонованих портів. Виберіть потрібний вам порт."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:724
+msgid ""
+"If not yet installed, it will be suggested that you install the package "
+"<emphasis>kppp-provider</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+"Якщо цей пакунок ще не встановлено, програма запропонує встановити пакунок "
+"<emphasis>kppp-provider</emphasis>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:729
+msgid ""
+"A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your "
+"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</"
+"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave. Then it is asked "
+"for Dialup options:"
+msgstr ""
+"Вам буде запропоновано список постачальників послуг, поділений за країнами. "
+"Виберіть у ньому пункт вашого постачальника. Якщо відповідного пункту у "
+"списку не виявиться, виберіть пункт <guilabel>Не показано</guilabel>, а "
+"потім вкажіть значення параметрів, надані вашим постачальником послуг. Після "
+"цього програма попросить вас вказати параметри додзвону:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:736
+msgid "<emphasis>Connection name</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>Назва з’єднання</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:740
+msgid "<emphasis>Phone number</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>Номер телефону</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:744
+msgid "<emphasis>Login ID</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>Ідентифікатор користувача</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:748
+msgid "<emphasis>Password</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>Пароль</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:752
+msgid "<emphasis>Authentication</emphasis>, choose between:"
+msgstr "<emphasis>Розпізнавання</emphasis>, виберіть один з таких варіантів:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:756
+msgid "PAP/CHAP"
+msgstr "PAP/CHAP"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:760
+msgid "Script-based"
+msgstr "На основі скрипту"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:764
+msgid "PAP"
+msgstr "PAP"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:768
+msgid "Terminal-based"
+msgstr "На основі термінала"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:772
+msgid "CHAP"
+msgstr "CHAP"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:786
+msgid "Ending the configuration"
+msgstr "Завершення налаштовування"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:788
+msgid "In the next step, you can specify:"
+msgstr "На наступному кроці ви можете вказати такі параметри:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:792
+msgid "<emphasis>Allow users to manage the connection</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>Дозволити користувачам керувати з’єднанням</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:796
+msgid "<emphasis>Start the connection at boot</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>З’єднуватися під час завантаження</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:800
+msgid "<emphasis>Enable traffic accounting</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>Увімкнути облік потоку даних</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:804
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis>Дозволити керування інтерфейсом за допомогою Network Manager</"
+"emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:809
+msgid ""
+"In the case of a wireless connection, a supplemental box is <emphasis>Allow "
+"access point roaming</emphasis> which give the possibility to switch "
+"automatically between access point according to the signal strength."
+msgstr ""
+"У випадку бездротового з’єднання буде показано додатковий пункт "
+"<emphasis>Дозволити роумінг точки доступу</emphasis>. За допомогою цього "
+"пункту можна надати комп’ютеру змогу автоматично перемикатися між точками "
+"доступу відповідно до потужності сигналу."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:816
+msgid "With the advanced button, you can specify:"
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Додатково</guibutton> ви можете вказати:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:820
+msgid "Metric (10 by default)"
+msgstr "Метрику (типово 10)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:824
+msgid "MTU"
+msgstr "MTU"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:828
+msgid "Network Hotplugging"
+msgstr "Увімкнення мережі «вгарячу»"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:832
+msgid "Enable IPv6 to IPv4 tunnel"
+msgstr "Увімкнути тунелювання з IPv6 до IPv4"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:836
+msgid ""
+"The last step allows you to specify if the connection is to start "
+"immediately or not."
+msgstr ""
+"На останньому кроці можна визначити, чи буде виконано спробу з’єднатися "
+"негайно."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:840
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakconnect9.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakconnect9.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakconsole.xml:3
+msgid "Open a console as administrator"
+msgstr "Відкриття консолі від імені адміністратора"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakconsole.xml:5
+msgid "drakconsole"
+msgstr "drakconsole"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakconsole.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakconsole-im1\" fileref=\"drakconsole.png"
+"\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakconsole-im1\" fileref=\"drakconsole.png"
+"\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakconsole.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakconsole</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakconsole</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakconsole.xml:14
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> gives you access to a "
+"console which is directly opened as root. We do not think that you need more "
+"information about that."
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою цієї програми ви можете отримати доступ до консолі, відкритої "
+"від імені адміністратора системи (користувача root). Думаємо, цього опису "
+"достатньо, щоб зрозуміти, про що йдеться."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:8
+msgid "Manage disk partitions"
+msgstr "Керування розділами диска"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:10
+msgid "drakdisk or diskdrake"
+msgstr "drakdisk або diskdrake"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakdiskBackup-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"fileref=\"drakdiskBackup.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakdiskBackup-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"fileref=\"drakdiskBackup.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakdisk</emphasis> or <emphasis role=\"bold\">diskdrake</emphasis> "
+"as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakdisk</emphasis> або <emphasis role=\"bold\">"
+"diskdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:20
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is very powerful, a tiny "
+"error or a cat jumping on your keyboard can lead to losing all data on a "
+"partition or even to erasing the entire hard disk. For that reason, you'll "
+"see the screen above on top of the tool screen. Click on <emphasis>Exit</"
+"emphasis> if you're not sure you want to continue."
+msgstr ""
+"Ця програма є дуже потужною — найменша помилка або випадкове натискання "
+"клавіш може призвести до втрати всіх даних на розділі або навіть витирання "
+"всього жорсткого диска. З цієї причини вам буде показано наведене вище вікно "
+"над вікном програми. Натисніть кнопку <emphasis>Вийти</emphasis>, якщо ви не "
+"впевнені, чи бажаєте продовжувати роботу з програмою."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"If you have more than one hard disk, you can switch to the hard disk you "
+"want to work on by selecting the correct tab (sda, sdb, sdc etc)."
+msgstr ""
+"Якщо у вашій системі декілька жорстких дисків, ви можете перемкнутися на "
+"потрібний вам жорсткий диск вибором відповідної вкладки (sda, sdb, sdc тощо)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"drakdisk-"
+"im1\" fileref=\"drakdisk.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"drakdisk-"
+"im1\" fileref=\"drakdisk.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"You can choose from many actions to adjust your hard disk to your "
+"preferences. Wiping an entire hard disk, splitting or merging partitions, "
+"resizing them or changing the filesystem, formatting or viewing what is in a "
+"partition: it is all possible. The <emphasis><guibutton>Clear all</"
+"guibutton></emphasis> button at the bottom is to erase the complete disk, "
+"the other buttons become visible on the right after you click on a partition."
+msgstr ""
+"Ви можете вибрати одну з багатьох дій, за допомогою яких ви можете "
+"скоригувати розподіл вашого диска відповідно до ваших потреб. Витирання "
+"всього жорсткого диска, поділ та об’єднання розділів, зміна розмірів розділів "
+"або файлової системи розділів, форматування або перегляд вмісту розділу: все "
+"це можна зробити за допомогою цієї програми. Кнопку <emphasis><guibutton>"
+"Очистити все</guibutton></emphasis> у нижній частині вікна призначено для "
+"витирання всього диска. Доступ до інших кнопок дій, розташованих праворуч, "
+"можна отримати після натискання розділу на картинці диска."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"If the selected partition is mounted, like in the example below, you cannot "
+"choose to resize, format or delete it. To be able to do that the partition "
+"must be unmounted first."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:51
+msgid "It is only possible to resize a partition on its right side"
+msgstr ""
+"Зміну розмірів розділу можна виконувати лише за рахунок правої межі розділу."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"To change a partition type (change ext3 to ext4 for example) you have to "
+"delete the partition and then re-create it with the new type. The button "
+"<guibutton role=\"bold\">Create</guibutton> appears when a disk empty part "
+"is selected"
+msgstr ""
+"Щоб змінити тип розділу (наприклад, з ext3 на ext4), вам слід вилучити "
+"розділ, а потім повторно створити його з новим значенням типу. Якщо буде "
+"позначено порожню частину диска, у вікні програми з’явиться кнопка <guibutton "
+"role=\"bold\">Створити</guibutton>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:58
+msgid "You can choose a mount point that doesn't exist, it will be created."
+msgstr ""
+"Ви можете вибрати точку монтування, якої не існує. Якщо буде здійснено такий "
+"вибір, відповідну точку монтування буде створено."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakdiskMountedPartition-im1\" revision="
+"\"1\" fileref=\"drakdiskMountedPartition.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG"
+"\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakdiskMountedPartition-im1\" revision="
+"\"1\" fileref=\"drakdiskMountedPartition.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG"
+"\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:67
+msgid ""
+"Selecting <emphasis><guibutton>Toggle to expert mode</guibutton></emphasis> "
+"gives some extra available actions, like labelling the partition, as can be "
+"seen in the screenshot below."
+msgstr ""
+"Натискання кнопки <emphasis><guibutton>Перемкнути в режим експерта</guibutton>"
+"</emphasis> надасть вам доступ до додаткових дій, зокрема визначення мітки "
+"розділу, як це показано на наведеному нижче знімку."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:72
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakdiskExpertUnmounted-"
+"im1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png\" format=\"PNG"
+"\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakdiskExpertUnmounted-"
+"im1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png\" format=\"PNG"
+"\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakedm.xml:5
+msgid "Set up display manager"
+msgstr "Налаштування програми для керування сеансами"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakedm.xml:7
+msgid "drakedm"
+msgstr "drakedm"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakedm.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakedm-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakedm.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakedm-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakedm.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakedm.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakedm</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakedm</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakedm.xml:16
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"Here<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> you can choose which display "
+"manager to use to log into your desktop environment. Only the ones available "
+"on your system will be shown."
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою цієї програми ви можете вибрати засіб керування сеансами "
+"(менеджер реєстрації), який буде використано для входу до вашого стільничного "
+"середовища. У списку буде показано лише ті стільничні середовища, які "
+"встановлено у вашій системі."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakedm.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"Most users will only notice that the provided login screens look different. "
+"However, there are differences in supported features, too. LXDM is a "
+"lightweight display manager, KDM and GDM have more extras."
+msgstr ""
+"Більшість користувачів помітять лише те, що зміниться вікно входу до системи. "
+"Втім, різні менеджери реєстрації мають також і різні можливості. LXDM є "
+"найневибагливішим і найпростішим, KDM і GDM мають значно ширші можливості."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:3
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Set up your personal firewall"
+msgstr "Встановити особистий захисний шлюз"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:5
+msgid "drakfirewall"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"drakfirewall.png\" align="
+"\"center\" xml:id=\"drakfirewall-im1\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"drakfirewall.png\" align="
+"\"center\" xml:id=\"drakfirewall-im1\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakfirewall</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakfirewall</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the "
+"Security tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled \"Set up your personal "
+"firewall\". it is the same tool in the first tab of \"Configure system "
+"security, permissions and audit\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"A basic firewall is installed by default with Mageia. All the incoming "
+"connections from the outside are blocked if they aren't authorised. In the "
+"first screen above, you can select the services for which outside connection "
+"attempts are accepted. For your security, uncheck the first box - "
+"<guilabel>Everything (no firewall)</guilabel> - unless you want to disable "
+"the firewall, and only check the needed services."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"It is possible to manually enter the port numbers to open. Click on "
+"<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and a new window is opened. In the field "
+"<guilabel>Other ports</guilabel>, enter the needed ports following these "
+"examples :"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:32
+msgid "80/tcp : open the port 80 tcp protocol"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:34
+msgid "24000:24010/udp : open all the ports from 24000 to 24010 udp protocol"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:37
+msgid "The listed ports should be separated by a space."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"If the box <guilabel>Log firewall messages in system logs</guilabel> is "
+"checked, the firewall messages will be saved in system logs"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:43
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakfirewall2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakfirewall2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"If you don't host specific services (web or mail server, file sharing, ...) "
+"it is completely possible to have nothing checked at all, it is even "
+"recommended, it won't prevent you from connecting to the internet."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"The next screen deals with the Interactive Firewall options. These feature "
+"allow you to be warned of connection attempts if at least the first box "
+"<guilabel>Use Interactive Firewall </guilabel>is checked. Check the second "
+"box to be warned if the ports are scanned (in order to find a failure "
+"somewhere and enter your machine). Each box from the third one onwards "
+"corresponds to a port you opened in the two first screens; in the screenshot "
+"below, there are two such boxes: SSH server and 80:150/tcp. Check them to be "
+"warned each time a connection is attempted on those ports."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:64
+msgid "These warning are given by alert popups through the network applet."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:68
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakfirewall3.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakfirewall3.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:74
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakfirewall4.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakfirewall4.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:79
+msgid ""
+"In the last screen, choose which network interfaces are connected to the "
+"Internet and must be protected. Once the OK button is clicked, the necessary "
+"packages are downloaded."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:84
+msgid ""
+"If you don't know what to choose, have a look in MCC tab Network &amp; "
+"Internet, icon Set up a new network interface."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "DrakFloppy: Creating a Boot Disk"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:8 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:725
+msgid "boot disk"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><abstract><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:10
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "creating"
+msgstr "створення"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><abstract><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:12
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "applications"
+msgstr "Програми"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><abstract><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:14
+msgid "DrakFloppy"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><abstract><para><inlinemediaobject>
+#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../drakfloppy-icon.png\" "
+"width=\"2cm\" format=\"PNG\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../drakfloppy-icon.png\" "
+"width=\"2cm\" format=\"PNG\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><abstract><para>
+#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id="
+"\"1\"/><placeholder type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"2\"/>If you did not "
+"create a boot disk when you installed your system, this tool allows you to "
+"do so. This is also a rescue disk which allows you to perform maintenance "
+"tasks on your system in case of failure."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:28
+msgid "Using DrakFloppy"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"If you want to create a <quote>default</quote> boot disk, that is, one that "
+"is based on your current kernel, all you have to do is insert a floppy disk "
+"in the appropriate floppy drive, select that drive from the "
+"<guilabel>Device</guilabel> pull-down list and press the <guibutton>OK</"
+"guibutton> button. A dialog will pop up and remind you that a diskette must "
+"be inserted in the drive. Accept it to create the disk."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"If you want to customize your boot disk, you will have to hit the "
+"<guibutton>Preferences</guibutton> button and a window will pop up (see "
+"<xref linkend=\"drakfloppy-custom-disk\"></xref>)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><info><title>
+#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:47
+msgid "Making a Custom Boot Disk"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"2\" fileref=\"drakfloppy-custom-disk.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" width=\"11.5cm\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakfloppy-"
+"im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"2\" fileref=\"drakfloppy-custom-disk.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" width=\"11.5cm\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakfloppy-"
+"im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure>
+#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:46 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:25
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:158 en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:9
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:86
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id="
+"\"1\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id="
+"\"1\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml:57
+msgid ""
+"The window has two sections: one containing check boxes with options for "
+"<command>mkinitrd</command>, and another one with the modules <quote>tree</"
+"quote>. Select the modules you need to be added to the floppy. In this "
+"example, we want to use the <acronym>IDE</acronym> tape module and pre-load "
+"it. Use the <guibutton>Remove a module</guibutton> button to remove the "
+"currently selected module. When you are done customizing the boot disk press "
+"the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button, return to <application>drakfloppy</"
+"application>'s window and then proceed as indicated above to create the disk."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:3
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Manage, add and remove fonts. Import Windows(TM) fonts"
+msgstr "Вилучити і встановити шрифти. Імпорт шрифтів Windows™"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:6
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "drakfont"
+msgstr "DrakFont"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakfont-im1\" fileref="
+"\"drakfont.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakfont-im1\" fileref="
+"\"drakfont.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakfont</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakfont</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia "
+"Control Center under the <emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab. It "
+"allows you to manage the fonts available on the computer. The main screen "
+"above shows:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:22
+msgid "the installed font names, styles and sizes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:26
+msgid "a preview of the selected font."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:30
+msgid "some buttons explained here later."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:36
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Get Windows Fonts: <emphasis/></emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Отримати шрифти з Windows: <emphasis/></emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"This button automatically adds the fonts found on the Windows partition. You "
+"must have Microsoft Windows installed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:41
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Options:</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Параметри:</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"It allows you to specify the applications or devices (printers mostly)  able "
+"to use the fonts."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:46
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Uninstall:</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Вилучити:</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"This button is to remove installed fonts and possibly save some place.  Be "
+"careful when removing fonts because it may have serious consequences on the "
+"documents that use them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:52
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Import:</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Імпортувати:</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:54
+msgid ""
+"Allows you to add fonts from a third party (CD, internet, ...). The "
+"supported formats are ttf, pfa, pfb, pcf, pfm and gsf. Click on the "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Import</emphasis> button and then on <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">Add</emphasis>, a file manager pops up where you can select the "
+"fonts to install, click on <emphasis role=\"bold\">Install</emphasis> when "
+"done. They are installed in the folder /usr/share/fonts."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"If the newly installed (or removed) fonts doesn't appear in the Drakfont "
+"main screen, close and re open it to see the modifications."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:3
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Parental Controls"
+msgstr "Батьківський контроль"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:5
+msgid "drakguard"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakguard.png\" revision=\"1\" xml:id="
+"\"drakguard-im1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakguard.png\" revision=\"1\" xml:id="
+"\"drakguard-im1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakguard</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakguard</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia "
+"Control Center, under the Security tab, labelled <guilabel>Parental Control</"
+"guilabel>. If you don't see this label, you have to install the drakguard "
+"package (not installed by default)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:21
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Presentation"
+msgstr "Презентація"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"Drakguard is an easy way to set up parental controls on your computer to "
+"restrict who can do what, and at which times of day. Drakguard has three "
+"useful capabilities:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"It restricts web access to named users to set times of day. It does this by "
+"controlling the shorewall firewall built into Mageia."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"It blocks execution of particular commands by named users so these users can "
+"only execute what you accept them to execute."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"It restricts access to websites, both manually defined through blacklists/"
+"whitelists, but also dynamically based on the content of the website. To "
+"achieve this Drakguard uses the leading opensource parental control blocker "
+"DansGuardian."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:49
+msgid "Configuring Parental controls"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><warning><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"If your computer contains hard drive partitions that are formatted in Ext2, "
+"Ext3, or ReiserFS format you will see a pop up offering to configure ACL on "
+"your partitions. ACL stands for Access Control Lists, and is a Linux kernel "
+"feature that allows access to individual files to be restricted to named "
+"users. ACL is built into Ext4 and Btrfs file systems, but must be enabled by "
+"an option in Ext2, Ext3, or Reiserfs partitions. If you select 'Yes' to this "
+"prompt drakguard will configure all your partitions to support ACL, and will "
+"then suggest you reboot."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Enable parental control</guibutton>: If checked, the parental "
+"control is enable and the Block programm tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Block all network traffic</guibutton>: If checked, all the "
+"websites are blocked, except the ones in the whitelist tab. Otherwise, all "
+"the websites are allowed, except the ones in the blacklist tab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:68
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>User access</guibutton>: Users on the left hand side will have "
+"their access restricted according to the rules you define. Users on the "
+"right hand side have unrestricted access so adult users of the computer are "
+"not inconvenienced. Select an user in the left hand side and click "
+"on<guibutton> Add</guibutton> to add him/her as an allowed user.  Select an "
+"user in the right hand side and click on<guibutton> Remove</guibutton> to "
+"remove him/her from the allowed users."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Time control: </guibutton>If checked, internet access is allowed "
+"with restrictions between the <guilabel>Start</guilabel> time and "
+"<guilabel>End</guilabel> time. It is totally blocked outside these time "
+"window.<guibutton/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:82
+msgid "Blacklist/Whitelist tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:84
+msgid ""
+"Enter the website URL in the first field at the top and click on the "
+"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:89
+msgid "Block Programs Tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:91
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Block Defined Applications</guibutton>: Enables the use of ACL to "
+"restrict access to specific applications. Insert the path to the "
+"applications you wish to block."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:95
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Unblock Users list</guibutton>: Users listed on the right hand "
+"side will not be subject to acl blocking."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:9
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Share the Internet connection with other local machines"
+msgstr "Розділити доступ до Інтернету з іншими користувачами"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:12
+msgid "drakgw"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"drakgw.png\" format=\"PNG"
+"\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakgw-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"drakgw.png\" format=\"PNG"
+"\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakgw-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:25
+msgid "Principles"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:28
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakgw-net.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakgw-net.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>This is useful when you have a "
+"computer (3) which has Internet (2) access and is connected also to a local "
+"network (1). You can use computer (3) as a gateway to give that access to "
+"other workstations (5) and (6) in the local network (1). For this, the "
+"gateway must have two interfaces; the first one such as an ethernet card "
+"must be connected to the local network, and the second one (4) connected to "
+"the Internet (2)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"The first step is to verify that the network and the access to Internet are "
+"set up, as documented in <xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:45
+msgid "Gateway wizard"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakgw</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakgw</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"The wizard<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> offers successive steps "
+"which are shown below:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:54
+msgid ""
+"If the wizard does not detect at least two interfaces, it warns about this "
+"and asks to stop the network and configure the hardware."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"specify the interface used for the Internet connection. The wizard "
+"automatically suggests one of the interfaces, but you should verify that "
+"what is proposed is correct."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"specify which interface is used for the Lan access. The wizard also proposes "
+"one, check that this is correct."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:71
+msgid ""
+"The wizard proposes parameters for the Lan network, such as IP address, mask "
+"and domain name. Check that these parameters are compatible with the actual "
+"configuration. It is recommended that you accept these values."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:78
+msgid ""
+"specify if the computer has to be used as a DNS server. If yes, the wizard "
+"will check that <code>bind</code> is installed.  Otherwise, you have to "
+"specify the address of a DNS server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:84
+msgid ""
+"specify if the computer is to be used as a DHCP server. If yes, the wizard "
+"will check that <code>dhcp-server</code> is installed and offer to configure "
+"it, with start and end addresses in the DHCP range."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:91
+msgid ""
+"specify if the computer is to be used as a proxy server. If yes, the wizard "
+"will check that <code>squid</code> is installed and offer to configure it, "
+"with the address of the administrator (admin@mydomain.com), name of the "
+"proxy (myfirewall@mydomaincom), the port (3128) and the cache size (100 Mb)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:99
+msgid ""
+"The last step allows you to check if the gateway machine is connected to "
+"printers and to share them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:104
+msgid ""
+"You will be warned about the need to check the firewall if it is active."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:109
+msgid "Configure the client"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:111
+msgid ""
+"If you have configured the gateway machine with DHCP, you only need to "
+"specify in the network configuration tool that you get an address "
+"automatically (using DHCP). The parameters will be obtained when connecting "
+"to the network. This method is valid whatever operating system the client is "
+"using."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:117
+msgid ""
+"If you must manually specify the network parameters, you must in particular "
+"specify the gateway by entering the IP-address of the machine acting as the "
+"gateway."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:123
+msgid "Stop connection sharing"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:125
+msgid ""
+"If you want to stop sharing the connection on the Mageia computer, launch "
+"the tool. It will offer to reconfigure the connection or to stop the sharing."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:3
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Hosts definitions"
+msgstr "Клієнти мережі"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:5
+msgid "drakhosts"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"drakhosts."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"drakhosts-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"drakhosts."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"drakhosts-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakhosts</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakhosts</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"If some systems on your network grant you services, and have fixed IP-"
+"addresses, this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to "
+"specify a name to access them more easily. Then you can use that name "
+"instead of the IP-address."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:20
+msgid "<guibutton>Add</guibutton>"
+msgstr "<guibutton>Додати</guibutton>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"With this button, you add the name for a new system. You will get a window "
+"to specify the IP-address, the host name for the system, and optionally an "
+"alias which can be used in the same way that the name is."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:27
+msgid "<guibutton>Modify</guibutton>"
+msgstr "<guibutton>Змінити</guibutton>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"You can access the parameters of an entry previously defined. You get the "
+"same window."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakinvictus.xml:3
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Advanced setup for network interfaces and firewall"
+msgstr "Додаткові налаштування мережевого інтерфейсу і захисного шлюзу"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakinvictus.xml:3
+msgid "drakinvictus"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakinvictus.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakinvictus-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakinvictus.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakinvictus-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakinvictus.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakinvictus.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakinvictus</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakinvictus</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:10
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Network Center"
+msgstr "Мережевий центр"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:12
+msgid "draknetcenter"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"draknetcenter.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"draknetcenter-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"draknetcenter.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"draknetcenter-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">draknetcenter</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">draknetcenter</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the "
+"Network &amp; Internet tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled \"Network "
+"Center\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"When this tool is launched, a window opens listing all the networks "
+"configured on the computer, whatever their type (wired, wireless, satellite, "
+"etc.). When clicking on one of them, three or four buttons appear, depending "
+"on the network type, to allow you to look after the network, change its "
+"settings or connect/disconnect. This tool isn't intended to create a "
+"network, for this see <guilabel>Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, "
+"ADSL, ...)</guilabel> in the same MCC tab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenterEthernet-on.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenterEthernet-on.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenterEthernet-off.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenterEthernet-off.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenterWireless-off.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenterWireless-off.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenterWireless-on.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenterWireless-on.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"In the screenshot below, given as example, we can see two networks, the "
+"first one is wired and connected, recognizable by this icon <placeholder "
+"type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"0\"/> (this one is not connected<placeholder "
+"type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"1\"/> ) and the second section shows "
+"wireless networks, not connected recognizable by this icon <placeholder type="
+"\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"2\"/> and this one <placeholder type="
+"\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"3\"/>if connected. For the other network types, "
+"the colour code is always the same, green if connected and red if not "
+"connected."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"In the wireless part of the screen, you can also see all the detected "
+"networks, with the <guilabel>SSID</guilabel>, the <guilabel>Signal strengh</"
+"guilabel>, if they are encrypted (in red) or not (in green), and the "
+"<guilabel>Operating mode</guilabel>. Click on the chosen one and then either "
+"on <guibutton>Monitor</guibutton>, <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> or "
+"<guibutton>Connect</guibutton>. It is possible here to go from a network to "
+"another one. If a private network is selected, the Network Settings window "
+"(see below) will open and ask you for extra settings ( an encryption key in "
+"particular)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:72
+msgid "Click on <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> to update the screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:84
+msgid "The Monitor button"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:87
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter4.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter4.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:92
+msgid ""
+"This button allows you to watch the network activity, downloads (toward the "
+"PC, in red) and uploads (toward the Internet, in green). The same screen is "
+"available by right clicking on the <guimenu>Internet icon in the system tray "
+"-> Monitor Network</guimenu>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"There is a tab for each network (here eth0 is the wired network, lo the "
+"local loopback and wlan0 the wireless network) and a tab connection which "
+"gives details about connection status."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:102
+msgid ""
+"At the bottom of the window is a title <guilabel>Traffic accounting</"
+"guilabel>, we will look at that in the next section."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:108
+msgid "The Configure button"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:110
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">A - For a wired network</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:113
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:118
+msgid ""
+"It is possible to change all the settings given during network creation. "
+"Most of the time, checking <guibutton>Automatic IP</guibutton> "
+"<guibutton>(BOOTP/DHCP)</guibutton> will do, but in case of problems, manual "
+"configuration may give better results."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:123
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"For a residential network, the <guilabel>IP address</guilabel> always looks "
+"like 192.168.0.x, <guilabel>Netmask</guilabel> is 255.255.255.0, and the "
+"<guilabel>Gateway</guilabel> and <guilabel>DNS servers</guilabel> are "
+"available from your providers website."
+msgstr ""
+"У будинкових мережах IP-адреси завжди мають такий формат: <emphasis>"
+"192.168.0.x</emphasis>. Маскою мережі є <emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>. А "
+"дані щодо шлюзу та серверів DNS можна отримати з сайта вашого постачальника "
+"послуг."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:128
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Enable traffic accounting</guibutton> if checked this will count "
+"the traffic on a hourly, daily or monthly basis. The results are visible in "
+"the Network monitor detailed in the previous section. Once enabled, you may "
+"have to reconnect to the network."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:133
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager:"
+"</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis>Дозволити керування інтерфейсом за допомогою Network Manager</"
+"emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:140 en/draknetcenter.xml:185
+msgid "<guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:147
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter5.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter5.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:152
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">B - For a wireless network</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:154
+msgid "Only the item not already seen above are explained."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:157
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter3.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter3.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:162
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Operating mode:</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Режим роботи:</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:164
+msgid ""
+"Select <guilabel>Managed</guilabel> if the connection is via an access "
+"point, there is an <emphasis role=\"bold\">ESSID</emphasis> detected.  "
+"Select <guilabel>Ad-hoc</guilabel> if it is a peer to peer network. Select "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Master</emphasis> if your network card is used as "
+"the access point, your network card needs to support this mode."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:170
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Encryption mode and Encryption key:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:173
+msgid "If it is a private network, you need to know this settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:175
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>WEP</guilabel> uses a password and is weaker than WPA which uses a "
+"passphrase. <guilabel>WPA Pre-Shared Key</guilabel> is also called WPA "
+"personal or WPA home. <guilabel>WPA Enterprise</guilabel> is not often used "
+"in private networks."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:180
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Allow access point roaming</emphasis>:"
+msgstr "Дозволити роумінг точки доступу"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:182
+msgid ""
+"Roaming is a technology which enables allows computer to change its access "
+"point while remaining connected to the network."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:192
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter6.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter6.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:201
+msgid "The Advanced Settings button"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:208
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter7.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draknetcenter7.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:3
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Manage different network profiles"
+msgstr "Керувати різними мережевими профілями"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:3
+msgid "draknetprofile"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"draknetprofile-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"draknetprofile.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"draknetprofile-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"draknetprofile.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">draknetprofile</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">draknetprofile</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:9
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Share drives and directories using NFS"
+msgstr "Надати спільний доступ до файлів і тек з використанням NFS"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:11
+msgid "draknfs"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draknfs.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draknfs-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draknfs.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draknfs-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:24
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Prerequisites"
+msgstr "Передумови"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">draknfs</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">draknfs</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"When the wizard<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is launched for the "
+"first time, it may display the following message:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:33
+msgid "The package nfs-utils needs to be installed. Do you want to install it?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"After completing the installation, a window with an empty list is displayed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:42
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Main window"
+msgstr "Головне вікно"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"A list of directories which are shared is displayed. At this step, the list "
+"is empty. The <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button gives access to a "
+"configuration tool."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:50
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Modify entry"
+msgstr "Змінити запис"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"The configuration tool is labeled \"Modify entry\". It may be also launched "
+"with the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. The following parameters are "
+"available."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:57
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draknfs4.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draknfs-im4\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draknfs4.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draknfs-im4\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:64
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "NFS Directory"
+msgstr "Каталог NFS"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"Here you can specify which directory is to be shared. The "
+"<guibutton>Directory</guibutton> button gives access to a browser to choose "
+"it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:72
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Host access"
+msgstr "Доступ до машини"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:74
+msgid ""
+"Here you can specify the hosts that are authorized to access the shared "
+"directory."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:77
+msgid "NFS clients may be specified in a number of ways:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:79
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>single host</emphasis>: a host either by an abbreviated name "
+"recognized be the resolver, fully qualified domain name, or an IP address"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:83
+msgid "<emphasis>netgroups</emphasis>: NIS netgroups may be given as @group."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:86
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>wildcards</emphasis>: machine names may contain the wildcard "
+"characters * and ?. For instance: *.cs.foo.edu matches all hosts in the "
+"domain cs.foo.edu."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:90
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>IP networks</emphasis>: you can also export directories to all "
+"hosts on an IP (sub-)network simultaneously. For example, either "
+"`/255.255.252.0' or `/22' appended to the network base address."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:96
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "User ID Mapping"
+msgstr "Відображення ід. користувача"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:98
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>map root user as anonymous</emphasis>: maps requests from uid/gid "
+"0 to the anonymous uid/gid (root_squash). The root user from the client "
+"cannot read or write to the files on the server which are created by root on "
+"the server itself."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:103
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>allow real remote root access</emphasis>: turn off root squashing. "
+"This option is mainly useful for diskless clients (no_root_squash)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:107
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>map all users to anonymous user</emphasis>: maps all uids and gids "
+"to the anonymous user (all_squash). Useful for NFS-exported public FTP "
+"directories, news spool directories, etc. The opposite option is no user UID "
+"mapping (no_all_squash), which is the default setting."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:113
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>anonuid and anongid</emphasis>: explicitly set the uid and gid of "
+"the anonymous account."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:118
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Advanced options"
+msgstr "Додаткові параметри"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:120
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Secured Connection</emphasis>: this option requires that requests "
+"originate on an internet port less than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024).  This option "
+"is on by default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:124
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Read-Only share</emphasis>: allow either only read or both read "
+"and write requests on this NFS volume. The default is to disallow any "
+"request which changes the filesystem. This can also be made explicit by "
+"using this option."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:129
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Synchronous access</emphasis>: prevents the NFS server from "
+"violating the NFS protocol and to reply to requests before any changes made "
+"by these requests have been committed to stable storage (e.g. disc drive)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:134
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Subtree checking</emphasis>: enable subtree checking which can "
+"help improve security in some cases, but can decrease reliability. See "
+"exports(5) man page for more details."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:141 en/draksambashare.xml:202
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Menu entries"
+msgstr "Пункти меню"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:143
+msgid "So far the list is has at least one entry."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:146
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draknfs5.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draknfs-im5\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draknfs5.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draknfs-im5\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:153 en/draksambashare.xml:208
+msgid "File|Write conf"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:155
+msgid "Save the current configuration."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:159
+msgid "NFS Server|Restart"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:161 en/draksambashare.xml:223
+msgid ""
+"The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:166
+msgid "NFS Server|Reload"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:168 en/draksambashare.xml:230
+msgid ""
+"The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration files."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakproxy.xml:10
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Proxy"
+msgstr "Проксі"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakproxy.xml:12
+msgid "drakproxy"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakproxy.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"drakproxy.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakproxy-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"drakproxy.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakproxy-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakproxy.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakproxy</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakproxy</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakproxy.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"If you have to use a proxy server to access to the internet, you can use "
+"this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> to configure it. Your net "
+"administrator will give you the information you need. You can also specify "
+"some services which can be accessed without the proxy by exception."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakproxy.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"From Wikipedia, on 2012-09-24, article Proxy server: In computer networks, a "
+"proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application)  that acts as "
+"an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other "
+"servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, "
+"such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a "
+"different server. The proxy server evaluates the request as a way to "
+"simplify and control their complexity."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:3
+msgid "Configure Media"
+msgstr "Налаштувати джерело"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:5
+msgid "drakrpm-edit-media"
+msgstr "drakrpm-edit-media"
+
+#.  2013-01-06 marja - added Qilaq's and spturtle's corrections
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakrpm-edit-media-im1\" fileref=\"drakrpm-"
+"edit-media.png\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakrpm-edit-media-im1\" fileref=\"drakrpm-"
+"edit-media.png\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><important><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"First thing to do after an install is to add software sources (as known as "
+"repositories, media, mirrors). That means you must select the media sources "
+"to be used to install and update packages and applications. (see Add button "
+"below)."
+msgstr ""
+"Одразу після встановлення системи слід додати записи джерел програмного "
+"забезпечення (їх також називають сховищами, носіями даних, дзеркалами). Це "
+"означає, що вам слід вибрати джерела програмного забезпечення, які буде "
+"використано для встановлення і оновлення пакунків та програм (див. кнопку "
+"<guilabel>Додати</guilabel>, описану нижче)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:21 en/MageiaUpdate.xml:17 en/MageiaUpdate.xml:32
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:36 en/XFdrake.xml:75 en/XFdrake.xml:89
+msgid "<note>"
+msgstr "<note>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"Your system is running under an architecture than may be 32-bit called i586, "
+"or 64-bit called x86_64. Take care to choose repositories that suit your "
+"system or are not dependent of the architecture, these are called noarch "
+"packages."
+msgstr ""
+"Ваша система може працювати на 32-бітовій апаратній архітектурі, яка "
+"називається у дистрибутиві i586, або 64-бітовій архітектурі, яка має назву "
+"x86_64. Вам слід вибрати сховища, які відповідають вашій системі та сховища "
+"для пакунків, які не залежать від архітектури (їх ще називають noarch)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:26 en/mageia-doc-readme.xml:15
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:21 en/MageiaUpdate.xml:40 en/XFdrake.xml:79
+msgid "</note>"
+msgstr "</note>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakrpm-edit-media</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakrpm-edit-media</emphasis> від імені "
+"адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">Software management.</emphasis><placeholder type=\"footnote\" "
+"id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+"Доступ до цієї програми можна отримати з Центру керування Mageia, сторінка "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Менеджер програм</emphasis><placeholder type="
+"\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:34
+msgid "The columns"
+msgstr "Стовпчики"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:36
+msgid "Column Enable:"
+msgstr "Стовпчик «Доступний»:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:38
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"The checked media will be used to install new packages. Be cautious with "
+"some media such as Testing and Debug, they could make your system unusable."
+msgstr ""
+"Позначені джерела буде використано для встановлення нових пакунків. "
+"Спеціальні джерела, зокрема Testing і debug, вибирати не варто, оскільки їх "
+"використання може призвести до непрацездатності системи."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:42
+msgid "Column Update:"
+msgstr "Стовпчик «Поновлення»:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"The checked media will be used to update packages, it must be enabled. Only "
+"media with \"Update\" in its name should be selected. For security reasons, "
+"this column isn't modifiable in this tool, you must open a console as root "
+"and type <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakrpm-edit-media --expert.</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+"Якщо джерело буде використано для оновлення пакунків, його слід позначити у "
+"цьому стовпчику. Має бути позначено лише джерела зі словом "
+"«Update» (оновлення) у назві. З міркувань безпеки значення у цьому стовпчику "
+"не можна змінювати за допомогою цієї програми. Вам доведеться відкрити "
+"консоль і від імені адміністратора (root) віддати команду <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakrpm-edit-media --expert</emphasis>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:50
+msgid "Column medium:"
+msgstr "Стовпчик «Джерело»:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"Display the medium name. Mageia official repositories for final release "
+"versions contain at least:"
+msgstr ""
+"Тут буде показано назву джерела. Офіційні сховища Mageia для остаточних "
+"випусків містять принаймні такі елементи:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:57
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Core</emphasis> which contains most programs "
+"available supported by Mageia."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">core</emphasis> (основа) — сховище, що містить "
+"більшість програм, які підтримуються спільнотою Mageia."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Nonfree</emphasis> which contains some programs "
+"which are not free"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:67
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Tainted</emphasis> free software for which there "
+"might be patent claims in some countries."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">tainted</emphasis> (нечисте) — сховища з вільним "
+"програмним забезпеченням, щодо використання якого у певних країнах можуть "
+"застосовуватися патентні обмеження."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:70
+msgid "Each medium has 4 sub-sections:"
+msgstr "Кожен запис джерела містить 4 підрозділи:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:74
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Release</emphasis> the packages as of the day the "
+"this version of Mageia was released."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">release</emphasis> (випуск) — сховище пакунків на "
+"день випуску вашої версії Mageia."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:79
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Updates</emphasis> the packages updated since "
+"release due to security or bug concerns. Everyone should have this medium "
+"enabled, even with a very slow internet connection."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">updates</emphasis> (оновлення) — пакунки, оновлені з "
+"часу випуску з міркувань безпеки або усування вад. Це джерело варто "
+"увімкнути всім, навіть якщо з’єднання з інтернетом є дуже повільним."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:85
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Backports</emphasis> some packages of new versions "
+"backported from Cauldron (the next version under development)."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">backports</emphasis> (зворотне портування) — для "
+"деяких з пакунків нові версії портуються зі сховища Cauldron (сховища "
+"наступної версії дистрибутива, розробку якої ще не завершено)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:91
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Testing</emphasis> which is used for temporary tests "
+"of new updates, to allow the bug reporters and the QA team to validate the "
+"corrections."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">testing</emphasis> (тестування) — сховище, яке "
+"використовується для проміжного тестування оновлень, щоб дати змогу тим, хто "
+"звітує про вади, та учасникам команди із забезпечення якості перевірити "
+"працездатність виправлених пакунків."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:99
+msgid "The buttons on the right"
+msgstr "Кнопки на панелі праворуч"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:102
+msgid "<guibutton>Remove:</guibutton>"
+msgstr "<guibutton>Вилучити:</guibutton>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:104
+msgid ""
+"To remove a medium, click on it and then on this button. It is wise to "
+"remove the medium used for the installation (CD or DVD for example)  since "
+"all the packages it contains are in the official Core release medium."
+msgstr ""
+"Щоб вилучити джерело, наведіть на його пункт вказівник миші і клацніть лівою "
+"кнопкою, потім натисніть цю кнопку. Іноді варто вилучити пункт носія, який "
+"було використано для встановлення системи (компакт-диск або DVD) оскільки "
+"всі пакунки з цього носія можна встановити з офіційного джерела основних "
+"пакунків (Core) відповідного випуску."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:109
+msgid "<guibutton>Edit:</guibutton>"
+msgstr "<guibutton>Виправити:</guibutton>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:111
+msgid ""
+"Allows you to modify the selected medium settings, (URL, downloader and "
+"proxy)."
+msgstr ""
+"Надає вам змогу вносити зміни до параметрів позначеного запису джерела "
+"(адресу, програму для звантаження і параметри проксі-сервера)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:114
+msgid "<guibutton>Add:</guibutton>"
+msgstr "<guibutton>Додати:</guibutton>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:116
+msgid ""
+"Add the official repositories available on the internet. These repositories "
+"contains only sure and well tested software. Clicking on the add button "
+"opens a pop up window giving the choices of installing the \"Update sources "
+"only\" or the \"Full set of sources\". The first choice the essential, the "
+"second is more useful."
+msgstr ""
+"Кнопка для додавання офіційних сховищ з інтернету. У офіційних сховищах "
+"містяться лише надійні і добре перевірені пакунки. Після натискання кнопки "
+"<guibutton>Додати</guibutton> програма відкриє контекстне вікно, за "
+"допомогою якого ви зможете вибрати набір джерел для встановлення: «Тільки "
+"джерела з поновленнями» або «Повний набір джерел». Перший варіант є "
+"мінімалістичним, другий — найкориснішим."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:122
+msgid "<guibutton>Up and down arrows:</guibutton>"
+msgstr "<guibutton>Кнопки зі стрілками вгору і вниз:</guibutton>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:124
+msgid ""
+"Change the list order. When Drakrpm looks for a package, it reads the list "
+"in the displayed order and will install the first found package (for a same "
+"release number, if not, the last release will be installed).  So if "
+"possible, place the fastest repositories on the top."
+msgstr ""
+"Ці кнопки призначено для впорядковування списку. Під час пошуків пакунків "
+"програмою Drakrpm виконується завантаження списку сховищ у показаному "
+"порядку, пакунок встановлюється зі сховища, яке стоятиме вище у списку (якщо "
+"номер випуску пакунка є однаковим в усіх сховищах; якщо номер буде різним, "
+"програма встановить пакунок з найсвіжішого випуску). Отже, якщо можна, "
+"розташовуйте сховища з найшвидшим доступом на початку списку."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:131 en/harddrake2.xml:64
+msgid "The menu"
+msgstr "Меню програми"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:133
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "<guimenu>File -> Update:</guimenu>"
+msgstr "<guimenu>Файл</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Оновити</guimenuitem>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:135
+msgid ""
+"A window pops up with the media list. Select the ones you want to update and "
+"click on the <guibutton>Update</guibutton> button."
+msgstr ""
+"У відповідь на вибір цього пункту буде відкрито вікно зі списком джерел. "
+"Виберіть ті з них, дані яких слід оновити, і натисніть кнопку "
+"<guibutton>Оновити</guibutton>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:138
+msgid "<guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror:</guimenu>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:140
+msgid ""
+"Suppose you aren't happy with the actual mirror, because for example it's "
+"too slow or often unavailable, you can choose another mirror. Select all the "
+"actual media and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to take them out. "
+"Click on <guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror</guimenu>, choose "
+"between update only or the full set (if you do not know, choose the "
+"<guibutton>Full set of sources</guibutton>) and accept the contact by "
+"clicking on <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>. This window opens:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:150
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakrpmEditMedia2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakrpmEditMedia2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:155
+msgid ""
+"You can see, on the left, a list of countries, choose yours or one very "
+"close by clicking on the > symbol, this will display all the available "
+"mirrors in that country. Select one and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:160
+msgid "<guimenu>File -> Add a custom medium:</guimenu>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:162
+msgid ""
+"It is possible to install a new media (from a third party for example) that "
+"isn't supported by Mageia. A new window appears:"
+msgstr ""
+"Ви можете виконати встановлення з нового джерела (наприклад, зі стороннього "
+"сховища спільноти), яке не підтримується офіційно спільнотою Mageia. У "
+"відповідь на вибір цього пункту меню буде показано нове вікно:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:166
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:165
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>Select the medium type, find a "
+"smart name that well define the medium and give the URL (or the path, "
+"according to the medium type)"
+msgstr ""
+"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>Виберіть тип джерела, вкажіть "
+"коротку назву, яка добре описує відповідне сховище, і додайте адресу (або "
+"шлях до джерела, залежно від його типу)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:173
+msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Global options:</guimenu>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:175
+msgid ""
+"This item allows you to choose when to \"Verify RPMs to be installed"
+"\" (always or never), the download program (curl, wget or aria2) and to "
+"define the download policy for information about the packages (on demand -by "
+"default-, update only, always or never)."
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою цього пункту меню ви можете визначити, коли слід "
+"<guilabel>Перевіряти пакунки, які встановлюються</guilabel> (завжди або "
+"ніколи), визначити програму для отримання пакунків (curl, wget або aria2) і "
+"вказати правила отримання даних щодо пакунків (на запит (типовий варіант), "
+"тільки поновлення, завжди або ніколи)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:180
+msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Manage keys:</guimenu>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:182
+msgid ""
+"To guarantee a high level of security, digital keys are used to authenticate "
+"the media. It is possible for each medium to allow or disallow a key. In the "
+"window that appear, select a medium and then click on <guibutton>Add</"
+"guibutton> to allow a new key or to select a key and click on "
+"<guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to disallow that key."
+msgstr ""
+"З метою забезпечення кращої безпеки для розпізнавання джерела "
+"використовуються цифрові ключі. Для кожного з джерел можна дозволити або "
+"заборонити використання ключа. У вікні, яке буде відкрито, виберіть джерело "
+"і натисніть кнопку <guibutton>Додати</guibutton>, щоб уможливити "
+"використання нового ключа, або позначте пункт ключа і натисніть кнопку "
+"<guibutton>Вилучити</guibutton>, щоб заборонити його використання."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><warning><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:189
+msgid "Do this with care, as with all security-related questions"
+msgstr ""
+"Будьте обережними, як і з усіма іншими питаннями, пов’язаними з безпекою."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:190
+msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Proxy:</guimenu>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:192
+msgid ""
+"If you need to use a proxy server for internet access, you can configure it "
+"here. You only need to give the <guibutton>Proxy hostname</guibutton> and if "
+"necessary a <guilabel>Username</guilabel> and <guilabel>Password</guilabel>."
+msgstr ""
+"Якщо для доступу до інтернету з вашого комп’ютера слід користуватися проксі-"
+"сервером, ви можете вказати параметри його роботи. Вам слід вказати "
+"<guibutton>Назву проксі</guibutton> і, якщо потрібно, вказати "
+"<guilabel>Користувача</guilabel> і <guilabel>Пароль</guilabel>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakrpm-update.xml:3
+msgid "Software Packages Update (OLD)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakrpm-update.xml:3
+msgid "drakrpm-update"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-update.xml:8
+msgid "DON'T USE THIS FILE, USE MageiaUpdate.xml INSTEAD!"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:10
+msgid "Share directories and drives with Samba"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:13
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "draksambashare"
+msgstr "Draksambashare"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"Samba is a protocol used in different Operating Systems to share some "
+"resources like directories or printers. This tool allows you to configure "
+"the machine as a Samba server using the protocol SMB/CIFS. This protocol is "
+"also used by Windows(R) and workstations with this OS can access the "
+"resources of the Samba server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:37
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Preparation"
+msgstr "Приготування"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"To be accessed from other workstations, the server has to have a fixed IP "
+"address. This can be specified directly on the server, for example with "
+"<xref linkend=\"draknetcenter-ti1\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:43
+msgid ""
+", or at the DHCP server which identifies the station with its MAC-address "
+"and give it always the same address. The firewall has also to allow the "
+"incoming requests to the Samba server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:51
+msgid "Wizard - Standalone server"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:54
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing<emphasis role=\"bold"
+"\"> draksambashare</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">draksambashare</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"At the first run, the tools <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> checks "
+"if needed packages are installed and proposes to install them if they are "
+"not yet present. Then the wizard to configure the Samba server is launched."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare0.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare0-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare0.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare0-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:68
+msgid ""
+"In the next window the Standalone server configuration option is already "
+"selected."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:71
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare1.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare1-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare1.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare1-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:78
+msgid ""
+"Then specify the name of the workgroup. This name should be the same for the "
+"access to the shared resources."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:81
+msgid ""
+"The netbios name is the name which will be used to designate the server on "
+"the network."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:85
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare2.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare2-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare2.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare2-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:92
+msgid "Choose the security mode:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:96
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>user</guilabel>: the client must be authorized to access the "
+"resource"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:101
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>share</guilabel>: the client authenticates itself separately for "
+"each share"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:106
+msgid ""
+"You can specify which hosts are allowed to access the resources, with IP "
+"addess or host name."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:110
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare3.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare3-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare3.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare3-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:116
+msgid ""
+"Specify the server banner. The banner is the way this server will be "
+"described in the Windows workstations."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:120
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare4.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im4\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare4.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im4\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:127
+msgid ""
+"The place where Samba can log information can be specified at the next step."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:131
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare5.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im5\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare5.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im5\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:138
+msgid ""
+"The wizard displays a list of the chosen parameters before you accept the "
+"configuration. When accepted, the configuration will be written in <code>/"
+"etc/samba/smb.conf</code>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:143
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare6.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im6\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare6.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im6\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:152
+msgid "Wizard - Primary domain controller"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><mediaobject>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:155
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draksambashare13.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draksambashare13.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:154
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>If the \"Primary domain "
+"controller\" option is selected, the wizard asks for indication if Wins is "
+"to support or not and to provide admin users names. The following steps are "
+"then the same as for standalone server, except you can choose also the "
+"security mode:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:165
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>domain</guilabel>: provides a mechanism for storing all user and "
+"group accounts in a central, shared, account repository.  The centralized "
+"account repository is shared between (security)  controllers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:174
+msgid "Declare a directory to share"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:176
+msgid "With the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, we get:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:179
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare15.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im7\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare15.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im7\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:185
+msgid ""
+"A new entry is thus added. It can be modified with the <guibutton>Modify</"
+"guibutton> button. Options can be edited, such as whether the directory is "
+"visible to the public, writable or browseable.  The share name can not be "
+"modified."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:191
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare16.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im8\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"draksambashare16.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksambashare-im8\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:204
+msgid "When the list has at least one entry, menu entries can be used."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:210
+msgid "Save the current configuration in <code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:215
+msgid "Samba server|Configure"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:217
+msgid "The wizard can be run again with this command."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:221
+msgid "Samba server|Restart"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:228
+msgid "Samba Server|Reload"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:236
+msgid "Printers share"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:238
+msgid "Samba also allows you to share printers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><mediaobject>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:241
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draksambashare17.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draksambashare17.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><screenshot>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:240 en/drakvpn.xml:46 en/logdrake.xml:89
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:42 en/rpmdrake.xml:147 en/rpmdrake.xml:157
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:167 en/rpmdrake.xml:177 en/rpmdrake.xml:187
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:222
+msgid "<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr "<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:248
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Samba users"
+msgstr "Користувачі Sa&mba"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><mediaobject>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:253
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draksambashare18.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"draksambashare18.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:250
+msgid ""
+"In this tab, you can add users who are allowed to access the shared "
+"resources when authentication is required. You can add users from <xref "
+"linkend=\"userdrake-ti1\"/><placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draksec.xml:3
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Configure authentication for Mageia tools"
+msgstr "Налаштувати розпізнавання для інструментів Mageia"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/draksec.xml:6
+msgid "draksec"
+msgstr "draksec"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draksec.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"draksec-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"draksec.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"draksec-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"draksec.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">draksec</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">draksec</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia "
+"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Security</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"It allows to give the regular users the needed rights to accomplish tasks "
+"usually done by the administrator."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"Most of the tools available in the Mageia Control Center are displayed in "
+"the left side of the window (see the screenshot above) and for each tool, a "
+"drop down list gives the choice between:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:29
+msgid "No password: The tool is launched without asking any password."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:34
+msgid "User password: The user password is asked before the tool launching."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:39
+msgid "Root password: the root password is asked before the tool launching"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"The default values depend of the chosen security level. See in the same MCC "
+"tab, the tool \"Configure system security, permissions and audit\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:3
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Snapshots"
+msgstr "Знімки"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:3
+msgid "draksnapshot-config"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"draksnapshot-config-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"draksnapshot-config.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"draksnapshot-config-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"draksnapshot-config.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"If you see the screen above when starting this tool, please close it. This "
+"crash has been reported many times."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"You can read more about the problem in this bug report: <link xlink:href="
+"\"https://bugs.mageia.org/show_bug.cgi?id=3032\">bug 3032</link>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"We shall replace the screenshot with a correct one of the tool, and fill "
+"this page with instructions about how to use it, when the bug is fixed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">draksnapshot-config</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">draksnapshot-config</emphasis> від імені "
+"адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draksound.xml:3
+msgid "Sound Configuration"
+msgstr "Налаштовування звуку"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/draksound.xml:5
+msgid "draksound"
+msgstr "draksound"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draksound.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksound-im1\" fileref="
+"\"draksound.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"draksound-im1\" fileref="
+"\"draksound.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">draksound</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">draksound</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia "
+"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Hardware</emphasis>.¶"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"Draksound deals with the sound configuration, including the driver choice, "
+"PulseAudio options and trouble shooting. It will help you if you experience "
+"sound problems or if you change the sound card."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"The drop down list called <guilabel>Driver</guilabel> allows you to select a "
+"driver from all the ones available on the computer that match the sound card."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"Most of the time, it is possible to choose a driver using the OSS or ALSA "
+"API. OSS is the oldest and very basic, we recommend to choose ALSA when "
+"possible for its enhanced features."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>PulseAudio</guilabel> is a sound server. It receives all the sound "
+"inputs, mixes them according to the user preferences and sends the resulting "
+"sound to the output. See <guimenu>Menu ->Sound and video -> PulseAudio "
+"volume control</guimenu> to set these preferences."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"PulseAudio is the default sound server and it is recommended to leave it "
+"enabled."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:41
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Glitch-Free</guilabel> improves PulseAudio with some programs. It "
+"is also recommended to leave it enabled."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"The button <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> display a new windows with three "
+"buttons :"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/draksound.xml:48
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"Draksound1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"Draksound1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"The first button gives total freedom of choice. You have to know what you "
+"are doing."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"The second one is obvious and the last one gives assistance with fixing any "
+"problems you may have. You will find it helpful to try this before asking "
+"the community for help."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakups.xml:3
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Set up a UPS for power monitoring"
+msgstr "Встановити UPS для контролю за живленням"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakups.xml:3
+msgid "drakups"
+msgstr "drakups"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakups.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakups-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakups.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakups-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakups.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakups.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakups</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakups</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:3
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Configure VPN Connection to secure network access"
+msgstr "Налаштувати з'єднання VPN для безпеки доступу до мережі"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:6
+msgid "drakvpn"
+msgstr "drakvpn"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakvpn-im1\" align=\"center"
+"\" fileref=\"drakvpn1.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"drakvpn-im1\" align=\"center"
+"\" fileref=\"drakvpn1.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakvpn</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakvpn</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to configure "
+"secure access to a remote network establishing a tunnel between the local "
+"workstation and the remote network. We discuss here only of the "
+"configuration on the workstation side. We assume that the remote network is "
+"already in operation, and that you have the connection information from the "
+"network administrator, like a .pcf configuration file ."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:30
+msgid "Configuration"
+msgstr "Налаштування"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"First, select either Cisco VPN Concentrator or OpenVPN, depending on which "
+"protocol is used for your virtual private network."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:35
+msgid "Then give your connection a name."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:37
+msgid "At the next screen, provide the details for your VPN connection."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:42
+msgid "For Cisco VPN"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:47
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakvpn3.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakvpn3.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:54
+msgid ""
+"For openvpn. The openvpn package and its dependencies will be installed the "
+"first time the tools is used."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:58
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakvpn7.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakvpn7.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:57
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>Select the files that you "
+"received from the network administrator."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:64
+msgid "Advanced parameters:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:67
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakvpn8.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"drakvpn8.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:72
+msgid "The next screen asks for IP-address of the gateway."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"When the parameters are set, you have the option of starting the VPN "
+"connection."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:79
+msgid ""
+"This VPN connection can be set to start automatically with a network "
+"connection. To do this, reconfigure the network connection to always connect "
+"to this VPN."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:3
+msgid "Configure webserver"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:3
+msgid "drakwizard apache2"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_apache2-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_apache2.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_apache2-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_apache2.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakwizard apache2</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakwizard apache2</emphasis> від імені "
+"адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:3
+msgid "Configure DNS"
+msgstr "Налаштовування DNS"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:3
+msgid "drakwizard bind"
+msgstr "drakwizard bind"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_bind-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_bind.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_bind-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_bind.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakwizard bind</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakwizard bind</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:3
+msgid "Configure DHCP"
+msgstr "Налаштовування DHCP"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:3
+msgid "drakwizard dhcp"
+msgstr "drakwizard dhcp"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_dhcp-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_dhcp.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_dhcp-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_dhcp.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakwizard dhcp</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakwizard dhcp</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:3
+msgid "Configure time"
+msgstr "Налаштовування часу"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:3
+msgid "drakwizard ntp"
+msgstr "drakwizard ntp"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_ntp-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_ntp.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_ntp-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_ntp.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakwizard ntp</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakwizard ntp</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:3
+msgid "Configure FTP"
+msgstr "Налаштовування FTP"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:3
+msgid "drakwizard proftpd"
+msgstr "drakwizard proftpd"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_proftpd-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_proftpd.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_proftpd-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_proftpd.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakwizard proftpd</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakwizard proftpd</emphasis> від імені "
+"адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:3
+msgid "Configure proxy"
+msgstr "Налаштовування проксі-сервера"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:3
+msgid "drakwizard squid"
+msgstr "drakwizard squid"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_squid-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_squid.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_squid-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_squid.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakwizard squid</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakwizard squid</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:3
+msgid "OpenSSH daemon configuration"
+msgstr "Налаштовування фонової служби OpenSSH"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:3
+msgid "drakwizard sshd"
+msgstr "drakwizard sshd"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_sshd-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_sshd.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"drakwizard_sshd-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakwizard_sshd.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakwizard sshd</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakwizard sshd</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-acceptLicense-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - License Terms of the Distribution"
+msgstr "Застаріле — ліцензійна угода щодо дистрибутива"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-acceptLicense-sect1.xml:8
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-license.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-acceptLicense-im1\" revision=\"3\" width="
+"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-license.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-acceptLicense-im1\" revision=\"3\" width="
+"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-acceptLicense-sect1.xml:14 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:204
+msgid "license"
+msgstr "ліцензія"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-acceptLicense-sect1.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>Before continuing, you should "
+"carefully read the terms of the license. It covers the entire "
+"<application>Mageia</application> distribution. If you agree with all the "
+"terms it contains, select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and click on "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. If not, clicking on <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> "
+"will reboot your computer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/drakx-acceptLicense-sect1.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"If you are curious about any technical changes which have occurred in the "
+"distribution since the last release, you can click on the <guibutton>Release "
+"Notes</guibutton> button to display them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - Adding a User"
+msgstr "Застаріле — додавання користувача"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx-addUser.png\" width="
+"\"11.5cm\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-addUser-"
+"im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx-addUser.png\" width="
+"\"11.5cm\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-addUser-"
+"im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml:16
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "users"
+msgstr "Користувачі"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml:18
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "adding"
+msgstr "Додавання:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"<application>GNU/Linux</application> is a multi-user system which means each "
+"user can have his or her own preferences, own files and so on. But unlike "
+"<literal>root</literal>, who is the system administrator, the <placeholder "
+"type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>users you add at this point won't be authorized "
+"to change anything except their own files and their own configurations, "
+"protecting the system from unintentional or malicious changes which could "
+"have a serious impact on it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"You will have to create at least one regular user for yourself — this is the "
+"account which you should use for routine, day-to-day usage. Although it's "
+"very easy to log in as <literal>root</literal> to do anything and "
+"everything, it may also be very dangerous! A very simple mistake could mean "
+"that your system won't work any more. If you make a serious mistake as a "
+"regular user, the worst that can happen is that you'll lose some "
+"information, but you won't affect the entire system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"The first field asks you for a real name. <application>DrakX</application> "
+"will use the first word you type in this field and copy it, all in "
+"lowercase, to the <guimenu>Login name</guimenu> field, which is the name "
+"this user will enter to log on to the system. You can override it and change "
+"the <guimenu>Login Name</guimenu>. The next step is to enter a password. "
+"From a security point of view, a non-privileged (regular) user's password is "
+"not as crucial as the <literal>root</literal> password, but that's no reason "
+"to neglect it by making it blank or too simple: after all, <emphasis>your</"
+"emphasis> files could be the ones at risk."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"Once you click on <guimenu>Accept user</guimenu> you can add other users. "
+"Add a user for each one of your friends, your father, your sister, etc. "
+"Click <guimenu>Next</guimenu> when you're finished adding users."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><tip><para>
+#: en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml:54 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:623
+msgid ""
+"Clicking the <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button allows you to change the "
+"default <literal>shell</literal> for that user (<application>bash</"
+"application> by default)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - Choosing Mount Points"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml:14 en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml:16
+#, fuzzy
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:532 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:534
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:14 en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:22
+msgid "root"
+msgstr "root"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml:15
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "partition"
+msgstr "Розділ диска"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml:15 en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:24
+#, fuzzy
+#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:110
+#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:21
+#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:28
+#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:52 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:442
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:472 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:482
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:502 en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:17
+msgid "partitions"
+msgstr "розділи"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard drive. "
+"You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most "
+"common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a "
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id="
+"\"1\"/>root partition (<literal revision=\"3\">/</literal>). Do not choose "
+"too small a partition or you will not be able to install enough software. In "
+"most cases it is best to also create a <literal>/home</literal> partition, "
+"to store your data on (only possible if you have more than one Linux "
+"partition available)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"Each partition is listed as follows: \"Device\", \"Capacity\", \"Mount point"
+"\",\"Type\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"\"Device\", is structured: \"hard drive type\", \"hard drive number\", "
+"\"partition number\" (for example, \"sda5\")."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"When the mount points are correct, or corrected, click <guibutton>Next</"
+"guibutton>. You'll then be given the choice to format one or more of the "
+"partitions you just chose to install Mageia on. Usually, formatting "
+"<literal>/</literal> and saving <literal>/home</literal> (if the same "
+"partition was your <literal>/home</literal> before), is a good choice."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-chooseCd-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - Multiple CD-ROM Installation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-chooseCd-sect1.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"The <application>Mandriva Linux</application> installation is distributed on "
+"several <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym>s. If a selected package is located on "
+"another <acronym>CD</acronym>, <application>DrakX</application> will eject "
+"the current <acronym>CD</acronym> and ask you to insert the required one. If "
+"you do not have the requested <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym> at hand, just click "
+"on <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>, and the corresponding packages will not be "
+"installed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - Choose Packages to Install"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:11
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Graphical Environment"
+msgstr "Графічне середовище"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:13 en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:31
+#, fuzzy
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:48 en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:57
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:72
+msgid "packages"
+msgstr "пакунки"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:14
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "graphical environment"
+msgstr "Графічне середовище"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> <guilabel>Graphical Environment</"
+"guilabel>: this is where you will choose your preferred graphical "
+"environment. At least one must be selected if you want to have a graphical "
+"interface available."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:21
+msgid "Choose Package Groups to Install"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-choosePackages.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-choosePackages-im1\" revision=\"3\" width="
+"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:32
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "installing"
+msgstr "встановлення"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>It's now time to specify which "
+"programs you wish to install on your system. There are thousands of packages "
+"available for <application>Mageia</application>, and to make it simpler to "
+"manage, they have been placed into groups of similar applications."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"<application>Mageia</application> sorts package groups into categories. You "
+"can mix and match applications from the various categories, so a "
+"<guilabel>Workstation</guilabel> installation can still have applications "
+"from the <guilabel>Server</guilabel> category installed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:49
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "workstation"
+msgstr "Робоча станція"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Workstation</guilabel>: "
+"if you plan to use your machine as a workstation, select one or more of the "
+"groups in this category. The special <literal>LSB</literal> group will "
+"configure your system so that it complies as much as possible with the <link "
+"xmlns:xlink=\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink\" xlink:href=\"http://www."
+"linuxbase.org/\">Linux Standard Base Project</link> specifications."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:58
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "server"
+msgstr "Сервер:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:57
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Server</guilabel>: if "
+"your machine is intended to be a server, select which of the more common "
+"services you wish to install on your machine."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><tip><para>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"Moving the mouse cursor over a group name will display a short explanatory "
+"text about that group."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:73
+msgid "individual selection"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"You can check the <guilabel>Individual package selection</guilabel> box, "
+"which is useful if you're familiar with the packages being offered or if you "
+"want to have total control over what will be installed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:82
+msgid ""
+"If you start the installation in <guilabel>Upgrade</guilabel> mode, you can "
+"deselect all groups and prevent the installation of any new packages. This "
+"is useful for repairing or updating an existing system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:91
+msgid "Minimal Installation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:93
+msgid ""
+"If you deselect all groups when performing a regular installation (as "
+"opposed to an upgrade), a new dialog shows after pressing the "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button, suggesting different options for a "
+"minimal installation:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:101
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>With X</guilabel>: install the minimum number of packages possible "
+"to have a working graphical desktop."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:106
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>With basic documentation</guilabel>: installs the base system plus "
+"basic utilities and their documentation. This installation is suitable for "
+"setting up a server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:112
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Truly minimal install</guilabel>: installs the absolute minimum "
+"number of packages necessary to get a working <application>Linux</"
+"application> system. With this installation you will only have a command-"
+"line interface."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:120
+msgid "Choosing Individual Packages to Install"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:125
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-choosePackagesTree.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-choosePackages-im2\" revision=\"1\" "
+"width=\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:130
+msgid ""
+"If you choose to install packages individually, the installer will present a "
+"tree structure containing all packages classified by groups and subgroups. "
+"While browsing the tree, you can select entire groups, subgroups, or "
+"individual packages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:136
+msgid ""
+"Whenever you select a package on the tree, a description will appear on the "
+"right to let you know the purpose of that package."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:141
+msgid ""
+"If a server package has been selected, either because you specifically chose "
+"the individual package or because it was part of a group of packages, you "
+"will be asked to confirm that you really want those server packages to be "
+"installed. By default <application>Mageia</application> will automatically "
+"start any installed services (servers) at boot time. Even if they are safe "
+"and have no known issues at the time the distribution was shipped, it is "
+"entirely possible that security holes were discovered after this version of "
+"<application>Mageia</application> was finalized. If you don't know what a "
+"particular service is supposed to do or why it's being installed, then click "
+"<guibutton>No</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:157
+msgid "dependencies"
+msgstr "залежності"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:158
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "automatic"
+msgstr "автоматична"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:156
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> The <guilabel>Show automatically "
+"selected packages</guilabel> option is used to disable the warning dialog. "
+"Those appear whenever the installer automatically selects a package to "
+"resolve a dependency issue.  Some packages depend on others and the "
+"installation of one particular package may require the installation of "
+"another one. The installer can determine which packages are required to "
+"satisfy a dependency and to successfully complete the installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml:170
+msgid ""
+"The little floppy disk icon at the bottom of the list allows you to load or "
+"save the packages list. This is useful if you have a number of machines that "
+"you wish to configure identically. Click on this icon and select whether you "
+"wish to <guilabel>Load</guilabel> or <guilabel>Save</guilabel> the packages "
+"list, then select the medium in the following screen and click on the "
+"<guibutton>Ok</guibutton> button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - Partitioning your Disk"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-doPartitionDisks.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"width=\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You now need to decide where you want to install <application>Mageia</"
+"application> on your hard drive. If your hard drive is empty or if an "
+"existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to "
+"re-partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard drive means to "
+"logically divide it in order to create the space required for your new "
+"<application>Mageia</application> system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:24 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:15
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "DrakX"
+msgstr "DrakX"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>Because the process of "
+"partitioning a hard drive is usually irreversible and can lead to data loss, "
+"partitioning can be intimidating and stressful for the inexperienced user. "
+"Fortunately, <application>DrakX</application> includes a wizard which "
+"simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the "
+"rest of this section and, above all, take your time."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"Depending on the configuration of your hard drive, several options are "
+"available:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Use free space</guibutton>. This option will perform an automatic "
+"partitioning of your blank drive(s). If you use this option there will be no "
+"further prompts."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:46 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:352
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "mount points"
+msgstr "Точки монтування"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guibutton>Use existing "
+"partitions</guibutton>. The wizard has detected one or more existing "
+"<application>Linux</application> partitions on your hard drive. If you want "
+"to use them, choose this option. You will then be asked to choose the mount "
+"points associated with each of the partitions. The legacy mount points are "
+"selected by default, and for the most part it's a good idea to keep them. "
+"You will also be asked to choose the partitions to be formatted or preserved."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Use the free space on the Windows partition</guibutton>. If "
+"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> is installed "
+"on your hard drive, you might have to create free space for <application>GNU/"
+"Linux</application>. To do so, you can delete your "
+"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition and "
+"data (see the <quote>Erase entire disk</quote> solution below) or resize "
+"your <acronym>FAT</acronym> or <acronym>NTFS</acronym> partition. Resizing "
+"can be performed without the loss of any data, <emphasis>provided you've "
+"previously defragmented the <application>Windows<superscript>®</"
+"superscript></application> partition. Backing up your data is strongly "
+"recommended</emphasis>. Using this option is recommended if you want to use "
+"both <application>Mageia</application> and "
+"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> on the same "
+"computer in a <emphasis>dual boot</emphasis> configuration."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"Before choosing this option, please understand that after this procedure, "
+"the size of your <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></"
+"application> partition will be smaller than when you started, which means "
+"you will have less free space to store your data or to install new software."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:83
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Erase entire disk</guibutton>. If you want to delete all data and "
+"all partitions present on your hard drive and replace them with "
+"<application>Mageia</application>, choose this option. Be warned that you "
+"won't be able to undo this operation after you confirm."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:90 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:427
+msgid ""
+"If you choose this option, <emphasis>all</emphasis> data on your disk will "
+"be deleted."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:96
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Remove Windows(TM)</guibutton>. This option appears when the hard "
+"drive is entirely taken by <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></"
+"application>. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the "
+"drive, partitioning everything from scratch."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:102 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:437
+msgid ""
+"If you choose this option, <emphasis>all</emphasis> data on your disk will "
+"be lost."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:110
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "custom"
+msgstr "Нетиповий"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml:109
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guibutton>Custom disk "
+"partitioning</guibutton>. Choose this option if you want to manually "
+"partition your hard drive. Be careful: it is a powerful but dangerous choice "
+"and you can very easily lose all your data. That's why this option is only "
+"recommended if you have performed custom disk partitioning before, and have "
+"enough <application>GNU/Linux</application> experience to know what you are "
+"doing. For more instructions on how to use the <application>DiskDrake</"
+"application> utility, refer to <phrase condition=\"Starter\" xml:id=\"BIdNEW-"
+"drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ph1\"><xref linkend=\"diskdrake\"/></phrase><phrase "
+"condition=\"Discovery\" xml:id=\"BIdNEW-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ph3\">the "
+"<citetitle xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ct1\">Managing Your "
+"Partitions</citetitle> section in the <citetitle>Starter Guide</citetitle></"
+"phrase><phrase condition=\"QSP\" xml:id=\"BIdNEW-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-"
+"ph4\">the <citetitle xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ct2\">Managing "
+"Your Partitions</citetitle> section in the <citetitle>Starter Guide</"
+"citetitle></phrase>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - It's Done!"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-exitInstall.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-exitInstall-im1\" revision=\"1\" width="
+"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:13 en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:225
+#, fuzzy
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:779
+msgid "boot"
+msgstr "завантаження"
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:14 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:780
+msgid "dual-boot"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>There you are. The installation is "
+"now complete and your <application>GNU/Linux</application> system is ready "
+"to be used. Just click on <guibutton>Reboot</guibutton> to restart the "
+"system. Don't forget to remove the installation media (<acronym>CD-ROM</"
+"acronym> or floppy). The first thing you should see after your computer has "
+"finished doing its hardware tests is the bootloader menu, which allows you "
+"to choose between the <acronym>OS</acronym>es your system can boot."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:23
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Advanced Options"
+msgstr "Додаткові параметри"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:26
+msgid "The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button shows more buttons to:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:32
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "floppy"
+msgstr "гнучкий диск"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:33
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "auto-install"
+msgstr "Автовстановлення"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guibutton>Generate auto-install "
+"floppy</guibutton>: enables you to create an installation floppy disk which "
+"will automatically perform a whole installation, similar to the one just "
+"finished, without the help of an operator."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"Note that two different options are available after clicking on that button:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:45 en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:52
+#, fuzzy
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:73 en/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml:13
+#: en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml:15
+msgid "installation"
+msgstr "Встановлення"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:45
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "replay"
+msgstr "&Повторити гру"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guibutton>Replay</guibutton>. "
+"This is a partially automated installation. The partitioning step is the "
+"only interactive procedure."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:53
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "automated"
+msgstr "Автоматично"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guibutton>Automated</guibutton>. "
+"Fully automated installation: <emphasis>the hard disk is completely "
+"rewritten, all data is lost</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"This feature is very handy when installing on a number of similar machines. "
+"See the <link xmlns:xlink=\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink\" xlink:href="
+"\"http://www.mandrakelinux.com/drakx/auto_inst.html\">Auto install</link> "
+"section on our web site for more information."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:73
+msgid "save package selection"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"If you chose to save on a floppy, you will need a <acronym>FAT</acronym>-"
+"formatted floppy. To create one under <application>GNU/Linux</application>, "
+"type <command>mformat a:</command> or, as root, <command>fdformat /dev/fd0</"
+"command> followed by <command>mkfs.vfat /dev/fd0</command>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:72
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guibutton>Save package selection</"
+"guibutton><placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"1\"/>: saves a list of the "
+"packages selected in this installation. The following screen shows you the "
+"possible media to use to save the package list onto: you might need to fill "
+"some parameters when you click on the <guilabel>Next</guilabel> button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml:87
+msgid ""
+"To use this selection of packages with another installation, perform the "
+"installation as usual up to the point of the package selection, and choose "
+"to select individual packages, without worrying about the current package "
+"selection. Use the floppy icon and select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel> "
+"option. Then choose the medium which contains the package list. Finally "
+"click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>: the list of packages you loaded will be "
+"selected and be installed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - Choose Partitions to Be Formatted"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"This step is available only if you chose to reuse existing "
+"<application>Linux</application> partitions."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-formatPartitions.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"width=\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:21 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:473
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "formatting"
+msgstr "форматування"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>If you chose to reuse some legacy "
+"<application>GNU/Linux</application> partitions, you may wish to reformat "
+"some of them and erase any data they contain. To do so, please select those "
+"partitions as well."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:28 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:483
+msgid "pre-existing"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"Please note that it's not necessary to reformat all <placeholder type="
+"\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>pre-existing partitions. You must reformat the "
+"partitions containing the operating system (such as <literal>/</literal>, "
+"<literal>/usr</literal> or <literal>/var</literal>) but not the partitions "
+"containing data you wish to keep (typically <literal>/home</literal>)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"Please be careful when selecting partitions. After the formatting is "
+"completed, <emphasis>all data on the selected partitions will be deleted</"
+"emphasis> and you won't be able to recover it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> when you're ready to format the "
+"partitions."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you want to choose other "
+"partitions for your new <application>Mageia</application> operating system "
+"installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:52 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:502
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "bad blocks"
+msgstr "пошкоджені блоки"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> if you wish to select partitions "
+"which will be checked for <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>bad "
+"blocks on the disk."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - Installing Updates from the Internet"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-installUpdates.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-installUpdates-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"width=\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml:13 en/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml:14
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "updates"
+msgstr "оновлює"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" "
+"id=\"1\"/>By the time you install <application>Mageia</application>, it's "
+"likely that some packages will have been updated since the initial release. "
+"Bugs may have been fixed, security issues resolved, etc. To allow you to "
+"benefit from these updates, you're now able to download them from the "
+"Internet. Select <guilabel>Yes</guilabel> if you have a working Internet "
+"connection and you want to install any updated packages now, or "
+"<guilabel>No</guilabel> if you prefer to install updated packages later."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"Choosing <guilabel>Yes</guilabel> will display a list of web locations from "
+"which updates can be retrieved. You should choose one near to you. A tree "
+"containing package selections will appear: review the selection, and press "
+"<guibutton>Install</guibutton> to retrieve and install the selected "
+"package(s), or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to abort."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-intro.xml:3
+msgid "About the Installer Help Manual"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakx-intro.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which "
+"screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make "
+"while installing."
+msgstr ""
+"Всі сторінки, описані у цьому підручнику побачити одразу неможливо. Набір "
+"сторінок, які ви побачите залежить від набору обладнання у вашій системі та "
+"вибраного вами варіанта встановлення."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-intro.xml:12
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA "
+"3.0 license <link xlink:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/"
+"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>"
+msgstr ""
+"Текст та знімки вікон у цьому підручнику надаються вам відповідно до умов "
+"ліцензування CC BY-SA 3.0, <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/"
+"licenses/by-sa/3.0/\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>ю"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-intro.xml:15
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"This manual was produced with the help of the <link xlink:href=\"http://www."
+"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link xlink:href=\"http://www."
+"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>"
+msgstr ""
+"Цей підручник було створено за допомогою <link ns6:href=\"http://www.calenco."
+"com\">Calenco CMS</link>, розробленої компанією <link ns6:href=\"http://www."
+"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - Security Level"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-miscellaneous.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-miscellaneous-im1\" revision=\"1\" width="
+"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml:12 en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:152
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "security"
+msgstr "безпека"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml:13
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "level"
+msgstr "Рівень"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>At this point, <application>DrakX</"
+"application> allows you to choose your machine's security level. As a rule "
+"of thumb, the security level should be set higher if the machine is to "
+"contain crucial data, or if it's to be directly exposed to the Internet. The "
+"trade-off is that a higher security level is generally obtained at the "
+"expense of ease of use."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"If you don't know what to choose, keep the default option. You'll be able to "
+"change it later with the <application>draksec</application> tool<phrase "
+"condition=\"not-in-QSPlus\" xml:id=\"BIdNEW-drakxid-miscellaneous-ph1\"> "
+"(see <xref linkend=\"draksec\"/>)</phrase>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"Fill the <guilabel>Security Administrator</guilabel> field with the e-mail "
+"address of the person responsible for security. Security-related messages "
+"will be sent to that address."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - Checking Miscellaneous Parameters"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:6
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Summary"
+msgstr "Резюме"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-summary.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-misc-params-im1\" revision=\"1\" width=\"11.5cm\"/"
+"> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:16 en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:29
+#, fuzzy
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:38 en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:57
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:68 en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:74
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:95 en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:118
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:134 en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:153
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:161
+msgid "configuration"
+msgstr "Налаштування"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>As a review, <application>DrakX</"
+"application> will present a summary of information it has gathered about "
+"your system. Depending on the hardware installed on your machine, you may "
+"have some or all of the following entries. Each entry is made up of the "
+"hardware item to be configured, followed by a quick summary of the current "
+"configuration. Click on the corresponding <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> "
+"button to make any changes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:28
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "time zone"
+msgstr "Часовий пояс"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Timezone</guilabel>: <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>by "
+"default, <application>DrakX</application> deduces your time zone based on "
+"the country you have chosen. You can click on the <guibutton>Configure</"
+"guibutton> button here if this is not correct."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:37
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "country"
+msgstr "країна"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Country / Region</"
+"guilabel>: check the current country selection. If you're not in the country "
+"selected by <application>DrakX</application>, click on the "
+"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button and choose another. If your country "
+"isn't in the list shown, click on the <guibutton>Other Countries</guibutton> "
+"button to get a complete country list."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>: if you wish to change your bootloader "
+"configuration, click this button. This should be reserved to advanced users. "
+"Refer to the printed documentation or the in-line help about bootloader "
+"configuration in the <application>Mageia Control Center</application>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:57 en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:223
+#, fuzzy
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:225
+msgid "services"
+msgstr "Служби"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Services</guilabel>: "
+"with this entry you can fine tune which services will be run on your "
+"machine. If you plan to use this machine as a server it's a good idea to "
+"review this setup."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:67 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:324
+#, fuzzy
+#: en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml:16 en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml:18
+msgid "keyboard"
+msgstr "Клавіатура"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:67
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Keyboard</guilabel>: "
+"check the current keyboard map configuration and change it if necessary."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:73 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:275
+#, fuzzy
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:297 en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:12
+#: en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:49
+msgid "mouse"
+msgstr "Миша"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:73
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>: verify "
+"the current mouse configuration and click on the button to change it if "
+"necessary."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:94
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "sound card"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Звукова плата</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:94
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Sound card</guilabel>: "
+"if a sound card is detected on your system, it will be displayed here. If "
+"you notice the sound card isn't the one actually present on your system, you "
+"can click on the button and choose a different driver."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:117
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "graphical interface"
+msgstr "Графічний інтерфейс"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:116
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Graphical Interface</"
+"guilabel>: by default, <application>DrakX</application> configures your "
+"graphical interface with a resolution that best matches your video card and "
+"monitor combination. If that doesn't suit you, or <application>DrakX</"
+"application> could not automatically configure it (<guilabel>not configured</"
+"guilabel> is displayed), click on <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> to "
+"reconfigure your graphical interface. You can click on <guibutton>Help</"
+"guibutton> from within the configuration wizard to benefit from full in-line "
+"help."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:133 en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:143
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "network"
+msgstr "Мережа"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:132
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> <guilabel>Network</guilabel>: if "
+"you wish to configure your Internet or local network access, you can do so "
+"from here. Refer to the printed documentation or use the <application>Mageia "
+"Control Center</application> after the installation has finished to benefit "
+"from full in-line help."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:144
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "proxy"
+msgstr "проксі-сервер"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:143
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>: "
+"allows you to configure <acronym>HTTP</acronym> and <acronym>FTP</acronym> "
+"proxy addresses if the machine you're installing on is to be located behind "
+"a proxy server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:151
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Security Level</"
+"guilabel>: this entry allows you to redefine the security level<phrase "
+"condition=\"Starter\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-misc-params-ph1\"> as set in a "
+"previous step (see <xref linkend=\"drakxidmiscellaneous\"/>)</phrase>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:160
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "firewall"
+msgstr "Захисний шлюз"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:160
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>: if "
+"you plan to connect your machine to the Internet, it's a good idea to "
+"protect yourself from intrusions by setting up a firewall. Consult <phrase "
+"condition=\"Discovery\" xml:id=\"BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph5\">the "
+"corresponding chapter of the <citetitle>Starter Guide</citetitle></"
+"phrase><phrase condition=\"Startonly\" xml:id=\"BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-"
+"ph6\" revision=\"2\"><xref linkend=\"tinyfirewall\"/></phrase><phrase "
+"condition=\"only-in-ML-Full-Manual\" xml:id=\"BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph7\" "
+"revision=\"2\"><xref linkend=\"tinyfirewall\"/></phrase> for details about "
+"firewall settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:174
+msgid "Time Zone Options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:179
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-configureTimezoneGMT."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-misc-params-im2\" revision=\"2\" "
+"width=\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:184
+msgid ""
+"This dialog appears after selecting a new time zone in the time zones list. "
+"After you've chosen the location nearest to your time zone, two more options "
+"are shown."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:188
+msgid ""
+"<application>GNU/Linux</application> manages time in <acronym>GMT</acronym> "
+"(Greenwich Mean Time) and translates it to local time according to the time "
+"zone you selected. If the clock on your motherboard is set to local time, "
+"you may deactivate this by deselecting <guilabel>Hardware clock set to GMT</"
+"guilabel>, which will let <application>GNU/Linux</application> know that the "
+"system clock and the hardware clock are in the same time zone. This is "
+"useful when the machine also hosts another operating system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:197
+msgid ""
+"The <guilabel>Automatic time synchronization</guilabel> option will "
+"automatically regulate the system clock by connecting to a remote time "
+"server on the Internet. For this feature to work, you must have a working "
+"Internet connection. We recommend that you choose a time server located near "
+"you or the generic <guilabel>World Wide</guilabel> entry which will select "
+"the best server for you. This option actually installs a time server which "
+"can be used by other machines on your local network as well."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:212
+msgid "Selecting Available Services at Boot Time"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:218
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-configureServices.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-misc-params-im5\" revision=\"2\" width="
+"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:223
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id="
+"\"1\"/>This dialog is used to select which services you wish to start at "
+"boot time."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:229
+msgid ""
+"<application>DrakX</application> will list all services available on the "
+"current installation. Review each of them carefully and uncheck those which "
+"aren't needed at boot time."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><tip><para>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:235
+msgid ""
+"A short explanatory text will be displayed about a service when it is "
+"selected. However, if you're not sure whether a service is useful or not, it "
+"is safer to leave the default behavior."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para>
+#: en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml:242
+msgid ""
+"At this stage, be very careful if you intend to use your machine as a "
+"server: you probably don't want to start any services which you don't need. "
+"Please remember that some services can be dangerous if they're enabled on a "
+"server. In general, select only those services you <emphasis>really</"
+"emphasis> need."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:3
+msgid "Installation with DrakX"
+msgstr "Встановлення за допомогою DrakX"
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:9
+msgid "Deprecated - Introduction to the MandrakeSecurity Installer"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> <application>DrakX</application> "
+"is <application>Mandrakesecurity</application>'s installation program.  Its "
+"ease of use has been enhanced with a graphical user interface, allowing you "
+"to move forward and backward through the installation and prompting you when "
+"required.  With <application>DrakX</application>, it doesn't matter whether "
+"you're a new user to <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> or an old "
+"pro – <application>DrakX</application>'s job is to give you a smooth "
+"installation and an easy transition into <application>Mandrakesecurity</"
+"application>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><figure><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:25
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Very First Installation Welcome Screen"
+msgstr "Найперше вітальне вікно програми для встановлення"
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><figure><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"  <imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"../dx-MNF-welcome.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im1\" revision=\"1\" width=\"11.5cm"
+"\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"When you begin, the first screen that comes up will present some information "
+"and give you installation options. (<xref linkend=\"dx-welcome\"/>). Doing "
+"nothing will simply begin the installation in normal or <quote>linux</quote> "
+"mode.  The next few paragraphs will go over some options and parameters that "
+"you can pass to the install program if you run into problems."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"Pressing <keycap>F1</keycap> will open a help screen. Here are some useful "
+"options to choose from:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:49 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:60
+#, fuzzy
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:70 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:72
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:96
+msgid "installation options"
+msgstr "ПАРАМЕТРИ ВСТАНОВЛЕННЯ"
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:50
+msgid "vgalo"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"<literal>vgalo</literal>: <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>if you "
+"tried a default installation and did not see the graphical interface as "
+"shown below in <xref linkend=\"drakxid-selectLanguage\"/>, you can try to "
+"run the installation in low resolution mode. This happens with certain types "
+"of graphics cards, so with <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> we "
+"give you a number of options to work around problems with older hardware.  "
+"To try the installation in low resolution mode, type <userinput>vgalo</"
+"userinput> at the prompt."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:61
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "text"
+msgstr "текст"
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"<literal>text</literal>: <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>if your "
+"video card is very old and graphical installation does not work at all, you "
+"can always choose the text mode installation.  Because all video cards can "
+"display text, this is the <quote>installation of last resort</quote>. Don't "
+"worry though – it's not likely that you'll need to use the text install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:71
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "expert"
+msgstr "Експерт"
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:73
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "linux"
+msgstr "linux"
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><screen>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:83
+#, no-wrap
+msgid "boot: vgalo expert"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:70
+msgid ""
+"<literal>expert</literal>: <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/"
+"><placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"1\"/>in some rare cases, your PC may "
+"appear to freeze or lock-up during the hardware detection phase.  If that "
+"happens, then adding the word <literal>expert</literal> as a parameter will "
+"tell the install program to bypass hardware detection.  Because "
+"<application>DrakX</application> will not scan for hardware, you will need "
+"to manually specify hardware parameters later in the installation.  The "
+"<literal>expert</literal> parameter can be added to the previous modes, so "
+"you may end up specifying <placeholder type=\"screen\" id=\"2\"/> to perform "
+"a low resolution graphical install without <application>DrakX</application> "
+"performing a hardware scan."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><note><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:88
+msgid ""
+"Selecting the <literal>expert</literal> mode will ask you for more details "
+"about the installation process, letting you perform a more customized "
+"installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:97
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "kernel options"
+msgstr "Параметри ядра"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:104 en/uninstall-linux.xml:46
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "commands"
+msgstr "Команди"
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:104
+msgid "mem= xxxM"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><screen>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:110
+#, no-wrap
+msgid "boot: linux mem=256M"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:95
+msgid ""
+"<literal>kernel options</literal>: <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/"
+">Kernel options usually aren't required for most machines.  There are a few "
+"cases of motherboards incorrectly reporting the amount of memory installed "
+"due to bugs in the design or in the BIOS.  If you need to manually specify "
+"the amount of DRAM installed in your PC, use the <placeholder type="
+"\"indexterm\" id=\"1\"/> <command>mem= xxxM</command> parameter. For "
+"example, to start the installation in normal mode with a computer having 256 "
+"<acronym>MB</acronym> of memory, your command line would look like this: "
+"<placeholder type=\"screen\" id=\"2\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:114
+msgid ""
+"Now that we've gone over what <emphasis>might</emphasis> go wrong, let's "
+"move on to the actual installation process.  When the installer starts, "
+"you'll see a nice graphical interface ( <xref linkend=\"selectLanguage-fig\"/"
+"> ). On the left will be the various installation steps. Depending on the "
+"installation's progress level, some stages may or may not be available.  If "
+"a particular stage is available it will be highlighted when you move the "
+"mouse pointer over it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:123
+msgid ""
+"The colors of the buttons on the left side of the screen let you quickly see "
+"what's going on with the installation:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:129
+msgid "red: this installation phase has not yet been carried out"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:133
+msgid "orange: the installation stage that is currently being processed"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:137
+msgid ""
+"green: this installation stage has already been configured. However, nothing "
+"stops you from going back to a stage that has already been completed if you "
+"need to reconfigure something."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:144
+msgid ""
+"This guide assumes that you are performing a standard, step-by-step "
+"installation, as described below."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:152
+msgid "Choosing Your Language"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:155 en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:6
+msgid "The first step is to choose your preferred language."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><figure><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:158 en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:9
+msgid "Choosing the Default Language"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><figure><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:161
+msgid ""
+"  <imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-selectLanguage."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im2\" revision=\"1\" width="
+"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:167 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:187
+#, fuzzy
+#: en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml:18 en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:21
+msgid "language"
+msgstr "Мова:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:167
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> Your choice of preferred language "
+"will affect the language of the documentation, the installer and the system "
+"in general."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:171
+msgid ""
+"Clicking on the <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button will allow you to "
+"select other languages to be installed on your workstation, thereby "
+"installing the language-specific files for system documentation and "
+"applications. For example, if you will host users from Spain on your "
+"machine, select English as the default language in the tree view and "
+"<guilabel>Spanish|Spain</guilabel> in the Advanced section."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:180
+msgid ""
+"Note that you're not limited to choosing a single additional language. Once "
+"you have selected additional locales, click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> "
+"button to continue."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><note><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:187
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "setting"
+msgstr "Параметр"
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><note><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:186
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>Not all languages listed here are "
+"supported in the <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> Web interface."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:195
+msgid "License Terms of the Distribution"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:199
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-license.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im3\" revision=\"1\" width=\"11.5cm\"/"
+"> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:204
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>Before continuing, you should "
+"carefully read the terms of the license. It covers the entire "
+"<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> distribution, and if you do not "
+"agree with all the terms in it you should click on the <guibutton>Refuse </"
+"guibutton> button.  This will immediately terminate the installation.  "
+"Clicking on the <guibutton>Accept</guibutton> button will continue the "
+"installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:217
+msgid "Disk Detection and Configuration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:221
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-setupSCSI.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im4\" revision=\"1\" width=\"11.5cm\"/"
+"> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:227
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "IDE"
+msgstr "IDE"
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:227 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:259
+msgid "detection"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:229
+msgid "PCI SCSI"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:230
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "SCSI"
+msgstr "SCSI"
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:226
+msgid ""
+"<application>DrakX</application> will first detect any <placeholder type="
+"\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> IDE devices present in your computer. It will also "
+"scan for one or more <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"1\"/><placeholder "
+"type=\"indexterm\" id=\"2\"/> PCI SCSI cards on your system. If a SCSI card "
+"is found, <application>DrakX</application> will automatically install the "
+"appropriate driver."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:234
+msgid ""
+"Because hardware detection is not foolproof, <application>DrakX</"
+"application> will ask you if you have a PCI SCSI installed. Clicking "
+"<guibutton>Yes</guibutton> will display a list of SCSI cards to choose from. "
+"Click <guibutton>No</guibutton> if you know that you have no SCSI hardware "
+"in your machine. If you're not sure, you can check the list of hardware "
+"detected in your machine by selecting <guilabel>See hardware info </"
+"guilabel> and clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Examine the list of "
+"hardware and then click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to return to "
+"the SCSI interface question."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:245
+msgid ""
+"If you had to manually specify your PCI SCSI adapter, <application>DrakX</"
+"application> will ask if you want to configure options for it. You should "
+"allow <application>DrakX</application> to probe the hardware for the card-"
+"specific options which are needed to initialize the adapter. Most of the "
+"time, <application>DrakX</application> will get through this step without "
+"any issues."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:252
+msgid ""
+"If <application>DrakX</application> is not able to probe for the options to "
+"automatically determine which parameters need to be passed to the hardware, "
+"you'll need to manually configure the driver."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:258
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "hard disk"
+msgstr "Жорсткий диск"
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:265
+msgid "Configuring your Mouse"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:270
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-selectMouse.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im5\" revision=\"1\" width=\"11.5cm\"/"
+"> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:275
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> Usually, <application>DrakX</"
+"application> has no problems detecting the number of buttons on your mouse. "
+"If it does, it assumes you have a two-button mouse and will configure it for "
+"third-button emulation. The third-button mouse button of a two-button mouse "
+"can be <quote>pressed </quote> by simultaneously clicking the left and right "
+"mouse buttons. <application>DrakX</application> will automatically know "
+"whether your mouse uses a <acronym>PS/2</acronym>, serial or <acronym>USB</"
+"acronym> interface."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:285
+msgid ""
+"If for some reason you wish to specify a different type of mouse, select it "
+"from the provided list."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:288
+msgid ""
+"If you choose a mouse other than the default, a test screen will be "
+"displayed. Use the buttons and wheel to verify that the settings are correct "
+"and that the mouse is working correctly. If the mouse is not working well, "
+"press the space bar or <keycap> Return</keycap> key to <guibutton>Cancel</"
+"guibutton> the test and to go back to the list of choices."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><note><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:298
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "wheel"
+msgstr "коліщатко"
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><note><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:297
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>Wheel mice are occasionally not "
+"detected automatically, so you will need to select your mouse from a list. "
+"Be sure to select the one corresponding to the port that your mouse is "
+"attached to.  After selecting a mouse and pressing the <guibutton>OK</"
+"guibutton> button, a mouse image is displayed on-screen. Scroll the mouse "
+"wheel to ensure that it is activated correctly. Once you see the on-screen "
+"scroll wheel moving as you scroll your mouse wheel, test the buttons and "
+"check that the mouse pointer moves on-screen as you move your mouse."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:313
+msgid "Configuring the Keyboard"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:318
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-selectKeyboard.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im6\" revision=\"1\" width=\"11.5cm"
+"\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:323
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>Depending on the default language "
+"you chose in <xref linkend=\"drakxid-selectLanguage\"/>, <application>DrakX</"
+"application> will automatically select a particular type of keyboard "
+"configuration. However, you might not have a keyboard that corresponds "
+"exactly to your language: for example, if you are an English speaking Swiss "
+"person, you may have a Swiss keyboard. Or if you speak English but are "
+"located in Québec, you may find yourself in the same situation where your "
+"native language and keyboard do not match. In either case, this installation "
+"step will allow you to select an appropriate keyboard from a list."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:336
+msgid ""
+"Click on the <guibutton revision=\"1\">More</guibutton> button to be "
+"presented with the complete list of supported keyboards."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:342
+msgid "Selecting the Mount Points"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:346
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-doPartitionDisks."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im7\" revision=\"1\" width="
+"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:352
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>At this point, you need to decide "
+"where you want to install the <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> "
+"operating system on your hard drive. If your hard drive is empty or if an "
+"existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to "
+"partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard drive consists of "
+"logically dividing it to create the space needed to install your new "
+"<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:361
+msgid ""
+"Because the process of partitioning a hard drive is usually irreversible and "
+"can lead to lost data if there is an existing operating system already "
+"installed on the drive, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful if "
+"you are an inexperienced user. Fortunately, <application>DrakX</application> "
+"includes a wizard which simplifies this process. Before continuing with this "
+"step, read through the rest of this section and above all, take your time."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:372
+msgid ""
+"If your hard drive has already been partitioned, either from a previous "
+"installation of <application>GNU/Linux</application> or by another "
+"partitioning tool, select the appropriate partitions that you want to "
+"install your Linux system into."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:377
+msgid ""
+"If partitions haven't been configured, you will need to create them using "
+"the wizard. Depending on your hard drive configuration, several options are "
+"available:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:381
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Use free space</guibutton>: this option will perform an automatic "
+"partitioning of your blank drive(s).  If you use this option there will be "
+"no further prompts."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:386
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Use existing partition</guibutton>: the wizard has detected one "
+"or more existing Linux partitions on your hard drive. If you want to use "
+"them, choose this option. You will then be asked to choose the mount points "
+"associated with each of the partitions. The legacy mount points are selected "
+"by default, and for the most part it's a good idea to keep them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:395
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Use the free space on the Windows partition</guibutton>: if "
+"<application>Microsoft</application><superscript>®</superscript> "
+"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></"
+"application><superscript>©</superscript> is installed on your hard drive and "
+"takes all the space available on it, you have to create free space for Linux "
+"data. To do so, you can delete your <application>Microsoft</application> "
+"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition and "
+"data (see <quote> Erase entire disk</quote> or <quote>Expert mode</quote> "
+"solutions) or resize your <application>Microsoft</application> "
+"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> FAT "
+"partition. Resizing can be performed without the loss of any data, "
+"<emphasis>provided you previously defragment the "
+"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition and "
+"that it uses the FAT format. Backing up your data is strongly recommended.</"
+"emphasis>. Using this option is recommended if you want to use both "
+"<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> and <application>Microsoft</"
+"application> <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> "
+"on the same computer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:412
+msgid ""
+"Before choosing this option, please understand that after this procedure, "
+"the size of your <application>Microsoft</application> "
+"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition "
+"will be smaller then when you started. You will have less free space under "
+"<application>Microsoft</application> <application>Windows<superscript>®</"
+"superscript></application> to store your data or to install new software."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:420
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Erase entire disk</guibutton>: if you want to delete all data and "
+"all partitions present on your hard drive and replace them with your new "
+"<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> system, choose this option. Be "
+"careful, because you will not be able to undo your choice after you confirm."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:432
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Remove Windows</guibutton>: this will simply erase everything on "
+"the drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch. "
+"<emphasis>All</emphasis> data on your disk will be lost."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:443
+msgid "manual formatting"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:445
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "partitioning"
+msgstr "поділ диска"
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:445
+msgid "DiskDrake"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:442
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" "
+"id=\"1\"/> <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"2\"/> <guibutton>Custom disk "
+"partitioning</guibutton>: choose this option if you want to manually "
+"partition your hard drive. Be careful –– it is a powerful but dangerous "
+"choice and you can very easily lose all your data. That's why this option is "
+"really only recommended if you have done something like this before and have "
+"some experience. For more instructions on how to use the "
+"<application>DiskDrake</application> utility, refer to the <link xmlns:xlink="
+"\"http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink\" xlink:href=\"http://www.mandrakelinux.com/"
+"en/doc/82/en/user.html/diskdrake.html\">online documentation for "
+"<application>DiskDrake</application></link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:461
+msgid "Choose Partitions to Be Formatted"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:467
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-formatPartitions."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im8\" revision=\"1\" width="
+"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:472
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>Any partitions that have been "
+"newly defined must be formatted for use (formatting means creating a file "
+"system)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:477
+msgid ""
+"At this time, you may wish to reformat some already existing partitions to "
+"erase any data they contain. If you wish to do that, please select those "
+"partitions as well."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:481
+msgid ""
+"Please note that it is not necessary to reformat all <placeholder type="
+"\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>pre-existing partitions. You must reformat the "
+"partitions containing the operating system (such as <literal>/</literal>, "
+"<literal>/usr</literal> or <literal>/var</literal>) but you do not have to "
+"reformat partitions containing data that you wish to keep (typically "
+"<literal>/home</literal>)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:490
+msgid ""
+"Please be careful when selecting partitions. After formatting, all data on "
+"the selected partitions will be deleted and you will not be able to recover "
+"it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:494
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton> when you are ready to format partitions."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:497
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> if you want to choose another "
+"partition for your new <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> operating "
+"system installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:501
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> if you wish to select partitions "
+"that will be checked for <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>bad "
+"blocks on the disk."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:508
+msgid "Actual Packages Installation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:511
+msgid ""
+"Then comes the actual system installation. The packages list is predefined "
+"and cannot be changed at this time. The time required to complete the "
+"installation depends on the speed of your hardware. An estimate of the "
+"remaining time-to-go will be displayed on-screen to help gauge if there is "
+"sufficient time to enjoy a cup of coffee."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:520
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Root Password"
+msgstr "Пароль користувача root"
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:525
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-setRootPassword."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im9\" revision=\"1\" width="
+"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:533 en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:16
+#, fuzzy
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:20
+msgid "password"
+msgstr "Пароль:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:530
+msgid ""
+"This is the most crucial decision point for the security of your "
+"<application>GNU/Linux</application> system: you have to enter the "
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" "
+"id=\"1\"/> <literal>root</literal> password. <literal>Root</literal> is the "
+"system administrator and is the only one authorized to make updates, add "
+"users, change the overall system configuration, and so on. In short, "
+"<literal>root</literal> can do everything! That is why you must choose a "
+"password that is difficult to guess – <application>DrakX</application> will "
+"tell you if the password that you chose is too easy. As you can see, you are "
+"not forced to enter a password, but we strongly advise you against.  "
+"<application>GNU/Linux</application> is as prone to operator error as any "
+"other operating system.  Since <literal>root</literal> can overcome all "
+"limitations and unintentionally erase all data on partitions by carelessly "
+"accessing the partitions themselves, it is important that it be difficult to "
+"become <literal>root</literal>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><note><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:549
+msgid ""
+"The <application>msec</application> security level is set to <literal>4</"
+"literal> (<quote>high</quote>) by default. The password should be a mixture "
+"of alphanumeric characters and must be at least 8 characters long. Never "
+"write down the <literal>root</literal> password –– it makes it too easy to "
+"compromise a system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:557
+msgid ""
+"One caveat –– do not make the password too long or complicated because you "
+"must be able to remember it!"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:561
+msgid ""
+"The password will not be displayed on screen as you type it in. To reduce "
+"the chance of a blind typing error you will need to enter the password "
+"twice. If you do happen to make the same typing error twice, this "
+"<quote>incorrect</quote> password will have to be used the first time you "
+"connect."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:569
+msgid "Administrator Password"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:572
+msgid ""
+"You are then asked to enter the password for the system administrator "
+"(login: <literal>admin</literal>). It is differentiated from the "
+"<literal>root</literal> user, for security reasons, and also because it may "
+"not be the same person. It is that <literal>admin</literal> account that "
+"will be required to access the <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> "
+"Web interface. The criterion for choosing this password are the same as for "
+"the <literal>root</literal> password."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:583
+msgid "Adding a User"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:588
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-addUser.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im10\" revision=\"1\" width=\"11.5cm\"/"
+"> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:593
+msgid ""
+"All necessary users have already been added, and you shouldn't need adding "
+"more users for normal <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> "
+"operations. However, if you plan to use the <application>squid</application> "
+"<acronym>PAM</acronym> authentication feature, you can add here the users "
+"that will be authorized."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:600
+msgid ""
+"The first field asks you for a real name. Of course, this is not "
+"mandatory –– you can actually enter whatever you like. <application>DrakX</"
+"application> will use the first word you typed in and copy it to the "
+"<guimenu>User name</guimenu> field, which is the name this user will enter "
+"to log onto the system. If you like, you may override the default and change "
+"the username. The next step is to enter a password. From a security point of "
+"view, a non-privileged (regular) user password is not as crucial as the "
+"<literal>root</literal> password, but that is no reason to neglect it by "
+"making it blank or too simple: after all, <emphasis>your</emphasis> files "
+"could be the ones at risk."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:612
+msgid ""
+"You can then choose to make that user member of one or more special groups "
+"that will give him special priviledges. Check the button for the priviledges "
+"you want for that user."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:617
+msgid ""
+"Once you click on <guimenu>Accept user</guimenu>, you can add additional "
+"users. Select <guimenu>Done</guimenu> when you have finished adding users."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:631
+msgid "Configure your Local Network"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:636
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-configureNetwork."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im11\" revision=\"1\" width="
+"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:641
+msgid ""
+"You will now set up your local network connection (<acronym>LAN</acronym>).  "
+"<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> will attempt to autodetect "
+"network devices and modems. If this detection fails, uncheck the "
+"<guilabel>Use auto detection</guilabel> box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><warning><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:648
+msgid ""
+"Even though many connection types are offered here, do not configure your "
+"Internet connection now. You should now limit yourself to configuring the "
+"<literal>Ethernet</literal> <acronym>LAN</acronym> access, so that you can "
+"later connect to the administration interface and configure other "
+"connections easily through it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:656
+msgid ""
+"We will not detail each configuration option –  just make sure that you have "
+"all the parameters, such as IP address, default gateway, DNS servers, etc. "
+"from your Internet Service Provider or system administrator."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:662
+msgid ""
+"You will be able to configure all your other network interfaces (Internet, "
+"<acronym>DMZ</acronym>, etc.) later on through "
+"<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> interface."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:671
+msgid "Where Should You Place the Bootloader"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:676
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-"
+"setupBootloaderBeginner.png\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im12\" "
+"width=\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:681
+msgid ""
+"You must indicate where you wish to place the information the bootloader "
+"requires to boot to <application>GNU/Linux</application>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:684
+msgid ""
+"Unless you know exactly what you are doing, choose <guibutton>First sector "
+"of drive (MBR)</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:687
+msgid ""
+"You are then presented the different boot entries that will be proposed at "
+"system boot. You can modify them here."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:693
+msgid "Boot Disk"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:698
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-createBootdisk.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im13\" revision=\"1\" width=\"11.5cm"
+"\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:703
+msgid ""
+"The <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym> "
+"has a built-in rescue mode. You can access it by booting the <acronym>CD-"
+"ROM</acronym>, pressing the <userinput>F1</userinput> key at boot and typing "
+"<userinput>rescue</userinput> at the prompt.  If your computer cannot boot "
+"from the <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym>, there are at least two situations where "
+"having a boot floppy is critical:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:712 en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:805
+#, fuzzy
+#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:17
+#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:21 en/uninstall-linux.xml:42
+msgid "bootloader"
+msgstr "Завантажувач"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:715 en/uninstall-linux.xml:52
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "MBR"
+msgstr "MBR"
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:711
+msgid ""
+"when installing the <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>bootloader, "
+"<application>DrakX</application> will rewrite the boot sector (<placeholder "
+"type=\"indexterm\" id=\"1\"/><acronym>MBR</acronym>) of your main disk "
+"(unless you are using another boot manager), to allow you to start up with "
+"either <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> or "
+"<application>GNU/Linux</application> (assuming you have "
+"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> on your "
+"system). If at some point you need to reinstall "
+"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application>, the "
+"<application>Microsoft</application> install process will rewrite the boot "
+"sector and remove your ability to start <application>GNU/Linux</application>!"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:724
+msgid ""
+"if a problem arises and you cannot start <application>GNU/Linux</"
+"application> from the hard disk, this <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id="
+"\"0\"/>floppy will be the only means of starting up <application>GNU/Linux</"
+"application>. It contains a fair number of system tools for restoring a "
+"system that has crashed due to a power failure, an unfortunate typing error, "
+"a forgotten root password, or any other reason."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:732
+msgid ""
+"If you say <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>, you will be asked to insert a disk in "
+"the drive. The floppy disk must be blank or have non-critical data on it – "
+"<application>DrakX</application> will format the floppy and will rewrite the "
+"whole disk."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:740
+msgid "Installing Updates from the Internet"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:744
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-installUpdates.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im14\" revision=\"1\" width=\"11.5cm"
+"\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:749
+msgid ""
+"At the time you are installing <application>Mandrakesecurity</application>, "
+"it is likely that some packages have been updated since the initial "
+"release.  Bugs may have been fixed, security issues resolved. To allow you "
+"to benefit from these updates, you are now able to download them from the "
+"Internet.  Choose <guibutton>Yes</guibutton> if you have a working Internet "
+"connection, or <guibutton>No</guibutton> if you prefer to install updated "
+"packages later."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:758
+msgid ""
+"Choosing <guibutton>Yes</guibutton> displays a list of places from which "
+"updates can be retrieved. Choose the one nearest you. A package-selection "
+"tree will appear: review the selection, and press <guibutton>Install</"
+"guibutton> to retrieve and install the selected package(s), or "
+"<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to abort."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:769
+msgid "It's Finished!"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:774
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-MNF-exitInstall.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-MNF-im15\" revision=\"1\" width=\"11.5cm\"/"
+"> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:779
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>There you are. Installation is now "
+"complete and your <application>GNU/Linux</application> system is ready to "
+"use. Carefully write down the <acronym>URL</acronym> given in that dialog, "
+"it's the address you'll have to use in your Web browser to access the "
+"<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> Web interface with "
+"<literal>admin</literal> account. Now, just click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> "
+"twice to reboot the system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:792 en/uninstall-linux.xml:3
+msgid "How to Uninstall Linux"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:795
+msgid "The uninstallation process consists of two steps:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:800
+msgid ""
+"Delete all partitions on your hard drive and replace them by a single "
+"<acronym>FAT</acronym> partition with <application>DiskDrake</application>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:806 en/uninstall-linux.xml:7
+#, fuzzy
+#: en/uninstall-linux.xml:11 en/uninstall-linux.xml:44
+msgid "uninstall"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Вилучити:</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:805
+msgid ""
+"Uninstall the <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> bootloader "
+"(generally <application>GRUB</application>) from the Master Boot Record "
+"(<acronym>MBR</acronym>). To do so, boot under <application>DOS</"
+"application> and run the <command>fdisk /mbr</command> command."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:810
+msgid ""
+"If you have another <acronym>OS</acronym>, please consult its documentation "
+"to determine how to perform the same step."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <chapter><section><para>
+#: en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml:816
+msgid ""
+"Goodbye, and thank you for using <application>Mandrakesecurity</application>!"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - Format Disks with DiskDrake"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the "
+"installation of your <application>Mandriva Linux</application> system. If "
+"partitions have already been defined, either from a previous installation of "
+"<application>GNU/Linux</application> or by another partitioning tool, you "
+"can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard drive partitions must be "
+"defined."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"To create partitions, you must first select a hard drive. You can select the "
+"disk for partitioning by clicking on <quote>hda</quote> for the first IDE "
+"drive, <quote>hdb</quote> for the second, <quote>sda</quote> for the first "
+"<acronym>SCSI</acronym> drive and so on."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:24
+msgid "To partition the selected hard drive, you can use these options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Clear all</guibutton>: this option deletes all partitions on the "
+"selected hard drive"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Auto allocate</guibutton>: this option enables you to "
+"automatically create <acronym>ext3</acronym> and swap partitions in the free "
+"space of your hard drive"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:40
+msgid "<guibutton>More</guibutton>: gives access to additional features:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Save partition table</guibutton>: saves the partition table to a "
+"floppy. Useful for later partition-table recovery if necessary. It is "
+"strongly recommended that you perform this step."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Restore partition table</guibutton>: allows you to restore a "
+"previously saved partition table from a floppy disk."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Rescue partition table</guibutton>: if your partition table is "
+"damaged, you can try to recover it using this option. Please be careful and "
+"remember that it doesn't always work."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Reload partition table</guibutton>: discards all changes and "
+"reloads the partition table that was originally on the hard drive."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:71
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Removable media auto-mounting</guilabel>: unchecking this option "
+"will force users to manually mount and unmount removable media such as "
+"floppies and <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym>s."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:77
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Wizard</guibutton>: use this option if you wish to use a wizard "
+"to partition your hard drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good "
+"understanding of partitioning."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:82
+msgid "<guibutton>Undo</guibutton>: use this option to cancel your changes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:85
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Toggle between normal/expert mode</guibutton>: allows additional "
+"actions on partitions (type, options, format) and gives more information "
+"about the hard drive."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:91
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Done</guibutton>: when you are finished partitioning your hard "
+"drive, this will save your changes back to disk."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:99
+msgid ""
+"When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition size "
+"by using the <keysym>Arrow</keysym> keys of your keyboard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:104
+msgid ""
+"Note: you can reach any option using the keyboard. Navigate through the "
+"partitions using <keycap>Tab</keycap> and the <keycap>Up/Down</keycap> "
+"arrows."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:109
+msgid "When a partition is selected, you can use:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:112
+msgid ""
+"<keycombo><keysym>Ctrl-</keysym><keysym>c</keysym></keycombo> to create a "
+"new partition (when an empty partition is selected)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:117
+msgid ""
+"<keycombo><keysym>Ctrl-</keysym><keysym>d</keysym></keycombo> to delete a "
+"partition"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:121
+msgid ""
+"<keycombo><keysym>Ctrl-</keysym><keysym>m</keysym></keycombo> to set the "
+"mount point"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:127
+msgid ""
+"To get information about the different file system types available, please "
+"read the <acronym>ext2FS</acronym> chapter from the <citetitle>Reference "
+"Manual</citetitle>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml:133
+msgid ""
+"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS "
+"<quote>bootstrap</quote> partition of at least 1<acronym>MB</acronym> which "
+"will be used by the <application>yaboot</application> bootloader. If you opt "
+"to make the partition a bit larger, say 50<acronym>MB</acronym>, you may "
+"find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for "
+"emergency boot situations."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:12
+msgid "Deprecated - Choose FAT Partition to Be Resized"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:19
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "resize"
+msgstr "зміна_розмірів"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> More than one "
+"<application>Microsoft</application> partition has been detected on your "
+"hard drive. Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to "
+"install your new <application>Mageia</application> operating system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\", "
+"\"Capacity\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard drive type\", \"hard drive number\", "
+"\"partition number\" (for example, \"sda1\")."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:32
+msgid "\"Hard drive type\" is \"sd\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#.  (mentioning SCSI doesn't seem needed anymore - Marja) if it is a <acronym>SCSI</acronym> hard drive.
+#. I rewrote it and added it back - MrsB
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"This is standard for hard drives now and has nothing to do with SD Memory "
+"Cards. Hard drives were previously prefixed \"hd\" for IDE drives or \"sd\" "
+"for SATA drives but they are all now prefixed with \"sd\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:40
+msgid "\"Hard drive number\" is actually a letter and always follows \"sd\":"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:43
+msgid "\"a\" means \"first hard drive\";"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:48
+msgid "\"b\" means \"second hard drive\";"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:53
+msgid "and so on..."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml:57
+msgid ""
+"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard drive under "
+"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> (the first "
+"disk or partition is called \"C:\")."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - Installation Class"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml:6
+msgid ""
+"This step is shown only if an existing <application>GNU/Linux</application> "
+"partition is found on your machine."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-selectInstallClass.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-im1\" revision="
+"\"1\" width=\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml:16
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "class"
+msgstr "клас"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><application>DrakX</application> "
+"now needs to know if you want to install from scratch or upgrade your "
+"existing <application>Mageia</application> system:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml:27
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "upgrade"
+msgstr "Оновити"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Upgrade</guilabel>.<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>If "
+"you have an older <application>Mageia</application> operating system, this "
+"option allows you to upgrade it. Your existing partitioning scheme and user "
+"data won't be altered. Most of the other configuration steps remain "
+"available and are similar to a standard installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#.  Removed - simon, grenoya and marja think it is not needed: - For the most part, this
+#.     completely wipes out the old system. However, depending on your
+#.     partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of your existing data
+#.     (particularly <literal>
+#. /home</literal> directories) from being
+#.     overwritten. If you wish to change how your hard drives are
+#.     partitioned, or to change the file system, you should use this
+#.       option.
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Install</guilabel>. Use this option for everything except "
+"upgrading an existing Mageia installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - Configuring the Keyboard"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"DrakX shows one or more keyboards, depending on which language(s) you have "
+"chosen"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-selectKeyboard.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"width=\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id="
+"\"1\"/>Depending on the language you chose (see <xref linkend=\"drakxid-"
+"selectLanguage\"/>), <application>DrakX</application> automatically selects "
+"a particular type of keyboard configuration. Verify that the selection suits "
+"you or choose another keyboard layout. If you don't know which layout your "
+"keyboard has, look in the specifications that came with your system, or ask "
+"the computer vendor. You can also look here: <link xmlns:xlink=\"http://www."
+"w3.org/1999/xlink\" xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout"
+"\">en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <guibutton revision="
+"\"1\">More</guibutton> to get a full list, and select your keyboard there. "
+"Note that after having chosen your keyboard, you will return to the first "
+"screen and it'll seem that a keyboard from this first screen was chosen. You "
+"can safely ignore this and go on, the keyboard you chose from the full list "
+"will now be configured!"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"If you choose a keyboard layout based on a non-Latin alphabet, the next "
+"dialog will allow you to choose the key binding which will switch the "
+"keyboard between the Latin and non-Latin layouts."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"Additional information: You may have a keyboard which does not correspond "
+"exactly to your language: for example, if you are an English-speaking Swiss "
+"native, you may have a Swiss keyboard. Or if you speak English and are "
+"located in Québec, you may find yourself in the same situation where your "
+"native language and country-set keyboard don't match. In either case, this "
+"installation step will allow you to select an appropriate keyboard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - Choosing your Language"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><figure><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-selectLanguage.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-im1\" revision=\"4\" "
+"width=\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>First open the tree relative to "
+"the continent you are located in, and then choose the language you speak. "
+"Your language choice will affect the installer, the documentation, and the "
+"system in general."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"Click the <guilabel>Multiple languages</guilabel> button near the botom of "
+"the list to go to the screen to select additional languages for your "
+"workstation, thereby installing the language-specific files for system "
+"documentation and applications. For example, if Spanish friends are to use "
+"your machine, select English as the default language in the first screen and "
+"<guilabel>Español</guilabel> in the <guilabel>Multiple languages</guilabel> "
+"screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"You are advised to install the language of your keyboard and the language of "
+"the country you live in as additional languages if they are not the same as "
+"your preferred language."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"About <acronym>UTF-8</acronym> (unicode) support: Unicode is a character "
+"encoding intended to cover all existing languages. <application>Mageia "
+"Linux</application> uses <acronym>UTF-8</acronym> by default for all "
+"languages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"If you know UTF-8 encoding doesn't work well for your language, tick the box "
+"<guilabel>Old compatibility (non-UTF) encoding</guilabel> at the top of the "
+"<guilabel>Multiple languages</guilabel> screen"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:48
+msgid "Be aware that this will then apply to all languages on your system"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"Note that you're not limited to choosing a single additional language. You "
+"may choose several, or even install them all by selecting the <guilabel>All "
+"languages</guilabel> box. Selecting support for a language means "
+"translations, fonts, spell checkers, etc. will also be installed for that "
+"language. Make sure you select all languages which are likely to be useful "
+"on the machine now, it may be difficult to configure support for languages "
+"not chosen at install time at a later date."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"To switch between the various languages installed on your system, you can "
+"launch the <command>localedrake</command> command as <literal>root</literal> "
+"to change the language used by the entire system. Running the command as a "
+"regular user will only change the language settings for that particular user."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:3 en/drakx-selectSerialPort-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - Configuring your Mouse"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-selectMouse.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-selectMouse-im1\" revision=\"1\" width="
+"\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/>Usually, <application>DrakX</"
+"application> has no problems detecting the number of buttons on your mouse. "
+"If it fails to properly recognize it, it assumes you have a two-button mouse "
+"and will configure it for third-button emulation. The third-button mouse "
+"button of a two-button mouse can be obtained by simultaneously clicking the "
+"left and right mouse buttons. <application>DrakX</application> will "
+"automatically know whether your mouse uses a <acronym>PS/2</acronym>, serial "
+"or <acronym>USB</acronym> interface."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"If you have a 3-button mouse without a wheel, you can choose a "
+"<guilabel>with Wheel emulation</guilabel> mouse. <application>DrakX</"
+"application> will then configure your mouse so that you can simulate the "
+"wheel with it: to do so, press the middle button and move your mouse pointer "
+"up and down."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"If for some reason you wish to specify a different type of mouse, select it "
+"from the list provided."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"You can select the <guilabel>Universal | Any PS/2 &amp; USB mice</guilabel> "
+"entry to choose a <quote>generic</quote> mouse type which will work with "
+"nearly all mice."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"If you choose a mouse other than the default one, a test screen will be "
+"displayed. Use the buttons and wheel to verify that the settings are correct "
+"and that the mouse is working correctly. If the mouse isn't working well, "
+"press the <keycap>space</keycap> bar or <keycap>Enter</keycap> key to cancel "
+"the test and you will be returned to the mouse list."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:49
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Wheel"
+msgstr "Коліщатко"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"Occasionally wheel mice are not detected automatically, so you will need to "
+"select your mouse from a list. Be sure to select the one corresponding to "
+"the port that your mouse is attached to. After selecting a mouse and "
+"pressing the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button, a mouse image will be "
+"displayed on-screen. Scroll the mouse wheel to ensure that it is correctly "
+"activated. As you scroll your mouse wheel, you will see the on-screen scroll "
+"wheel moving. Test the buttons and check that the mouse pointer moves on-"
+"screen as you move your mouse about."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-selectSerialPort-sect1.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"Please select the correct port. For example, the <literal>COM1</literal> "
+"port under <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> is "
+"named <literal>ttyS0</literal> under <application>GNU/Linux</application>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakxservices.xml:3
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Manage system services by enabling or disabling them"
+msgstr "Налаштування сервісів системи"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakxservices.xml:3
+msgid "drakxservices"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakxservices.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata width=\"80%\" xml:id=\"drakxservices-im1\" revision="
+"\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakxservices.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata width=\"80%\" xml:id=\"drakxservices-im1\" revision="
+"\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"drakxservices.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakxservices.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakxservices</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">drakxservices</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - Root Password"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:8
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx-setRootPassword.png\" "
+"width=\"11.5cm\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-"
+"setRootPassword-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx-setRootPassword.png\" "
+"width=\"11.5cm\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-"
+"setRootPassword-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"This is the most crucial decision point for the security of your "
+"<application>GNU/Linux</application> system: you must enter the "
+"<literal>root</literal> password. <literal>Root</literal> is the system "
+"administrator and is the only user authorized to make updates, add users, "
+"change the overall system configuration, and so on. In short, <literal>root</"
+"literal> can do everything! That's why you must choose a password which is "
+"difficult to guess: <application>DrakX</application> will tell you if the "
+"password you chose is too simple. You're not forced to enter a password, but "
+"we <emphasis>strongly</emphasis> encourage you to do so.  <application>GNU/"
+"Linux</application> is just as prone to operator error as any other "
+"operating system. Since <literal>root</literal> can overcome all limitations "
+"and unintentionally erase all data on partitions by carelessly accessing the "
+"partitions themselves, it is important that it be difficult to become "
+"<literal>root</literal>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:41
+msgid ""
+"The password should be a mixture of alphanumeric characters and at least 8 "
+"characters long. Never write down <literal>root</literal>'s password — it "
+"makes it far too easy to compromise your system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"One caveat: don't make the password too long or too complicated because you "
+"must be able to remember it!"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"The password won't be displayed on screen as you type it. To reduce the "
+"chance of a blind typing error you will need to enter the password twice. If "
+"you do happen to make the same typing error twice, you will have to use this "
+"<quote>incorrect</quote> password when you try to connect as <literal>root</"
+"literal>, at least for the first time."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:57
+msgid ""
+"You can change the way users are authenticated on your computer by clicking "
+"on the <guibutton>Authentication method</guibutton> button. The following "
+"authentication methods are available:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Local file</guilabel>. Use a local file for all authentication and "
+"user information. This is the default method."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:71 en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:75
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "LDAP"
+msgstr "LDAP"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:73 en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:86
+#, fuzzy
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:103
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:107
+msgid "authentication"
+msgstr "Розпізнавання"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:70
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id="
+"\"1\"/><guilabel>LDAP</guilabel>. Use an <acronym>LDAP</acronym> server for "
+"some or all authentication needs. An <acronym>LDAP</acronym> directory "
+"consolidates certain types of information within your organization."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:84 en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:88
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "NIS"
+msgstr "NIS"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:83
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id="
+"\"1\"/><guilabel>NIS</guilabel>. Authenticates users against a <acronym>NIS</"
+"acronym> domain. This allows you to run a group of computers in the same "
+"<acronym>NIS</acronym> domain using a common password and group file."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:96
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Smart Card</guilabel>. Uses <application>SmartCard</application> "
+"hardware for providing authentication services."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:105
+msgid "PDC"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:109
+msgid "Active Directory"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:102
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id="
+"\"1\"/><guilabel>Windows Domain</guilabel>. Uses a "
+"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> domain "
+"controller to provide authentication services through <application>Active "
+"Directory</application>, <application>Microsoft</application>'s "
+"implementation of <acronym>LDAP</acronym>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:119
+msgid ""
+"If you select a method other than <guilabel>Local file</guilabel>, you will "
+"be asked to provide some parameters, which vary from one method to the "
+"other. If you don't know those parameters, you should ask your network "
+"administrator."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml:125
+msgid ""
+"If you happen to have problems remembering passwords, or if your computer "
+"will never be connected to the Internet and you absolutely trust everybody "
+"who uses your computer, you can choose to have <guibutton>No password</"
+"guibutton>.  Please bear in mind that this is an insecure option, and it is "
+"not recommended."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - Installing a Bootloader"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-setupBootloader.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-im1\" revision="
+"\"1\" width=\"11.5cm\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:18
+#, fuzzy
+#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:25
+msgid "LILO"
+msgstr "LILO"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:22
+#, fuzzy
+#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:28
+msgid "GRUB"
+msgstr "GRUB"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"A bootloader is a small program which is started by the computer at boot "
+"time. It's responsible for starting up the whole system. Normally, the "
+"bootloader installation is totally automated. <application>DrakX</"
+"application> will analyze the disk boot sector and act according to what it "
+"finds there:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"If a <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> boot "
+"sector is found, it will replace it with a <application>GRUB</application>/"
+"<application>LILO</application> boot sector. This way you will be able to "
+"load either <application>GNU/Linux</application> or any other <acronym>OS</"
+"acronym> installed on your machine."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"In any other case it will ask you where it should place the boot loader. "
+"Generally, the <guilabel>First sector of the drive (MBR)</guilabel> is the "
+"safest place."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"Choosing <guilabel>Skip</guilabel> won't install a bootloader. Use this "
+"option only if you know what you're doing."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-setupSCSI.xml:3
+msgid "Hard Disk Detection and Configuration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-setupSCSI.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<application>DrakX</application> will first attempt to detect any "
+"<acronym>IDE</acronym> and <acronym>SATA</acronym> devices present in your "
+"computer. It will also scan for one or more <acronym>PCI</acronym> "
+"<acronym>SCSI</acronym> cards. If a <acronym>SCSI</acronym> card is found, "
+"<application>DrakX</application> will attempt to install the correct driver."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-setupSCSI.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"However, because hardware detection is not foolproof, <application>DrakX</"
+"application> may fail to detect your <acronym>SCSI</acronym> hard drives. If "
+"so, you mayl need to specify your hardware."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-setupSCSI.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"If you have had to specify your <acronym>PCI</acronym> <acronym>SCSI</"
+"acronym> adapter(s), <application>DrakX</application> will ask if you want "
+"to pass configuration options to it. Allow <application>DrakX</application> "
+"to probe the hardware to determine any card-specific options needed to "
+"initialize the adapter."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-setupSCSI.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"<application>DrakX</application> will usually complete this step without "
+"issues."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-setupSCSI.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"If <application>DrakX</application> cannot automatically determine the "
+"parameters to be passed to the hardware, you'll need to manually configure "
+"the driver."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-setupSCSI.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"How you determine these parameters is beyond the scope of this help screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - Configuring X, the Graphical Server"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:8
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-configureX.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-setupX-im3\" revision=\"2\" width=\"11.5cm"
+"\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:13
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "X Window System"
+msgstr "Система X Window"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><application>X</application> (for "
+"X Window System) is the heart of the <application>GNU/Linux</application> "
+"graphical interface on which all the graphical environments "
+"(<application>KDE</application>, <application>GNOME</application>, "
+"<application>AfterStep</application>, <application>WindowMaker</"
+"application>, etc.) bundled with <application>Mageia</application> rely on."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"You will see a list of different parameters which you can change in order to "
+"optimize your graphical display."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term>
+#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:27
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Graphic Card"
+msgstr "Графічна карта"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"If everything works fine, the installer should detect and configure the "
+"video card installed on your machine. If the detection or configuration is "
+"incorrect, you can choose the card installed on your system from a list."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term>
+#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:44
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Monitor"
+msgstr "Монітор"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"If the installer fails to detect or configure your monitor properly, you can "
+"choose from this list the monitor which is connected to your computer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term>
+#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:53
+msgid "Resolution"
+msgstr "Роздільна здатність"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"Here you can choose the resolutions and color depths available for your "
+"graphics hardware. Choose the one which best suits your needs (you will be "
+"able to make changes after the installation). A sample of the chosen "
+"configuration will be shown in the monitor picture."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term>
+#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:64
+msgid "Test"
+msgstr "Перевірити"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><note><para>
+#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:68
+msgid "Depending on your hardware, this entry might not appear."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:73
+msgid ""
+"The system will try to open a graphical screen at the desired resolution. If "
+"you see the test message during the test and answer <guimenu>Yes</guimenu>, "
+"then <application>DrakX</application> will proceed to the next step. If you "
+"don't see it, it means that some part of the auto-detected configuration was "
+"incorrect and the test will automatically end after a few seconds and return "
+"you to the menu. Change settings until you get a correct graphical display."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><bridgehead>
+#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:85 en/harddrake2.xml:66
+msgid "Options"
+msgstr "Параметри"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml:88
+msgid ""
+"This step allows you to choose whether you want your machine to "
+"automatically switch to a graphical interface at boot. Obviously, you may "
+"want to select the <guilabel>No</guilabel> option if your machine is to act "
+"as a server, or if you were not successful in getting the display configured."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-takeOverHdChoose-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - Choose drive to install Linux on"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-takeOverHdChoose-sect1.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"Choose the hard drive you want to erase in order to install your new "
+"<application>Mageia</application> partition. Be careful, all data on this "
+"drive will be lost and will not be recoverable!"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakx-takeOverHdConfirm-sect1.xml:3
+msgid "Deprecated - Confirm data deletion"
+msgstr ""
+
+#.  The arrows aren't on the button anymore -marja -&#x0003E;
+#.  -&#x0003E;
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-takeOverHdConfirm-sect1.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you want to delete all data and "
+"partitions present on this hard drive. Be careful, after clicking on "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> you will not be able to recover any data and "
+"partitions present on this hard drive, including any "
+"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> data."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. &lt;-
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakx-takeOverHdConfirm-sect1.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> to quit this operation without "
+"losing data and partitions present on this hard drive."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:10
+msgid "Hardware configuration"
+msgstr "Налаштування обладнання"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:12
+msgid "harddrake2"
+msgstr "harddrake2"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"harddrake2.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"harddrake2-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"harddrake2.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"harddrake2-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">harddrake2</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">harddrake2</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> gives a general view of "
+"the hardware of your computer. When the tool is launched, it executes a job "
+"to look for every element of the hardware. For that, it uses the command "
+"<code>ldetect </code>which refers to a list of hardware in <code>ldetect-"
+"lst</code> package."
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою цієї програми<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> ви "
+"зможете здійснити загальний огляд обладнання вашого комп’ютера. Після "
+"запуску програма виконує автоматичний пошук всіх компонентів обладнання. З "
+"цією метою вона використовує програму <code>ldetect</code>, яка у своїй "
+"роботі покладається на список обладнання з пакунка <code>ldetect-lst</code>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:31
+msgid "The window"
+msgstr "Вікно програми"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:33
+msgid "The window is divided in two columns."
+msgstr "Вікно поділено на два стовпчики."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"The left column contains a list of the detected hardware. The devices are "
+"grouped by categories. Click on the &gt; to expand the content of a "
+"category. Each device can be selected in this column."
+msgstr ""
+"У лівому стовпчику буде показано список виявленого обладнання. Пристрої буде "
+"згруповано за категоріями. Натисніть кнопочку &gt;, щоб розгорнути список "
+"категорії. За допомогою цього стовпчика можна вибирати пристрій зі списку."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"The right column displays information about the selected device.  The "
+"<guimenu>Help -&gt; Fields description</guimenu> gives some information "
+"about the content of the fields."
+msgstr ""
+"У правому стовпчику буде показано дані щодо позначеного пристрою. За "
+"допомогою пункту меню <guimenu>Довідка -&gt; Опис полів</guimenu> можна "
+"отримати докладніший опис показаних полів."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"According to which type of device is selected, either one or two buttons are "
+"available at the bottom of the right column:"
+msgstr ""
+"Відповідно до вибраного типу пристрою, у нижній частині правої панелі вікна "
+"буде показано одну або дві кнопки:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Set current driver options</guibutton>: this can be used to "
+"parameterize the module which is used in relation to the device. This must "
+"used by experts only."
+msgstr ""
+"<guibutton>Встановити параметри поточного драйвера</guibutton>: за допомогою "
+"цієї кнопки можна змінити параметри роботи модуля системи, пов’язаного з "
+"роботою пристрою. Цією кнопкою варто користуватися лише досвідченим "
+"користувачам."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:54
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Run config tool</guibutton>: access to the tool which can "
+"configure the device. The tool can often be accessed directly from the MCC."
+msgstr ""
+"<guibutton>Запустити інструмент налаштування</guibutton>: отримати доступ до "
+"засобу налаштовування пристрою. Зазвичай, доступ до цього засобу можна "
+"отримати безпосередньо з Центру керування Mageia."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:68
+msgid ""
+"The <guimenu>options</guimenu> menu gives the opportunity to check boxes to "
+"enable automatic detection:"
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою пунктів меню <guimenu>Параметри</guimenu> ви можете увімкнути "
+"автоматичне виявлення деяких типів пристроїв:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:73
+msgid "modem"
+msgstr "модемів"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:77
+msgid "Jaz devices"
+msgstr "пристроїв Jaz"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:81
+msgid "Zip parallel devices"
+msgstr "паралельних пристроїв Zip"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:83
+msgid ""
+"By default these detections are not enabled, because they are slow. Check "
+"the appropriate box(es) if you have this hardware connected. Detection will "
+"be operational the next time this tool is started."
+msgstr ""
+"Типово, таке виявлення не виконується, оскільки воно є доволі тривалим. "
+"Позначте відповідні пункти, якщо на вашому комп’ютері встановлено відповідне "
+"обладнання. Виявлення буде виконано під час наступного запуску програми."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:3
+msgid "Set up the Keyboard Layout"
+msgstr "Налаштовування розкладки клавіатури"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:7
+msgid "keyboarddrake"
+msgstr "keyboarddrake"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"keyboarddrake.png\" xml:id=\"keyboarddrake-im1\" format=\"PNG\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"keyboarddrake.png\" xml:id=\"keyboarddrake-im1\" format=\"PNG\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">keyboarddrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">keyboarddrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"The keyboarddrake tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> helps you "
+"configure the basic layout for the keyboard that you wish to use on Mageia. "
+"It affects the keyboard layout for all users on the system. It can be found "
+"in the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled "
+"\"Configure mouse and keyboard\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:29
+msgid "Keyboard Layout"
+msgstr "Розкладка клавіатури"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"Here you can select which keyboard layout you wish to use. The names (listed "
+"in alphabetical order) describe the language, country, and/or ethnicity each "
+"layout should be used for."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:37
+msgid "Keyboard Type"
+msgstr "Тип клавіатури"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"This menu lets you select the type of keyboard you are using. If you are "
+"unsure of which to choose, it is best to leave it as the default type."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:10
+msgid "Manage localization for your system"
+msgstr "Налаштовування локалізації системи"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:13
+msgid "localedrake"
+msgstr "localedrake"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"localedrake.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"localedrake-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"localedrake.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"localedrake-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">localedrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна також за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести "
+"команду <emphasis role=\"bold\">localedrake</emphasis> від імені "
+"адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can be found in the "
+"System section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled \"Manage "
+"localization for your system\". It opens with a window in which you can "
+"choose your language. The choice is adapted to languages selected during "
+"installation."
+msgstr ""
+"Цим модулем<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> можна скористатися за "
+"допомогою розділу «Система» Центру керування Mageia. Пункт модуля підписано "
+"«Налаштувати локалізацію системи». У разі його вибору буде відкрито вікно, "
+"за допомогою якого ви можете вибрати мову. Типовий список буде підібрано за "
+"мовами, які було вибрано під час встановлення системи."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button give access to activate "
+"compatibility with old encoding (non UTF8)."
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Додатково</guibutton> можна задіяти режим "
+"сумісності з застарілими кодуваннями (не-UTF8)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"The second window shows a list of countries according to the selected "
+"language. The button <guibutton>Other Countries</guibutton> gives access to "
+"countries not listed."
+msgstr ""
+"У другому вікні буде показано список країн, у яких може використовуватися "
+"вказана мова. Доступ до пунктів країн, яких немає у списку, можна отримати "
+"за допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Інші країни</guibutton>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:38
+msgid "You have to restart your session after any modifications."
+msgstr ""
+"Щоб внесені вами зміни набули чинності, вам слід вийти з вашого облікового "
+"запису у системі і знову увійти до нього."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:42
+msgid "Input method"
+msgstr "Метод вводу"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an "
+"input method (from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the list). Input "
+"methods allow users to input multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, "
+"Korean, etc)."
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою сторінки <guilabel>Інші країни</guilabel> ви також можете "
+"вибрати метод вводу або спосіб введення (зі спадного меню під списком). За "
+"допомогою способів введення можна вводити символи мов, у яких запис "
+"здійснюється не за допомогою літер (китайської, японської, корейської тощо)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method so "
+"users should not need to configure it manually."
+msgstr ""
+"Для азійських і африканських мов типовим способом введення буде вибрано "
+"IBus, отже потреби у налаштовуванні цього способу введення вручну немає."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc.) also provide similar functions "
+"and can, if not available from the drop-down menu, be installed in another "
+"part of the Mageia Control Center. See <xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>."
+msgstr ""
+"Інші способи введення (SCIM, GCIN, HIME тощо) також надають подібні "
+"функціональні можливості. Встановити пакунки цих способів, якщо їх немає у "
+"контекстному меню, можна за допомогою іншого модуля Центру керування Mageia. "
+"Див. <xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:3
+msgid "View and search system logs"
+msgstr "Перегляд системного журналу"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:5
+msgid "logdrake"
+msgstr "logdrake"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"logdrake-"
+"im1\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"logdrake.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"logdrake-"
+"im1\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"logdrake.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">logdrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">logdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia "
+"Control Center System tab, labelled \"<guilabel>View and search system logs</"
+"guilabel>\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:22
+msgid "To do a search in the logs"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"First, enter the key string you want to look for in the <emphasis role=\"bold"
+"\">Matching</emphasis> field and/or the key string you want to <emphasis>do "
+"not</emphasis> wish to see amongst the answers in the field <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">but not matching</emphasis>. Then select the file(s)  to search in "
+"the <guilabel>Choose file</guilabel> field. Optionally, it is possible to "
+"limit the search to only one day. Select it in the <emphasis role=\"bold"
+"\">Calendar</emphasis>, using the little arrows on each side of the month "
+"and year, and check \"<guibutton>Show only for the selected day</guibutton>"
+"\". At last, click on the <guibutton>search</guibutton> button to see the "
+"results in the window called <guilabel>Content of the file</guilabel>. It is "
+"possible to save the results in the .txt format by clicking on the <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">Save</emphasis> button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"The <guibutton>Mageia Tools Logs</guibutton> houses the logs from the Mageia "
+"configuration tools such as the Mageia Control Center tools.  These logs are "
+"updated each time a configuration is modified."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:43
+msgid "To configure a mail alert"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Mail alert</guibutton> automatically checks the system load and "
+"the services every hour and if necessary sends an e-mail to the configured "
+"address."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"To configure this tool, click on the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Mail Alert</"
+"emphasis> button and then, in the next screen, on the<guibutton> Configure "
+"the mail alert system</guibutton> drop down button. Here, all the running "
+"services are displayed and you can choose which ones you want to look watch. "
+"(See screenshot above)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:55
+msgid "The following services can be watched :"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:59
+msgid "Webmin Service"
+msgstr "Служба Webmin"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:63
+msgid "Postfix Mail Server"
+msgstr "Поштовий сервер postfix"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:67
+msgid "FTP Server"
+msgstr "Сервер FTP"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:71
+msgid "Apache World Wide Web Server"
+msgstr "Сервер World Wide Web Apache"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:75
+msgid "SSH Server"
+msgstr "Сервер SSH"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:79
+msgid "Samba Server"
+msgstr "Сервер Samba"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:83
+msgid "Xinetd Service"
+msgstr "Служба xinetd"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:87
+msgid "BIND Domain Name Resolve"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><mediaobject>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:90
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"logdrake1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"logdrake1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"In the next screen, select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel> value you consider "
+"unacceptable. The load represents the demand to a process, a high load slows "
+"the system down and a very high load may indicate that a process has gone "
+"out of control. The default value is 3. We recommend setting the load value "
+"to 3 times the number of processors."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:103
+msgid ""
+"In the last screen, enter the <guilabel>Email address</guilabel> of the "
+"person to be warned and the <guilabel>Email server</guilabel> to use (local "
+"or on the Internet"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mageia-doc-readme.xml:5
+msgid "Mageia Test Document"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mageia-doc-readme.xml:8
+msgid "Testing testing"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mageia-doc-readme.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"This is a <application>Mageia</application> test document. This is an "
+"absolute minimal format XML document.  As you can see: It's not very "
+"complex..."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note>
+#: en/mageia-doc-readme.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"I nicked the container from an old <application>Mandriva</application> XML "
+"document and have been using it to play with XML rather than alter any of "
+"the main documentation files.  <note userlevel=\"beginner\">"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/mageia-doc-readme.xml:15
+msgid "This is an interesting note with a revision tag.."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mageia-doc-readme.xml:18
+msgid "This is the first item in a list"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mageia-doc-readme.xml:19
+msgid "This is the second item"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:3
+msgid "Software Packages Update"
+msgstr "Поновлення пакунків з програмами"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:5
+msgid "MageiaUpdate or drakrpm-update"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"MageiaUpdate-im1\" align="
+"\"center\" fileref=\"MageiaUpdate.png\" format=\"PNG\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"MageiaUpdate-im1\" align="
+"\"center\" fileref=\"MageiaUpdate.png\" format=\"PNG\" /> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">MageiaUpdate</emphasis> or <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakrpm-update</"
+"emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">MageiaUpdate</emphasis> або <emphasis role=\"bold\">"
+"drakrpm-update</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia "
+"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Software management.</"
+"emphasis>¶"
+msgstr ""
+"Доступ до цієї програми<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> можна "
+"отримати з Центру керування Mageia, сторінка "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Менеджер програм</emphasis><placeholder type="
+"\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"To work, MageiaUpdate needs the repositories to be configured with rpmdrake-"
+"edit-media with some media checked as updates. If they are not, you are "
+"prompted to do so."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"As soon as this tool is launched, it scans the installed packages and lists "
+"those with an update available in the repositories. They are all selected by "
+"default to be automatically downloaded and installed. Click on the "
+"<guibutton>Update</guibutton> button to start the process."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"By clicking on a package, more information is displayed in the lower half of "
+"the window. The print<emphasis role=\"bold\"> ></emphasis> before a title "
+"means you can click to drop down a text."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><inlinemediaobject>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:35 en/mgaapplet-config.xml:20
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"MageiaUpdate1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"MageiaUpdate1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"When updates are available, an applet in the system tray warns you by "
+"displaying this red icon <placeholder type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"0\"/"
+"> . Just click and enter the user password to update the system alike."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:5
+msgid "Boot"
+msgstr "Завантаження"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"mcc-boot.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"mcc-boot-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"mcc-boot.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"mcc-boot-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your boot "
+"steps. Click on a link below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:19
+msgid "Configure boot steps"
+msgstr "Налаштовування послідовності завантаження"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:21
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakboot\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakboot\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:25
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakboot--boot\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakboot--boot\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:29
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakedm\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakedm\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:4
+msgid "Hardware"
+msgstr "Обладнання"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:8
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"mcc-hardware.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"mcc-hardware-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"mcc-hardware.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"mcc-hardware-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your "
+"hardware. Click on a link below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:20
+msgid "Manage your hardware"
+msgstr "Налаштовування обладнання"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"harddrake2\"/><emphasis> = Browse and configure hardware</"
+"emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+"<xref linkend=\"harddrake2\"/><emphasis>Переглянути і налаштувати обладнання<"
+"/emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:27
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"draksound\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"draksound\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:34
+msgid "Configure graphics"
+msgstr "Налаштовування графіки"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:36
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"drak3d\"/><emphasis> = Configure 3D Desktop effects</"
+"emphasis>"
+msgstr "Налаштувати ефекти 3D-стільниці"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:41
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"XFdrake\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"XFdrake\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:48
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Configure mouse and keyboard"
+msgstr "Налаштувати мишу і клавіатуру"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:50
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"keyboarddrake\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:54
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"mousedrake\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:61
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Configure printing and scanning"
+msgstr "Налаштувати друк і сканування"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:63
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"system-config-printer\"/><emphasis> = Set up the printer(s), "
+"the print job queues, ...</emphasis>"
+msgstr "Налаштувати друкарки, черги друку, …"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:68
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"scannerdrake\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:75 en/mcc-network.xml:58
+msgid "Others"
+msgstr "Інше"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:77
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakups\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mcc-intro.xml:3
+msgid "About the Manual for the Mageia Control Center"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-intro.xml:6
+msgid ""
+"The Mageia Control Center (MCC) has eight different options to choose from "
+"in the left column. Each of these options gives a different set of tools "
+"that can be selected in the big right panel."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-intro.xml:8
+msgid ""
+"The eight following chapters are about those eight options and the related "
+"tools."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-intro.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"The titles of those pages will often be the same as the titles of the tool "
+"screens."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-intro.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"There is also a search bar available, which you can access by clicking on "
+"the \"Search\" tab in the left column."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:6 en/mcc-localdisks.xml:17
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Local disks"
+msgstr "Локальні диски"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"mcc-localdisks-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"mcc-localdisks.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"mcc-localdisks-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"mcc-localdisks.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several tools to manage or share your "
+"local disks. Click on a link below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:18
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakdisk\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:19
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--removable\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:20
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--fileshare\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:4 en/mcc-networkservices.xml:17
+msgid "Network Services"
+msgstr "Мережеві служби"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:8
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"mcc-networkservices.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"mcc-networkservices-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"mcc-networkservices.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"mcc-networkservices-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This screen and the one for <emphasis>Sharing</emphasis> are only visible if "
+"the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can choose "
+"between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link below or "
+"on <xref linkend=\"mcc-sharing\"/>to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:19
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_dhcp\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_dhcp\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:23
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_bind\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_bind\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:27
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_squid\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_squid\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:31
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_ntp\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_ntp\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:35
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_sshd\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_sshd\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:4
+msgid "Network Sharing"
+msgstr "Спільний доступ"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:8
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"mcc-networksharing-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"mcc-networksharing.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"mcc-networksharing-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"mcc-networksharing.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several tools for sharing drives and "
+"directories. Click on a link below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:17
+msgid "Configure Windows(R) shares"
+msgstr "Налаштовування доступу до ресурсів Windows"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:18
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--smb\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:19
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"draksambashare\"></xref><emphasis> = Share drives and "
+"directories with Windows (SMB) systems</emphasis>"
+msgstr "Налаштувати доступ до дисків і тек Windows (SMB)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:22
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Configure NFS shares"
+msgstr "Налаштувати доступ по ресурсів NFS"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:23
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--nfs\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:24
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknfs\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:27
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Configure WebDAV shares"
+msgstr "Налаштувати доступ до WebDAV"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:28
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--dav\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:3
+msgid "Network and Internet"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" "
+"fileref=\"mcc-network.png\" xml:id=\"mcc-network-im1\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" "
+"fileref=\"mcc-network.png\" xml:id=\"mcc-network-im1\" /> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several network tools. Click on a link "
+"below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:18
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Manage your network devices"
+msgstr "Налаштувати мережеві пристрої"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:21
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:25
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconnect\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:29
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconnect--del\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:36
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Personalize and Secure your network"
+msgstr "Налаштувати особисті установки і безпеку мережі"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:39
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakproxy\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:43
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakgw\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:47
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknetprofile\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:51
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakvpn\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:61
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakhosts\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:5 en/mcc-security.xml:18
+msgid "Security"
+msgstr "Безпека"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"mcc-security.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"mcc-security-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several security tools. Click on a "
+"link below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:20
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"msecgui\"/><emphasis> = Configure system security, "
+"permissions and audit</emphasis>"
+msgstr "Налаштувати політику безпеки системи, права доступу і перевірку"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:25
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakfirewall\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:29
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"draksec\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:33
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakinvictus\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:37
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakguard\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:4 en/mcc-sharing.xml:17
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Sharing"
+msgstr "Спільне користування"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:8
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"mcc-sharing.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"mcc-sharing-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"mcc-sharing.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"mcc-sharing-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This screen and the one for <emphasis>Network Services</emphasis> are only "
+"visible if the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can "
+"choose between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link "
+"below or on <xref linkend=\"mcc-networkservices\"/>to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:19
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_proftpd\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:23
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_apache2\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:4
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "System"
+msgstr "Система"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:8
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"mcc-system.png\" xml:id=\"mcc-system-"
+"im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"mcc-system.png\" xml:id=\"mcc-system-"
+"im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several system and administration "
+"tools. Click on a link below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:18
+msgid "Manage system services"
+msgstr "Керування системними службами"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:20
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakauth\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:24
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakxservices\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:28
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakfont\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:35
+msgid "Localization"
+msgstr "Локалізація"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:37
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakclock\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:41
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"localedrake\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:48
+msgid "Administration tools"
+msgstr "Інструменти адміністрування"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:50
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"logdrake\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:54
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconsole\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:58
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"userdrake\"></xref><emphasis> = Manage users on system</"
+"emphasis>"
+msgstr "Керувати користувачами системи"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:62
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"transfugdrake\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:66
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"draksnapshot-config\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><title>
+#: en/MCC.xml:4
+msgid "Mageia Control Center"
+msgstr "Центр керування Mageia"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/MCC.xml:6
+msgid ""
+"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA "
+"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/"
+"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>."
+msgstr ""
+"Текст та знімки вікон у цьому підручнику надаються вам відповідно до умов "
+"ліцензування CC BY-SA 3.0, <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/"
+"licenses/by-sa/3.0/\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>ю"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/MCC.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www."
+"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www."
+"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>."
+msgstr ""
+"Цей підручник було створено за допомогою <link ns6:href=\"http://www.calenco."
+"com\">Calenco CMS</link>, розробленої компанією <link ns6:href=\"http://www."
+"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/MCC.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:"
+"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</"
+"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual."
+msgstr ""
+"Підручник було написано охочими до цього користувачами у вільний від "
+"основної роботи час. Будь ласка, зверніться до <link ns6:href=\"https://wiki."
+"mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">команди документування</link>, якщо "
+"хочете допомогти у покращенні цього підручника."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:3
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "Configure updates frequency"
+msgstr "Налаштувати частоту оновлення"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:5
+msgid "mgaapplet-config"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"mgaapplet-"
+"config-im1\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"mgaapplet-config.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">mgaapplet-config</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">mgaapplet-config</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia "
+"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Software management</"
+"emphasis>. It is also available by a <guimenu>right click / Updates "
+"configuration</guimenu> on the red icon <placeholder type=\"inlinemediaobject"
+"\" id=\"1\"/> in the system tray."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"The first slider allows you to change how frequently Mageia will check for "
+"updates and the second the delay after booting before the first check.  The "
+"check box gives you the option to be warned when a new Mageia release is out."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mousedrake.xml:3
+msgid "Set up the pointer device (mouse, touchpad)"
+msgstr "Налаштовування пристрою введення (миша, сенсорна панель)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/mousedrake.xml:6
+msgid "mousedrake"
+msgstr "mousedrake"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/mousedrake.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"mousedrake-im1\" revision=\"1\" fileref="
+"\"mousedrake.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"mousedrake-im1\" revision=\"1\" fileref="
+"\"mousedrake.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" /> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/mousedrake.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">mousedrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">mousedrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mousedrake.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia "
+"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Hardware</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mousedrake.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"As you must have a mouse to install Mageia, that one is already installed by "
+"Drakinstall. This tool allows installation of another mouse."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mousedrake.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"The mice are sorted by connection type and then by model. Select your mouse "
+"and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Most of the time \"Universal / Any "
+"PS/2 &amp; USB mice\"' is suitable for a recent mouse. The new mouse is "
+"immediately taken into account."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:3
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "MSEC: System Security and Audit"
+msgstr "MSEC: Контроль безпеки системи"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:3
+msgid "msecgui"
+msgstr "msecgui"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"msecgui-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"msecgui.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"msecgui-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"msecgui.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">msecgui</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">msecgui</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:3
+msgid "Software Management (Install and Remove Software)"
+msgstr ""
+"Керування програмним забезпеченням (Встановлення або вилучення програм)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:6
+msgid "rpmdrake"
+msgstr "rpmdrake"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"rpmdrake-im1\" revision=\"1\" fileref="
+"\"rpmdrake.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"rpmdrake-im1\" revision=\"1\" fileref="
+"\"rpmdrake.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:18
+msgid "Introduction to rpmdrake"
+msgstr "Вступ до rpmdrake"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">rpmdrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">rpmdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>, also known as drakrpm, "
+"is a program for installing, uninstalling and updating packages. It is the "
+"graphical user interface of URPMI. At each start up, it will check online "
+"package lists (called 'media') downloaded straight from Mageia's official "
+"servers, and will show you each time the latest applications and packages "
+"available for your computer. A filter system allows you to display only "
+"certain types of packages: you may display only installed applications (by "
+"default), or only available updates. You can also view only not installed "
+"packages. You can also search by the name of a package, or in the summaries "
+"of descriptions or in the full descriptions of packages or in the file names "
+"included in the packages."
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою цього інструмента<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>, "
+"також відомого за назвою drakrpm, можна "
+"встановлювати, вилучати і оновлювати пакунки з програмним забезпеченням. "
+"Програма є графічним інтерфейсом до URPMI. Під час кожного запуску вона "
+"перевірятиме списки пакунків у інтернеті (які називаються «носіями» "
+"пакунків), отримані безпосередньо з офіційних серверів Mageia, і "
+"показуватиме список найсвіжіших пакунків з програмним забезпеченням для "
+"вашої системи. Система фільтрування надає вам змогу переглядати списки "
+"пакунків лише певного типу: ви можете переглянути список встановлених "
+"пакунків (типове фільтрування) або лише доступні оновлення. Також можна "
+"ознайомитися зі списком невстановлених пакунків. Ви можете знайти пакунок за "
+"назвою або словом у резюме опису пакунка, а також на назвами файлів, які є "
+"частиною пакунка."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"To work, rpmdrake needs the repositories to be configured with <xref linkend="
+"\"drakrpm-edit-media\"/> ."
+msgstr ""
+"Для належної роботи rpmdrake слід налаштувати параметри сховищ пакунків за "
+"допомогою <xref linkend=\"drakrpm-edit-media\"/>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:39
+msgid "The main parts of the screen"
+msgstr "Основні частини вікна"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><screenshot><mediaobject>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:43
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake1_uk.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:51
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Package type filter:</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Фільтрування за типом пакунка:</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"This filter allows you to display only certain types of packages. The first "
+"time you start the manager, it only displays applications with a graphical "
+"interface. You can display either all the packages and all their "
+"dependencies and libraries or only package groups such as applications only, "
+"updates only or backported packages from newer versions of Mageia."
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою цього фільтра ви можете звузити список пакунків до певного "
+"типу. Під час першого запуску програми для керування пакунками у списку "
+"будуть лише програми з графічним інтерфейсом. Ви можете наказати програмі "
+"показувати всі пакунки і всі залежності цих пакунків разом з бібліотеками "
+"або наказати показувати лише групи пакунків (цілісні програмні комплекси), "
+"лише оновлення або лише пакунки, портовані з новіших версій Mageia Linux."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"The default filter setting is for new entrants to Linux or Mageia, who "
+"probably do not want command line or specialist tools.  Since you're reading "
+"this documentation, you're obviously interested in improving your knowledge "
+"of Mageia, so it is best to set this filter to \"All\"."
+msgstr ""
+"Типовий режим фільтрування призначено для користувачів, які не мають "
+"значного досвіду користування Linux або Mageia, тобто тих, кому не потрібні "
+"програми, які керуються командним рядком, чи програми для спеціалістів. "
+"Оскільки ви читаєте цю документацію, ви очевидно зацікавлені у розширенні "
+"ваших знань щодо Mageia, отже, краще вибрати варіант «Всі»."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:70
+msgid ""
+"<firstterm> <emphasis role=\"bold\">Package state filter:</emphasis> </"
+"firstterm>"
+msgstr ""
+"<firstterm> <emphasis role=\"bold\">Фільтрування за станом пакунка:</"
+"emphasis> </firstterm>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:73
+msgid ""
+"This filter allows you to view only the installed packages, only the "
+"packages that are not installed or all of the packages, both installed and "
+"not installed."
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою цього фільтрування ви можете наказати програмі показати лише "
+"встановлені пакунки, пакунки, які ще не встановлено, або всі пакунки, "
+"встановлені і невстановлені."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:79
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Search mode:</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Режим пошуку:</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:81
+msgid ""
+"Click on this icon to search through the package names, through their "
+"summaries, through their complete description or through the files included "
+"in the packages."
+msgstr ""
+"Натисніть цю піктограму, щоб вибрати дані, у яких виконуватиметься пошук: "
+"назви пакунків, резюме, повні описи або списки файлів, що містяться у "
+"пакунках."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:87
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">\"Find\" box:</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Поле «Знайти»:</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:89
+msgid ""
+"Enter here one or more key words. If you want to use more than one keyword "
+"for searching use '|' between keywords, e.g. To search for \"mplayer\" and "
+"\"xine\" at the same time type 'mplayer | xine'."
+msgstr ""
+"У цьому полі можна вказати одне або декілька ключових слів. Якщо для пошук "
+"ви хочете використати декілька ключових слів, відокремте їх символом «|». "
+"Наприклад, якщо ви хочете знайти пакунки для mplayer або xine, вкажіть: "
+"«mplayer | xine» (без лапок)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:95
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Erase all:</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Витерти все:</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"This icon can erase in one click all the key words entered in the \"Find\" "
+"box ."
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою натискання цієї піктограми можна вилучити всі ключові слова у "
+"полі «Знайти»."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:102
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Categories list:</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Список категорій:</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:104
+msgid ""
+"This side bar groups all applications and packages into clear categories and "
+"sub categories."
+msgstr ""
+"На цій панелі наведено список всіх програм і пакунків, розподілених за "
+"категоріями та підкатегоріями."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:109
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Description panel:</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Панель опису:</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:111
+msgid ""
+"This panel displays the package's name, its summary and complete "
+"description. It displays many useful elements about the selected package. It "
+"can also show precise details about the package, the files included in the "
+"package as well as a list of the last changes made by the maintainer."
+msgstr ""
+"На цій панелі буде показано назву пакунка, резюме та короткий опис. Тут ви "
+"зможете знайти багато корисних даних щодо позначеного пакунка, а також точні "
+"дані щодо пакунка, включених до нього файлів та список змін у пакунку, "
+"створений супровідниками пакунка."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:121
+msgid "The status column"
+msgstr "Стовпчик стану"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:123
+msgid ""
+"Once you correctly set the filters, you can find your software either by "
+"category (in area 6 above) or by name/summary/description using area 4. A "
+"list of packages fulfilling your query and, don't forget, the chosen medium "
+"is shown with different status markers according to whether each package is "
+"installed/not installed/an update... To change this status, just check or "
+"uncheck the box before the package name and click on <guibutton>Apply</"
+"guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+"Після належного визначення параметрів фільтрування ви можете шукати "
+"програмне забезпечення або за категоріями (у області 6 на рисунку) або за "
+"назвою, резюме, описом тощо, за допомогою області 4. Список пакунків, які "
+"відповідають вашому запиту на вказаних вами носіях пакунків, буде показано з "
+"позначками стану (встановлено, не встановлено, оновлення). Щоб змінити цей "
+"стан, просто позначте або зніміть позначку з пункту перед назвою пакунка у "
+"списку і натисніть кнопку <guibutton>Застосувати</guibutton>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><thead><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:139
+msgid "Icon"
+msgstr "Піктограма"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><thead><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:141
+msgid "Legend"
+msgstr "Умовне позначення"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:148
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake2_uk.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:153
+msgid "This package is already installed"
+msgstr "Цей пакунок вже встановлено"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:158
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake3.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake3_uk.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:163
+msgid "This package will be installed"
+msgstr "Цей пакунок буде встановлено"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:168
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake4.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake4_uk.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:173
+msgid "This package cannot be modified"
+msgstr "Стан цього пакунка змінювати не можна"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:178
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake5.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake5_uk.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:183
+msgid "This package is an update"
+msgstr "Цей пакунок є оновленням"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:188
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake6.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake6_uk.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:193
+msgid "This package will be uninstalled"
+msgstr "Цей пакунок буде вилучено"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:131
+msgid "<placeholder type=\"table\" id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr "<placeholder type=\"table\" id=\"0\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:199
+msgid "Examples in the screenshot above:"
+msgstr "Приклади на наведеному вище знімку:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:203
+msgid ""
+"If I uncheck digikam (the green arrow tell us it is installed), the status "
+"icon will go red with an up arrow and it will be uninstalled when clicking "
+"on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+"Якщо зняти позначку з пункту digikam (значок з зеленою стрілкою означає, що "
+"цей пакунок встановлено), піктограма стану стане червоною із зображенням "
+"стрілки вгору. Пакунок буде вилучено одразу після натискання кнопки "
+"<guibutton>Застосувати</guibutton>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:211
+msgid ""
+"If I check qdigidoc (which is not installed, see the status), the orange "
+"with a down arrow status icon will appear and and it will be installed when "
+"clicking on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+"Якщо позначити пункт qdigidoc (пакунок не встановлено, як можна бачити зі "
+"стовпчика стану), у стовпчику стану з’явиться помаранчева піктограма стану "
+"зі стрілкою вниз. Пакунок буде встановлено одразу після натискання кнопки "
+"<guibutton>Застосувати</guibutton>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:219
+msgid "The dependencies"
+msgstr "Залежності"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><screenshot><mediaobject>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:223
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake7.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake7_uk.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:229
+msgid ""
+"Some packages need other packages called dependencies in order to work. They "
+"are for example libraries or tools. In this case, Rpmdrake displays an "
+"information window allowing you to choose whether to accept the selected "
+"dependencies, cancel the operation or get more information (see above). It "
+"may also happen that various packages are able to provide the needed "
+"library, in which case rpmdrake displays the list of alternatives with a "
+"button to get more information and another button to choose which package to "
+"install."
+msgstr ""
+"Для належної роботи деяких пакунків доведеться встановити інші пакунки, які "
+"називають залежностями. Ці пакунки містять бібліотеки або додаткові "
+"інструменти. Якщо вам трапиться такий пакунок, rpmdrake покаже інформаційне "
+"вікно, за допомогою якого ви зможете погодитися зі встановленням "
+"залежностей, скасувати встановлення або отримати додаткові дані (див. вище). "
+"Також ви зможете вибрати потрібний вам пакунок, якщо залежності можна "
+"вдовольнити у декілька способів. rpmdrake просто покаже вам вікно зі списком "
+"варіантів задоволення залежностей і кнопками отримання додаткових даних та "
+"вибору пакунка, який слід встановити."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/sample-page-icons.xml:3 en/sample-page-simple.xml:10
+msgid "Simple sample page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/sample-page-icons.xml:7
+msgid "Paragraph with <emphasis>note</emphasis> icon."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/sample-page-icons.xml:12
+msgid "Paragraph with <emphasis>tip</emphasis> icon."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/sample-page-icons.xml:17
+msgid "Paragraph with <emphasis>warning</emphasis> icon."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/sample-page-icons.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>If you want to use other icons, make sure you import some cc-by-sa "
+"ones first.</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/sample-page-itemized-list.xml:6
+msgid "Sample page with itemized list"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/sample-page-itemized-list.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"If you want to copy this list to your page, don't forget to adjust the page "
+"names and paragraph numbers in the code"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/sample-page-itemized-list.xml:15
+msgid "First item on the list"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/sample-page-itemized-list.xml:20
+msgid "Second item on the list"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/sample-page-itemized-list.xml:25
+msgid "Etc."
+msgstr "Та інше"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/sample-page-picture.xml:8
+msgid "Sample page with picture"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/sample-page-picture.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"Look at the xml code of this page to see how the picture below was inserted"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/sample-page-picture.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/sample-page-sections.xml:9
+msgid "Sample page with several sections"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/sample-page-sections.xml:11
+msgid "This is the first section"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/sample-page-sections.xml:12
+msgid "This section is nested in a section that covers the whole page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/sample-page-sections.xml:20
+msgid "This is the second section"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/sample-page-sections.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"In html you can link to it by adding #second-section to the link to this page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/sample-page-sections.xml:25
+msgid "This is the third section"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/sample-page-sections.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"And this section will be shown when going to <code>/sample-page-"
+"sections#third-section</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/sample-page-simple.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"TEST3: Again writing a line to test whether version number is increased on "
+"saving this file"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/sample-page-simple.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can use this page to make another simple page, but if you do so, don't "
+"forget to not only change the name of this file, but to change the page name "
+"in the code of this page, too"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/sample-page-simple.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"Everywhere where you see <code>sample-page-simple</code> in the code, you "
+"should change that into your page name"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/sample-page-simple.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"If you want to make more paragraphs, copy one and change its number in the "
+"code, for instance <code>pa3</code> to <code>pa4</code> and then change the "
+"content. It is possible to put a paragraph between existing ones by adding a "
+"letter to the number, e.g. <code>pa2a</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:10
+msgid "Set up scanner"
+msgstr "Налаштовування сканера"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:11
+msgid "scannerdrake"
+msgstr "scannerdrake"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:18
+msgid "Installation"
+msgstr "Встановлення"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing "
+"<emphasis>scannerdrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">scannerdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to configure "
+"a single scanner device or a multifunction device which includes scanning. "
+"It also allows you to share local devices connected to this computer with a "
+"remote computer or to access remote scanners."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"When you start this tool for the first time, you may get the following "
+"message:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>\"SANE packages need to be installed to use scanners</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:35
+msgid "<emphasis>Do you want to install the SANE packages?\"</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"Choose <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> to continue. It will install <code>scanner-"
+"gui</code> and <code>task-scanning</code> if they are not yet installed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"If your scanner is identified correctly, so if in the above screen you see "
+"the name of your scanner, the scanner is ready for use with, for instance, "
+"<emphasis>XSane</emphasis> or <emphasis>Simple Scan</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"In that case, you might now want to want to configure the <emphasis>Scanner "
+"sharing</emphasis> option. You can read about it in the <xref linkend="
+"\"scannersharing\"/>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:59
+msgid ""
+"However, if your scanner hasn't been correctly identified, and checking its "
+"cable(s) and power switch and then pressing <emphasis>Search for new "
+"scanners</emphasis> doesn't help, you'll need to press <emphasis>Add a "
+"scanner manually</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"Choose the brand of your scanner in the list you see, then its type from the "
+"list for that brand and click <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:68
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake2.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im2\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake2.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im2\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"If you can't find your scanner in the list, then click <emphasis>Cancel</"
+"emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:79
+msgid ""
+"Please check whether your scanner is supported on the <link xlink:href="
+"\"http://www.sane-project.org/lists/sane-mfgs-cvs.html\">SANE: Supported "
+"Devices</link> page and ask for help in the <link xlink:href=\"http://forums."
+"mageia.org/en/\">forums</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><info><title>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:87
+msgid "Choose port"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><mediaobject>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:90
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake3.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im3\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake3.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im3\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"You can leave this setting to <emphasis>Auto-detect available ports</"
+"emphasis> unless your scanner's interface is a parallel port. In that case, "
+"select <emphasis>/dev/parport0</emphasis> if you have only one."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:102
+msgid ""
+"After clicking <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>, in most cases you will see a screen "
+"similar to the one below."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:104
+msgid ""
+"If you don't get that screen, then please read the <xref linkend="
+"\"scannerextrasteps\"/>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:107
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake4.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im4\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake4.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im4\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:117
+msgid "Scannersharing"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:121
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake5.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im5\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake5.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im5\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:128
+msgid ""
+"Here you can choose whether the scanners connected to this machine should be "
+"accessible by remote machines and by which remote machines. You can also "
+"decide here whether scanners on remote machines should be made available on "
+"this machine."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:133
+msgid ""
+"Scanner sharing to hosts : name or IP address of hosts can be added or "
+"deleted from the list of hosts allowed to access the local device(s), on "
+"this computer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:137
+msgid ""
+"Usage of remote scanners : name or IP address of hosts can added or deleted "
+"from the list of hosts which give access to a remote scanner."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:142
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake6.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im6\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake6.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im6\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:149
+msgid "Scanner sharing to hosts: you can add host."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:152
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake7.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im7\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake7.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im7\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:159
+msgid ""
+"Scanner sharing to hosts: specify which host(s) to add, or allow all remote "
+"machines."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:163
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake8.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im8\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake8.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im8\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:170
+msgid "\"All remote machines\" are allowed to access the local scanner."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:174
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake9.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im9\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"scannerdrake9.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"scannerdrake-im9\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:181
+msgid ""
+"If the package <emphasis>saned</emphasis> is not yet installed, the tool "
+"offers to do it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:184
+msgid "At the end, the tool will alter these files:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:186
+msgid "<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/saned.conf</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/saned.conf</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:188
+msgid "<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/net.conf</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/net.conf</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:190
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/dll.conf </emphasis>to add or comment the directive "
+"\"net\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:193
+msgid ""
+"It will also configure <emphasis>saned</emphasis> and <emphasis>xinetd</"
+"emphasis> to be started on boot."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:199 en/system-config-printer.xml:278
+msgid "Specifics"
+msgstr "Специфічні поради"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:205
+msgid "Hewlett-Packard"
+msgstr "Hewlett-Packard"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:207
+msgid ""
+"Most HP scanners are managed from <emphasis>HP Device Manager</emphasis> "
+"(hplip) which also manages printers. In this case, this tool does not allow "
+"you to configure it and invites you to use <emphasis>HP Device Manager</"
+"emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:214
+msgid "Epson"
+msgstr "Epson"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:216
+msgid ""
+"Drivers are available from <link xlink:href=\"http://download.ebz.epson.net/"
+"dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX\">this page</link>. When indicated, you must "
+"install the <emphasis>iscan-data</emphasis> package first, then "
+"<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> (in this order). It is possible that the "
+"<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> package will generate a warning about a conflict "
+"with <emphasis>sane</emphasis>. Users have reported that this warning can be "
+"ignored."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:231
+msgid "Extra installation steps"
+msgstr "Додаткові кроки зі встановлення"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:234
+msgid ""
+"It is possible that after selecting a port for your scanner in the <xref "
+"linkend=\"choosescannerport\"/> screen, you need to take one or more extra "
+"steps to correctly configure your scanner."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:239
+msgid ""
+"In some cases, you're told the scanner needs its firmware to be uploaded "
+"each time it is started. This tool allows you to load it into the device, "
+"after you installed it on your system. In this screen you can install the "
+"firmware from a CD or a Windows installation, or install the one you "
+"downloaded from an Internet site of the vendor."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:241
+msgid ""
+"When your device's firmware needs to be loaded, it can take a long time at "
+"each first usage, possibly more than one minute. So be patient."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:246
+msgid ""
+"Also, you may get a screen telling you to adjust the <emphasis>/etc/sane.d/"
+"\"name_of_your_SANE_backend\".conf file.</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:250
+msgid ""
+"Read those or other instructions you get carefully and if you don't know "
+"what to do, feel free to ask for help in the <link xlink:href=\"http://"
+"forums.mageia.org/en/\">forums</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/software-management.xml:5 en/software-management.xml:15
+msgid "Software Management"
+msgstr "Керування програмами"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/software-management.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"software-management-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"software-management.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"software-management-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"software-management.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/software-management.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several tools for software management. "
+"Click on a link below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/software-management.xml:17
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/software-management.xml:20
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"MageiaUpdate\"></xref><emphasis> = Update your system</"
+"emphasis>"
+msgstr "Поновити систему"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/software-management.xml:23
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"mgaapplet-config\"></xref>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"mgaapplet-config\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/software-management.xml:26
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"drakrpm-edit-media\"></xref><emphasis> = Configure media "
+"sources for install and update</emphasis>"
+msgstr "Налаштувати джерела встановлення і поновлення"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:8
+msgid "Install and configure a printer"
+msgstr "Встановлення і налаштовування принтера"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:11
+msgid "system-config-printer"
+msgstr "system-config-printer"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"system-"
+"config-printer-im1\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"system-config-printer.png\"/> "
+"</imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"system-"
+"config-printer-im1\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"system-config-printer.png\"/> "
+"</imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"Printing is managed on Mageia by a server named CUPS. It has its own <link "
+"ns2:title=\"CUPS\" ns2:href=\"http://localhost:631\">configuration "
+"interface</link> which is accessible via an Internet browser, but Mageia "
+"offers its own tool for installing printers called system-config-printer "
+"which is shared with other distributions such as Fedora, Mandriva, Ubuntu "
+"and openSUSE."
+msgstr ""
+"Завданнями з друку у Mageia керує сервер, який називається CUPS. У сервера є "
+"власний <link ns2:title=\"CUPS\" ns2:href=\"http://localhost:631\">інтерфейс "
+"налаштовування</link>, доступ до якого здійснюється за допомогою програми "
+"для перегляду сторінок інтернету. Втім, у Mageia передбачено і власний "
+"інструмент для встановлення і налаштовування драйверів принтерів, який "
+"називається system-config-printer і використовується також у інших "
+"дистрибутивах, зокрема Fedora, Mandriva, Ubuntu та openSUSE."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"You should enable the non-free repository before proceeding with the "
+"installation, because some drivers may only be available in this way."
+msgstr ""
+"Вам варто увімкнути доступ до сховищ пакунків, які не є вільними, (non-free) "
+"до того, як ви продовжите встановлення, оскільки пакунки деяких з драйверів "
+"зберігаються лише у цьому сховищі."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis>system-"
+"config-printer</emphasis>. The root password will be asked for."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis>system-config-printer</emphasis>. Для роботи з "
+"програмою доведеться вказати пароль адміністративного користувача (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"Printer installation is carried out in the <guilabel>Hardware</guilabel> "
+"section of the Mageia Control Centre. Select the <guilabel>Configure "
+"printing and scanning</guilabel> tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/"
+">."
+msgstr ""
+"Керувати встановленням драйверів до принтерів можна за допомогою розділу "
+"<guilabel>Обладнання</guilabel> Центру керування Mageia. Вам просто слід "
+"вибрати пункт <guilabel>Налаштувати друк і сканування</guilabel><placeholder "
+"type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:42
+msgid "MCC will ask for the installation two packages:"
+msgstr "MCC попросить у вас дозволу щодо встановлення двох пакунків:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:45
+msgid "task-printing-server"
+msgstr "task-printing-server"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:47
+msgid "task-printing-hp"
+msgstr "task-printing-hp"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"It is necessary to accept this installation to continue. Up to 230MB of "
+"dependencies are needed."
+msgstr ""
+"Вам слід погодитися на встановлення цих пакунків, щоб продовжити роботу з "
+"програмою. За залежностями може бути встановлено до 230 МБ даних."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"To add a printer, choose the \"Add\" printer button. The system will try to "
+"detect any printers and the ports available. The screenshot displays a "
+"printer connected to a parallel port. If a printer is detected, such as a "
+"printer on a USB port, it will be displayed on the first line.  The window "
+"will also attempt to configure a network printer."
+msgstr ""
+"Щоб додати принтер, натисніть кнопку <guilabel>Додати</guilabel>. Система "
+"спробує виявити всі доступні принтери і порти. На знімку показано пункт "
+"принтера, з’єднаного за допомогою USB. Якщо принтер буде виявлено, його буде "
+"показано у першому рядку списку. За допомогою цього ж вікна можна "
+"налаштувати мережевий принтер."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:61
+msgid "Automatically detected printer"
+msgstr "Принтер було виявлено автоматично"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:63
+msgid ""
+"This usually refers to USB printers. The utility automatically finds the "
+"name of the printer and displays it. Select the printer and then click \"Next"
+"\". If there is a known driver associated for the printer, it will be "
+"automatically installed. If there is more than one driver or no known "
+"drivers, a window will ask you to select or furnish one, as explained in the "
+"next paragraph. Continue with <xref linkend=\"terminate\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+"Зазвичай, це стосується принтерів, з’єднаних з комп’ютером за допомогою "
+"кабелю USB. Програма автоматично визначає назву принтера і показує її. "
+"Виберіть принтер і натисніть кнопку <guilabel>Далі</guilabel>. Якщо з "
+"принтером пов’язано відомий системі драйвер, його буде встановлено "
+"автоматично. Якщо можна скористатися одним з декількох драйверів або або "
+"системі не вдасться визначити найкращий драйвер, буде показано вікно з "
+"проханням вибрати драйвер, пояснення до якого наведено у наступному розділі. "
+"Продовжіть читання з розділу <xref linkend=\"terminate\"/>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:72
+msgid "No automatically detected printer"
+msgstr "Принтер не вдалося виявити автоматично"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:75
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"printer3.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"printer3.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:80
+msgid ""
+"When you select a port, the system loads a driver list and displays a window "
+"to select a driver. The choice can be made through one of the following "
+"options."
+msgstr ""
+"Після вибору порту система завантажить список драйверів і покаже вікно для "
+"вибору драйвера. Ви зможете вибрати один з наведених нижче варіантів."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:86
+msgid "Select printer from database"
+msgstr "вибрати принтер з бази даних"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:92
+msgid "provide PPD file"
+msgstr "надати PPD-файл"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:98
+msgid "search for a driver to download"
+msgstr "пошукати драйвер для звантаження"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:102
+msgid ""
+"By selecting from the database, the window suggests a printer manufacturer "
+"first, and then a device and a driver associated with it. If more than one "
+"driver is suggested, select one which is recommended, unless you have "
+"encountered some problems with that one before, in this case select the one "
+"which know to work."
+msgstr ""
+"Якщо буде вибрано варіант з пошуком у базі даних, програма спочатку "
+"запропонує вам вибрати назви компанії-виробника принтера, а потім назву "
+"пристрою та драйвер, пов’язаний з роботою цього пристрою. Якщо можна буде "
+"скористатися декількома драйверами, варто вибрати з них рекомендований. Якщо "
+"у вас виникають якісь проблеми з роботою рекомендованого драйвера, виберіть "
+"той з драйверів, який працює найкраще."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:110
+msgid "Complete the installation process"
+msgstr "Завершення процедури встановлення"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:112
+msgid ""
+"After the driver selection, a window requests some information which will "
+"allow the system to designate and discover the printer. The first line is "
+"the name under which the device will appear in applications in the list of "
+"available printers. The installer then suggests printing a test page. After "
+"this step, the printer is added and appears in the list of available "
+"printers."
+msgstr ""
+"Після вибору драйвера буде відкрито вікно введення даних, які допоможуть "
+"системі позначити і розпізнати принтер. У першому рядку слід ввести назву "
+"пристрою, яку буде показано у програмах у списку доступних принтерів. Після "
+"введення даних засіб встановлення драйвера запропонує надрукувати тестову "
+"сторінку. Щойно буде закрито сторінку тестового друку, запис принтера буде "
+"додано до списку доступних принтерів, ним можна буде користуватися."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:121
+msgid "Network printer"
+msgstr "Мережний принтер"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:123
+msgid ""
+"Network printers are printers that are attached directly to a wired or "
+"wireless network, that are attached to a printserver or that are attached to "
+"another workstation that serves as printserver."
+msgstr ""
+"Мережні принтери — це принтери, які безпосередньо з’єднано з дротовою або "
+"бездротовою мережею, сервером друку або іншою робочою станцією, яка працює у "
+"режимі сервера друку."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:128
+msgid ""
+"Often, it is better to configure the DHCP server to always associate a fixed "
+"IP address with the printer's MAC-address. Of course that should be the same "
+"as the IP address the printer of printserver is set to, if it has a fixed "
+"one."
+msgstr ""
+"Часто, варто налаштувати сервер DHCP на автоматичну прив’язку IP-адреси до "
+"MAC-принтера. Звичайно ж, якщо ця адреса є фіксованою, вона має збігатися з "
+"IP-адресою принтера, на яку налаштовано сервер друку."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:134
+msgid ""
+"The printer's Mac-address is a serial number given to the printer or "
+"printserver or computer it is attached to, that can be obtained from a "
+"configuration page printed by the printer or which may be written on a label "
+"on the printer or printserver. If your shared printer is attached to a "
+"Mageia system, you can run <emphasis><code>ifconfig</code></emphasis> on it "
+"as root to find the MAC-address. It is the sequence of numbers and letters "
+"after \"HWaddr\"."
+msgstr ""
+"MAC-адреса принтера — це серійний номер, який надається принтеру, серверу "
+"друку або комп’ютеру, з яким з’єднано принтер, і яку можна визначити за "
+"допомогою тестової сторінки, надрукованої самим принтером або наклейки на "
+"принтері або сервері друку. Якщо ваш принтер спільного користування з’єднано "
+"з системою Mageia, ви можете виконати від імені користувача root "
+"(адміністратора) команду <emphasis><code>ifconfig</code></emphasis>, щоб "
+"визначити цю MAC-адресу. MAC-адресою є послідовність цифр і літер після слова "
+"«HWaddr»."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:142
+msgid ""
+"You can add your network printer by choosing the protocol it uses to talk to "
+"your computer over the network. If you don't know which protocol to choose, "
+"you can try the <guilabel>Network Printer</guilabel> - <guilabel>Find "
+"Network Printer</guilabel> option in the <guilabel>Devices</guilabel> menu "
+"and give the IP address of the printer in the box on the right, where it "
+"says \"host\"."
+msgstr ""
+"Додати ваш мережний принтер можна так: виберіть протокол, який "
+"використовується принтером для обміну даними мережею з вашим комп’ютером. "
+"Якщо ви не знаєте, який протокол слід вибрати, ви можете спробувати "
+"скористатися пунктом <guilabel>Мережний принтер</guilabel> - <guilabel>Знайти "
+"мережний принтер</guilabel> у меню <guilabel>Пристрої</guilabel> і вказати "
+"IP-адресу принтера у полі праворуч, де вказано «вузол»."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:149
+msgid ""
+"If the tool recognises your printer or printserver, it will propose a "
+"protocol and a queue, but you can choose a more appropriate one from the "
+"list below it or give the correct queue name if it isn't in the list."
+msgstr ""
+"Якщо програмі вдасться виявити ваш принтер або сервер друку, вона запропонує "
+"вам визначені параметри протоколу та черги друку. Втім, ви можете вибрати "
+"потрібний вам варіант зі списку, розташованого нижче, або вказати належну "
+"назву черги друку, якщо відповідного пункту немає у списку."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:154
+msgid ""
+"Look in the documentation that came with your printer or printserver to find "
+"which protocol(s) it supports and for possible specific queue names."
+msgstr ""
+"Для визначення переліку протоколів, підтримку яких передбачено у сервері "
+"друку, та відповідних назв черг друку зверніться до документації з сервера "
+"друку, яким ви користуєтеся."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:160
+msgid "Network printing protocols"
+msgstr "Протоколи друку мережею"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:162
+msgid ""
+"One current technique is one developed by Hewlett-Packard and known as "
+"JetDirect. It allows access to a printer directly connected to the network "
+"via an Ethernet port. You must know the IP-address at which the printer is "
+"known on the network. This technique is also used inside some ADSL-routers "
+"which contain an USB port to connect the printer. In this case, the IP-"
+"address is that of the router. Note that the tool \"Hp Device manager\" can "
+"manage dynamically configured IP-adress, setting an URI like <emphasis>hp:/"
+"net/&lt;name-of-the-printer></emphasis> . In this case, fixed IP-adress is "
+"not required."
+msgstr ""
+"Однією з сучасних методик роботи з принтерами є розроблена Hewlett-Packard "
+"технологія під назвою JetDirect. За її допомогою можна здійснювати доступ до "
+"принтера, безпосередньо з’єднаного з мережею за допомогою порту Ethernet. "
+"Вам слід буде вказати IP-адресу, яка використовується принтером у мережі. Ця "
+"технологія використовується також у деяких ADSL-маршрутизаторах, у яких "
+"передбачено порт USB для під’єднання принтера. Якщо ви користуєтеся таким "
+"маршрутизатором, слід вказати його IP-адресу. Зауважте, що програма «Hp "
+"Device manager» може працювати з динамічно визначеною IP-адресою, визначаючи "
+"адресу файла пристрою як <emphasis>hp:/net/&lt;назва_принтера&gt;</emphasis> "
+". Для такого динамічного визначення фіксована IP-адреса не потрібна."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:172
+msgid ""
+"Choose the option <guilabel>AppSocket/HP JetDirect</guilabel> as the "
+"protocol and set the address in <guilabel>Host:</guilabel>, do not change "
+"the <guilabel>Port Number</guilabel>, unless you know that it needs to be "
+"changed. After the selection of the protocol, the selection of the driver is "
+"the same as above."
+msgstr ""
+"Виберіть пункт <guilabel>AppSocket/HP JetDirect</guilabel> у списку "
+"протоколів і вкажіть адресу у полі <guilabel>Вузол:</guilabel>. Не змінюйте "
+"вміст поля <guilabel>Номер порту</guilabel>, якщо не певні, що це слід "
+"зробити. Після вибору протоколу виконайте вибір драйвера відповідно до вже "
+"описаної процедури."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:179
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"printer5.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"printer5-uk.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:184
+msgid "The other protocols are:"
+msgstr "Серед інших можливих протоколів такі:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:188
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipp)</emphasis>: a printer which can "
+"be accessed on a TCP/IP network via the IPP protocol, for example a printer "
+"connected to a station using CUPS. This protocol may also be used also by "
+"some ADSL-routers."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis>Протокол друку інтернетом (ipp)</emphasis>: принтер, доступ до "
+"якого здійснюється у мережі TCP/IP за допомогою протоколу IPP. Наприклад, "
+"принтер, з’єднаний з робочою станцією, де використовується CUPS. Цей "
+"протокол може також використовуватися деякими маршрутизаторами ADSL."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:197
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (https): </emphasis>the same as ipp, "
+"but using http transport and with TLS secured protocol.  The port has to be "
+"defined. By default, the port 631 is used."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis>Протокол друку інтернетом (https)</emphasis>: те саме, що і ipp, "
+"але з використанням передавання даних HTTP з захистом TLS. Слід вказати порт. "
+"Типовим номером порту є 631."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:205
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipps): </emphasis>the same as ipp, but "
+"with TLS secured protocol."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis>Протокол друку інтренетом (ipps)</emphasis>: те саме, що і ipp, але "
+"із захистом TLS."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:212
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>LPD/LPR host or Printer</emphasis>: a printer which can be "
+"accessed on a TCP/IP network via the LPD protocol, for example a printer "
+"connected to a station using LPD."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis>Вузол або принтер LPD/LPR</emphasis>: принтер, доступ до якого "
+"здійснюється у мережі TCP/IP за допомогою протоколу LPD. Наприклад, принтер, "
+"з’єднаний з робочою станцією, на якій використовується LPD."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:220
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Windows printer via SAMBA</emphasis>: a printer connected to a "
+"station running Windows or a SMB server and shared."
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis>Принтер Windows через SAMBA</emphasis>: принтер у спільному "
+"користуванні, з’єднаний з робочою станцією під керуванням Windows або "
+"сервером SMB."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:226
+msgid ""
+"The URI can also be added directly. Here are some examples on how to form "
+"the URI:"
+msgstr ""
+"Крім того, адресу URI можна додати безпосередньо. Ось декілька прикладів "
+"форматування адреси URI:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:231
+msgid "Appsocket"
+msgstr "Appsocket"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:233
+msgid "<uri>socket://ip-address-or-hostname:port </uri>"
+msgstr "<uri>socket://ip-адреса-або-назва-вузла:порт</uri>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:237
+msgid "Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)"
+msgstr "Протокол друку Інтернетом (IPP)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:239
+msgid "<uri>ipp://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri>"
+msgstr "<uri>ipp://ip-адреса-або-назва-вузла:номер-порту/ресурс</uri>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:241
+msgid "<uri>http://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri>"
+msgstr "<uri>http://ip-адреса-або-назва-вузла:номер-порту/ресурс</uri>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:245
+msgid "Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol"
+msgstr "Протокол фонової служби лінійного принтера (LPD)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:247
+msgid "<uri>lpd://username@ip-address-or-hostname/queue</uri>"
+msgstr "<uri>lpd://користувач@ip-адреса-або-назва-вузла/черга</uri>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:251
+msgid ""
+"Additional information can be found in the <link ns2:href=\"http://www.cups."
+"org/documentation.php/doc-1.5/network.html\">CUPS documentation.</link>"
+msgstr ""
+"Додаткові відомості можна знайти у <link ns2:href=\"http://www.cups.org/"
+"documentation.php/doc-1.5/network.html\">документації до CUPS</link>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:256
+msgid "Device Properties"
+msgstr "Властивості пристрою"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:258
+msgid ""
+"You can access the properties of the device. The menu allows access to "
+"parameters for the CUPS server. By default a CUPS server is launched on your "
+"system, but you can specify a different one with the <guimenu>Server</"
+"guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Connect...</guimenuitem> menu, another window which "
+"gives access to the tuning of other specific parameters of the server, "
+"following <guimenu>Server</guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Settings.</guimenuitem>"
+msgstr ""
+"Ви можете переглянути і змінити параметри роботи пристрою. За допомогою меню "
+"можна отримати доступ до панелі налаштовування сервера CUPS. Типово, сервер "
+"CUPS запускається вашою операційною системою, але ви можете вибрати інший "
+"варіант за допомогою пункту меню <guimenu>Сервер</guimenu> → "
+"<guimenuitem>З’єднатись...</guimenuitem>. Інше вікно налаштовування "
+"параметрів сервера можна відкрити за допомогою пункту меню <guimenu>Сервер</"
+"guimenu> → <guimenuitem>Параметри</guimenuitem>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:268
+msgid "Troubleshoot"
+msgstr "Діагностика проблем"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:270
+msgid ""
+"You can find some information on occurring errors during printing by "
+"inspecting <filename>/var/log/cups/error_log</filename>"
+msgstr ""
+"Дані щодо помилок, які могли трапитися під час друку, можна знайти у файлі "
+"<filename>/var/log/cups/error_log</filename>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:273
+msgid ""
+"You can also access to a tool to diagnose problems using the <guimenu>Help</"
+"guimenu> | <guilabel>Troubleshoot</guilabel> menu."
+msgstr ""
+"Крім того, ви можете скористатися інструментом для діагностування і "
+"вирішення проблем. Доступ до нього можна отримати за допомогою пункту меню "
+"<guimenu>Довідка</guimenu> → <guilabel>Усунення проблем з друком</guilabel>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:280
+msgid ""
+"It is possible that some drivers for specific printers are not available in "
+"Mageia or are not functional. In this case, have a look at the <link ns2:"
+"href=\"http://openprinting.org/printers/\">openprinting</link> site to check "
+"if a driver for your device is available. If yes, check if the package is "
+"already present in Mageia and in this case install it manually. Then, redo "
+"the installation process to configure the printer. In all cases, report the "
+"problem in bugzilla or on the forum if you are comfortable with this tool "
+"and furnish the model and driver information and whether the printer works "
+"or not after installation. Here are some sources to find other up-to-date "
+"drivers or for more recent devices."
+msgstr ""
+"Драйверів, потрібних для роботи певних принтерів, немає у сховищах пакунків "
+"Mageia через ліцензійні проблеми або ці драйвери є непрацездатними. Якщо ви "
+"не можете знайти потрібного драйвера скористайтеся сторінкою системи <link "
+"ns2:href=\"http://openprinting.org/printers/\">openprinting</link>, щоб "
+"переконатися, чи існує драйвер взагалі. Якщо виявиться, що драйвер існує, "
+"перевірте, чи немає пакунка з цим драйвером у сховищах Mageia. Якщо такий "
+"пакунок буде виявлено, встановіть його вручну. Після встановлення драйвера "
+"повторіть процедуру встановлення і налаштовування принтера. Про проблеми "
+"повідомляйте за допомогою системи стеження за вадами дистрибутива або "
+"форуму. Також можна повідомляти про побажання щодо роботи програм "
+"налаштовування та про те, чи працює принтер після встановлення. Нижче "
+"наведено декілька адрес, за якими можна знайти найновіші версії драйверів "
+"або драйвери до найновіших пристроїв."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:292
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Brother printers</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Принтери Brother</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:294
+msgid ""
+"<link ns2:href=\"http://welcome.solutions.brother.com/bsc/public_s/id/linux/"
+"en/download_prn.html\">This page</link> give a list of drivers provided by "
+"Brother. Search the driver for your device, download the rpm(s) and install."
+msgstr ""
+"На <link ns2:href=\"http://welcome.solutions.brother.com/bsc/public_s/id/"
+"linux/en/download_prn.html\">цій сторінці</link> можна знайти список "
+"драйверів, які надаються Brother. Знайдіть драйвер до вашого пристрою, "
+"звантажте пакунки rpm з ним і встановіть ці пакунки."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:298
+msgid ""
+"You should install Brother drivers before running the configuration utility."
+msgstr ""
+"Драйвери Brother слід встановити до запуску програми для налаштовування "
+"системи друку."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:301
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Hewlett-Packard printers and All in one devices</"
+"emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Принтери та багатофункціональні пристрої "
+"Hewlett-Packard</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:304
+msgid ""
+"These devices use the hplip tool. It is installed automatically after the "
+"detection or the selection of the printer. You can find other information "
+"<link ns2:href=\"http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/index.html\">here</"
+"link>.  The tool \"HP Device Manager\" is available in the <guilabel>System</"
+"guilabel> menu. Also view <link ns2:href=\"http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-"
+"web/install/manual/hp_setup.html\">configuration</link> for the management "
+"of the printer."
+msgstr ""
+"Для цих пристроїв використовуються програми з комплекту hplip. Цей комплект "
+"програм буде автоматично встановлено після вибору принтера. Докладніші "
+"відомості щодо комплекту програм можна знайти <link ns2:href=\"http://"
+"hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/index.html\">тут</link>. Програму «HP Device "
+"Manager» (Керування пристроями HP) можна буде знайти у меню системи. Довідку "
+"щодо налаштовування принтера можна знайти <link ns2:href=\"http://"
+"hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/install/manual/hp_setup.html\">тут</link>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:311
+msgid ""
+"A HP All in one device must be installed as a printer and the scanner "
+"features will be added. Note that sometimes, the Xsane interface doesn't "
+"allow to scan films or slides (the lighting slid can't operate).  In this "
+"case, it is possible to scan, using the standalone mode, and save the "
+"picture on a memory card or USB stick inserted in the device.  Afterwards, "
+"open your favourite imaging software and load your picture from the memory "
+"card which is appeared in the /media folder."
+msgstr ""
+"Багатофункціональні пристрої HP потребують встановлення драйвера принтера, "
+"щоб працювати і у режимі сканера. Зауважте, що іноді у інтерфейсі програми "
+"для сканування не передбачено можливостей зі сканування плівок або слайдів "
+"(не працює модуль для слайдів). У цьому випадку можна скористатися для "
+"сканування автономним режимом зі збереженням зображення на картку пам’яті або "
+"на флеш-пристрій USB, вставлений до багатофункціонального пристрою. Після "
+"сканування отримані зображення можна перенести з носія даних до сховища "
+"вашого улюбленого програмного забезпечення для роботи з зображеннями."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:319
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Samsung colour printer</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Кольорові принтери Samsung</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:321
+msgid ""
+"For specific Samsung and Xerox colour printers, <link ns2:href=\"http://"
+"foo2qpdl.rkkda.com/\">this site provides drivers</link> for the QPDL "
+"protocol."
+msgstr ""
+"Драйвери для окремих кольорових принтерів Samsung і Xerox, що працюють за "
+"допомогою протоколу QPDL, можна <link ns2:href=\"http://foo2qpdl.rkkda.com/"
+"\">знайти тут</link>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:324
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Epson printers and scanners</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Принтери і сканери Epson</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:326
+msgid ""
+"Drivers for Epson printers are available from <link ns2:href=\"http://"
+"download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX\">this search page</"
+"link>. For the scanner part, you must install the \"iscan-data\" package "
+"first, then \"iscan\" (in this order). A iscan-plugin package can also be "
+"available and is to install. Choose the <emphasis>rpm</emphasis> packages "
+"according to your architecture."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:332
+msgid ""
+"It is possible that the iscan package will generate a warning about a "
+"conflict with sane. Users have reported that this warning can be ignored."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:336
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Canon printers</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Принтери Canon</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:338
+msgid ""
+"For Canon printers, it may be advisable to install a tool named turboprint "
+"<link ns2:href=\"http://www.turboprint.info/\">available here </link>."
+msgstr ""
+"Якщо ви працюєте з принтерами Canon, вам може стати у пригоді програма, яка "
+"називається turboprint. Відповідний (тестовий) пакунок можна отримати <link "
+"ns2:href=\"http://www.turboprint.info/\">тут</link>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:9
+msgid "Import Windows(TM) documents and settings"
+msgstr "Імпортування документів і параметрів Windows(TM)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:12
+msgid "transfugdrake"
+msgstr "transfugdrake"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"transfugdrake-im1\" revision=\"1\" fileref="
+"\"transfugdrake.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"transfugdrake-im1\" revision=\"1\" fileref="
+"\"transfugdrake.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">transfugdrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">transfugdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора "
+"(root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center "
+"labelled <guilabel>Import Windows(TM) documents and settings</guilabel>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"The tool allows an administrator to import the user documents and settings "
+"from a <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> 2000, <trademark "
+"class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> XP or <trademark class=\"registered"
+"\">Windows</trademark> <trademark>Vista</trademark> installation on the same "
+"computer as the Mageia installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"Please note that all the changes will be applied by transfugdrake "
+"immediately after pressing <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"After starting transfugdrake you will see the first wizard page with some "
+"explanation about the tool and import options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"As soon as you read and understand the instructions, press the "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. This should run a detection of "
+"<trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"When the detection step is complete you will see a page which allows you to "
+"choose accounts in <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> and "
+"Mageia for the import procedure. It is possible to choose other user account "
+"than yours own."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"transfugdrake1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"transfugdrake1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"Please take into account that due to migrate-assistant (the backend of "
+"transfugdrake) limitations <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</"
+"trademark> user account names with special symbols can be displayed "
+"incorrectly."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"Migration may take some time depending on the size of the document folders."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:67
+msgid ""
+"Some <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> applications "
+"(especially drivers) may create user accounts for different purposes. For "
+"example, NVidia drivers in <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</"
+"trademark>are updated using <emphasis>UpdatusUser</emphasis>. Please do not "
+"use such accounts for the import purposes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:74
+msgid ""
+"When you finished with the accounts selection press <guibutton>Next</"
+"guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method to import "
+"documents:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:79
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"transfugdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"transfugdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:84
+msgid ""
+"Transfugdrake is designed to import <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</"
+"trademark> data from <emphasis>My Documents</emphasis>, <emphasis>My Music</"
+"emphasis> and <emphasis>My Pictures</emphasis> folders. It is possible to "
+"skip import by selecting the appropriate item in this window."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:89
+msgid ""
+"When you finished with the document import method choosing press "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method "
+"to import bookmarks:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:94
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"transfugdrake3.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"transfugdrake3.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:99
+msgid ""
+"Transfugdrake can import <emphasis>Internet Explorer</emphasis> and "
+"<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> bookmarks into the bookmarks of Mageia "
+"<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> instance."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:103
+msgid ""
+"Choose the preferred import option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> "
+"button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:112
+msgid "The next page allows you to import desktop background:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:115
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"transfugdrake4.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"transfugdrake4.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:120
+msgid ""
+"Choose the preferred option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:123
+msgid ""
+"The last page of wizard shows some congratulation message. Just press the "
+"<guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:127
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"transfugdrake5.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"transfugdrake5.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/uninstall-linux.xml:10
+msgid "Mandrakelinux"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/uninstall-linux.xml:6
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"indexterm\" "
+"id=\"1\"/> If for any reason you want to uninstall <application>Mageia</"
+"application>, you can do so. The process of uninstalling "
+"<application>Mageia</application> is done in two steps:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/uninstall-linux.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"Removing partitions on your hard drive will inevitably result in the loss of "
+"all data stored on those partitions. Please make sure you've backed up all "
+"of the data you want to keep <emphasis>before</emphasis> proceeding."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/uninstall-linux.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"Delete all partitions related to <application>Mageia</application> on your "
+"hard drive (usually partitions hosting <acronym>ext3</acronym> file systems "
+"and the <systemitem>Swap</systemitem> partition)  and — optionally — replace "
+"them with a single partition using <application>DiskDrake</"
+"application><phrase condition=\"Starter\" xml:id=\"BIdNEW-uninstall-linux-"
+"ph1\" revision=\"1\"> (see <xref linkend=\"diskdrake\" />)</phrase>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><secondary>
+#: en/uninstall-linux.xml:48
+msgid "lilo"
+msgstr "lilo"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para><indexterm><primary>
+#: en/uninstall-linux.xml:50
+msgid "Master Boot Record"
+msgstr "Головний завантажувальний запис (MBR)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/uninstall-linux.xml:41
+msgid ""
+"Remove<placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"0\"/><placeholder type=\"indexterm"
+"\" id=\"1\"/><placeholder type=\"indexterm\" id=\"2\"/><placeholder type="
+"\"indexterm\" id=\"3\"/> the bootloader, <application>LILO</application> in "
+"this example, from the Master Boot Record (<acronym>MBR</acronym>). To do "
+"so, execute <command>lilo -U</command> in a console, as <literal>root</"
+"literal>. Doing this will not only uninstall <application>LILO</application> "
+"but will also restore the previous master boot record, if any."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/uninstall-linux.xml:59
+msgid ""
+"If you have a different boot loader, please refer to its documentation to "
+"determine how to regenerate the master boot record."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:11
+msgid "Users and Groups"
+msgstr "Користувачі і групи"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:13
+msgid "userdrake"
+msgstr "userdrake"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"userdrake-im1\" revision=\"1\" fileref="
+"\"userdrake.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"userdrake-im1\" revision=\"1\" fileref="
+"\"userdrake.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">userdrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">userdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center "
+"labelled \"Manage users on system\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"The tool allows an administrator to manage the users and the groups, this "
+"means to add or delete a user or group and to modify user and group settings "
+"(ID, shell, ...)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"When userdrake is opened, all the users existing on the system are listed in "
+"the <guibutton>Users</guibutton> tab, and all the groups in the "
+"<guibutton>Groups</guibutton> tab. Both tabs operate the same way."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:35
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "<guibutton>1 Add User</guibutton>"
+msgstr "&Додати користувача..."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:37
+msgid "This button opens a new window with all fields shown empty:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:40
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"userdrake1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"userdrake1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"The field <emphasis role=\"bold\">Full Name</emphasis> is intended for the "
+"entry of a family name and first name, but it is possible to write anything "
+"or nothing as well!"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:49
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Login</emphasis> is the only required field."
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Поле «Знайти»:</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"Setting a <emphasis role=\"bold\">Password</emphasis> is highly recommended. "
+"There is a little shield on the right, if it is red, the password is weak, "
+"too short or is too similar to the login name. You should use figures, lower "
+"and upper case characters, punctuation marks, etc. The shield will turn "
+"orange and then green as the password strength improves."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:59
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Confirm Password</emphasis> field is there to ensure "
+"you entered what you intended to."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Login Shell </emphasis>is a drop down list that "
+"allows you to change the shell used by the user you are adding, the options "
+"are Bash, Dash and Sh."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Create a private group for the user</emphasis>, if "
+"checked will automatically create a group with the same name and the new "
+"user as the only member (this may be edited)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:70
+msgid ""
+"The other options should be obvious. The new user is created immediately "
+"after you click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:73
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">2 Add Group</emphasis>"
+msgstr "Додати групу"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"You only need to enter the new group name, and if required, the specific "
+"group ID."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:78
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">3 Edit</emphasis> (a selected user)"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Режим пошуку:</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:80
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>User Data</guibutton>: Allows you to modify all the data given "
+"for the user at creation (the ID can't be changed)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:83
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Account Info</emphasis>:"
+msgstr "Інформація про користувачів"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:86
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"userdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"userdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:91
+msgid ""
+"The first option is for setting an expiration date for the account.  "
+"Connection is impossible after this date. This is useful for temporary "
+"accounts."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:95
+msgid ""
+"The second option is to lock the account, connection is impossible as long "
+"as the account is locked."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:98
+msgid "It is also possible to change the icon."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:100
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Password Info</emphasis>: Allows you to set an "
+"expiration date for the password, this forces the user to change his "
+"password periodically."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:105
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"userdrake3.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake3_uk.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:110
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group</emphasis>: Here you can select the groups "
+"that the user is a member of."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:114
+msgid ""
+"If you are modifying a connected user account, modifications will not be "
+"effective until his/her next login."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:118
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">4 Edit</emphasis> (with a group selected)"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Режим пошуку:</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:120
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group Data</emphasis>: Allows you to modify the "
+"group name."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:123
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group Users</emphasis>: Here you can select the "
+"users who are members of the group"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:126
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">5 Delete</emphasis>"
+msgstr "Вилучити"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:128
+msgid ""
+"Select a user or a group and click on <emphasis role=\"bold\">Delete</"
+"emphasis> to remove it. For a user, a window appears to ask if home "
+"directory and mailbox must also be deleted. If a private group has been "
+"created for the user, it will be deleted as well."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:133
+msgid "It is possible to delete a group which is not empty."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:136
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">6 Refresh</emphasis>"
+msgstr "Оновити"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:138
+msgid ""
+"The User database can be changed outside of Userdrake. Click on this icon to "
+"refresh the display."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:141
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">7 Guest Account</emphasis>"
+msgstr "Обліковий запис для &гостей:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:143
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">guest</emphasis> is a special account. It is "
+"intended to give somebody temporary access to the system with total "
+"security. Login is xguest, there is no password, and it is impossible to "
+"make modifications to the system from this account. The personal directories "
+"are deleted at the end of the session. This account is enabled by default, "
+"to disable it, click in the menu on<guimenu> Actions -> Uninstall guest "
+"account</guimenu>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:3
+msgid "Set up the graphical server"
+msgstr "Налаштовування графічного сервера"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:5
+msgid "XFdrake"
+msgstr "XFdrake"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:9
+#, fuzzy
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"XFdrake-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"XFdrake.png\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"rpmdrake-im1\" width=\"800\" revision="
+"\"1\" fileref=\"rpmdrake_uk.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" depth="
+"\"600\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis>XFdrake</"
+"emphasis> as normal user or <emphasis>drakx11</emphasis> as root. Mind the "
+"capital letters."
+msgstr ""
+"Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">XFdrake</emphasis> від імені звичайного користувача "
+"або команду <emphasis>drakx11</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root). "
+"Зверніть увагу на регістр використаних у командах літер."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">Hardware</emphasis>. Select <emphasis><guilabel>Set up the "
+"graphical server</guilabel></emphasis>.  <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id="
+"\"0\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+"Доступ до цієї програми можна отримати з Центру керування Mageia, сторінка "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Обладнання</emphasis>. Достатньо вибрати на цій "
+"сторінці пункт <emphasis><guilabel>Налаштувати графічний сервер</guilabel></"
+"emphasis>.  <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:23
+msgid "The buttons allow you to change the graphical configuration."
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою цих кнопок можна налаштувати параметри графічної підсистеми."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:25
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphic card</emphasis>:"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Графічна карта</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"The graphic card currently detected is displayed and the matching server "
+"configured. Click on this button to change to another server, for example "
+"one with a proprietary driver."
+msgstr ""
+"Тут показано виявлений програмою тип графічної картки та відповідний "
+"драйвер. Натисніть кнопку, щоб змінити драйвер на інший, наприклад драйвер з "
+"закритим кодом від виробника."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"The available servers are sorted under <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> by "
+"manufacturer in alphabetical order and then by model also in alphabetical "
+"order. The free drivers are sorted by alphabetical order under<guilabel> "
+"Xorg</guilabel>."
+msgstr ""
+"Доступні драйвери впорядковано у списку <guilabel>Виробник</guilabel> за "
+"виробником за абеткою, а потім за моделлю за абеткою. Вільні драйвери "
+"впорядковано за абеткою у списку <guilabel>Xorg</guilabel>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"In case of problems, <emphasis>Xorg - Vesa</emphasis> will work with most "
+"graphic cards and give you time to find and install the right driver while "
+"in your Desktop Environment."
+msgstr ""
+"Якщо у вас виникнуть проблеми, ви можете скористатися варіантом "
+"<emphasis>Xorg - Vesa</emphasis>, який працює для більшості карток і надасть "
+"вам змогу знайти і встановити належний драйвер, працюючи у вашому "
+"стільничному середовищі."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"If even Vesa doesn't work, choose <emphasis><guilabel>Xorg</guilabel> - "
+"<guilabel>fbdev</guilabel></emphasis>, which is used while installing "
+"Mageia, but doesn't allow you to change resolution or refresh rates."
+msgstr ""
+"Якщо навіть Vesa не працюватиме, виберіть варіант <emphasis><guilabel>Xorg</"
+"guilabel> - <guilabel>fbdev</guilabel></emphasis>, який використовується під "
+"час встановлення Mageia, ален не надає змоги змінювати роздільну здатність "
+"або частоту оновлення зображення."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"</note>If you made your choice for a free driver, you may be asked if you "
+"want to use a proprietary driver instead with more features (3D effects for "
+"example)."
+msgstr ""
+"</note>Якщо ви раніше вибрали вільний драйвер, система може запропонувати "
+"вам скористатися замість нього закритим драйвером, який має ширші можливості "
+"(наприклад, може використовувати можливості апаратного прискорення під час "
+"показу просторових об’єктів)."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:45
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Monitor:</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Монітор:</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"In the same way as above, the monitor currently detected is displayed and "
+"you can click on the button to change to another one. If the desired monitor "
+"isn't in the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> list, choose in the "
+"<guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list a monitor with the same features."
+msgstr ""
+"Поряд з цим пунктом буде показано визначений системою монітор. Натисніть "
+"кнопку, щоб змінити визначену назву на іншу. Якщо потрібного вам пункту "
+"немає у списку <guilabel>Виробник</guilabel>, ви можете вибрати аналогічний "
+"монітор у списку <guilabel>Загальний</guilabel>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:54
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Resolution:</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Роздільна здатність:</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"This button allows the choice of the resolution (number of pixels) and the "
+"colour depth (number of colours). It displays this screen:"
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою цієї кнопки можна вибрати роздільну здатність (кількість "
+"пікселів) та глибину кольорів (кількість кольорів у показаному зображенні). "
+"У відповідь на її натискання буде показано таке вікно:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><mediaobject>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:60
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"XFdrake1.png\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"rpmdrake1_uk.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:59
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>The image of the monitor in the "
+"middle gives a preview with the chosen configuration."
+msgstr ""
+"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>На зображенні монітора "
+"посередині вікна буде показано попередній перегляд поточних налаштувань."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"The first button shows the currently resolution, click to change for another "
+"one. The list gives all the possible choices according to the graphic card "
+"and the monitor, it is possible to click on <guilabel>Other</guilabel> to "
+"set other resolutions, but bear in mind that you can damage your monitor or "
+"select an uncomfortable setting."
+msgstr ""
+"На цій кнопці буде показано поточну роздільну здатність. Натисніть її, щоб "
+"змінити роздільну здатність. У списку буде показано можливі варіанти, що "
+"відповідають можливостям графічної картки та монітора. Ви можете вибрати "
+"пункт <guilabel>Інші</guilabel>, щоб вказати іншу роздільну здатність, але "
+"варто зважати на те, що довільне визначення параметрів роздільної здатності "
+"може призвести до пошкодження монітора або порушення комфортності роботи."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:72
+msgid ""
+"The second button shows the currently colour depth, click to change this for "
+"another one."
+msgstr ""
+"На другій кнопці буде показано поточну глибину кольорів. Натисніть кнопку, "
+"щоб змінити глибину кольорів на іншу."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"Depending on the chosen resolution, it may be necessary to logout and "
+"restart the graphical environment for the settings to take effect."
+msgstr ""
+"Залежно від вибраної роздільної здатності, може знадобитися вихід з "
+"графічного середовища і наступний вхід до нього для того, щоб змінені "
+"налаштовування набули чинності."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:83
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Test:</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Перевірити:</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:85
+msgid ""
+"Once the configuration done, it is recommended to do a test before clicking "
+"on OK because it is easier to modify the settings now than later if the "
+"graphical environment doesn't work."
+msgstr ""
+"Щойно налаштовування буде завершено, рекомендуємо вам перевірити їх до "
+"натискання кнопки <guibutton>Гаразд</guibutton>, оскільки простіше негайно "
+"змінити значення параметрів, ніж отримати непрацездатне графічне середовище."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:90
+msgid ""
+"In case of a non working graphical environment, type Alt+Ctrl+F2 to open a "
+"text environment, connect as root and type XFdrake (with the caps) to to use "
+"XFdrake's text version."
+msgstr ""
+"Якщо після налаштовування працездатність графічного середовище буде "
+"порушено, натисніть комбінацію клавіш Alt+Ctrl+F2, щоб відкрити текстову "
+"консоль, увійдіть до системи від імені адміністратора (root) і віддайте "
+"команду XFdrake (перші дві літери мають бути великими), щоб скористатися "
+"текстовою версією XFdrake."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:93
+msgid ""
+"</note>If the test fails, just wait until the end, if it works but you don't "
+"want to change after all, click on <guibutton>No</guibutton>, if everything "
+"is right, click on <guibutton role=\"bold\">OK</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+"</note>Якщо визначені параметри не спрацюють, просто дочекайтеся завершення "
+"перевірки, щоб повернутися до працездатних значень параметрів. Якщо значення "
+"спрацюють, але ви все одно хочете їх змінити, натисніть кнопку "
+"<guibutton>Ні</guibutton>. Якщо ж отримані результати вас задовольнять, "
+"натисніть кнопку <guibutton role=\"bold\">Гаразд</guibutton>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:97
+msgid "Options:"
+msgstr "Параметри:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:99
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Global options</guilabel>: If <emphasis>Disable Ctrl-Alt-"
+"Backspace</emphasis> is checked, it will no longer be possible to restart X "
+"server using Ctrl+Alt+Backspace keys."
+msgstr ""
+"У розділі <guilabel>Загальні параметри</guilabel> ви можете налаштувати "
+"систему на перезапуск графічного сервера за допомогою комбінації клавіш Ctrl"
+"+Alt+Backspace."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:103
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Graphic card options</guilabel>: Allows you to enable or disable "
+"three specific features depending on the graphic card."
+msgstr ""
+"За допомогою розділу <guilabel>Параметри графічної картки</guilabel> можна "
+"увімкнути або вимкнути три специфічних можливості, що залежать від типу "
+"графічної картки."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:107
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Graphical interface at startup</guilabel>: Most of the time, "
+"<emphasis>Automatically start the graphical interface (Xorg) upon booting</"
+"emphasis> is checked to make the boot switch to graphical mode, it may be "
+"unchecked for a server."
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>Графічний інтерфейс при завантаженні</guilabel>: здебільшого варто "
+"залишити варіант <emphasis>Автоматично стартувати графічну оболонку (Xorg) "
+"при завантаженні</emphasis>, щоб система завантажувалася у графічному "
+"режимі. Втім, ви можете зняти позначку, якщо завантаження має бути виконано "
+"без використання графічного сервера."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:112
+msgid ""
+"After a click on the <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> button, the system will ask "
+"you to confirm.  There is still time to cancel everything and keep the "
+"previous configuration, or to accept. In this case, you have to disconnect "
+"and reconnect to activate the new configuration."
+msgstr ""
+"У відповідь на натискання кнопки <guibutton>Вийти</guibutton> програма "
+"запропонує вам підтвердити вихід. Ви можете скасувати внесені зміни і "
+"зберегти попередні налаштування або підтвердити їх внесення. Якщо зміни буде "
+"підтверджено, вам доведеться вийти з облікового запису і знову увійти до "
+"нього, щоб задіяти внесені зміни."
+
+#~ msgid "It is often very wise to set this filter to All"
+#~ msgstr "Часто варто встановити для цього фільтра значення «Всі»"
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/MCC.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/MCC.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..dc7ca0ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/MCC.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="uk" version="5.0" xml:id="MCC">
+
+  <info>
+    <title>Центр керування Mageia</title>
+    <cover>
+	    <para>Текст та знімки вікон у цьому підручнику надаються вам відповідно до умов
+ліцензування CC BY-SA 3.0, <link
+ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>ю
+	    </para>
+	    <para>Цей підручник було створено за допомогою <link
+ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link>, розробленої компанією
+<link ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.
+	    </para>
+            <para>Підручник було написано охочими до цього користувачами у вільний від
+основної роботи час. Будь ласка, зверніться до <link
+ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">команди
+документування</link>, якщо хочете допомогти у покращенні цього підручника.</para>
+    </cover>
+  </info>
+
+  
+<xi:include href="mcc-intro.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="software-management.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-sharing.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-networkservices.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-hardware.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-network.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-system.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-networksharing.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-localdisks.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-security.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-boot.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</article>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/MageiaUpdate.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/MageiaUpdate.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3afb3f6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/MageiaUpdate.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="MageiaUpdate">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="MageiaUpdate-ti1">Поновлення пакунків з програмами</title>
+
+    <subtitle>MageiaUpdate or drakrpm-update</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="MageiaUpdate-im1"
+align="center" fileref="MageiaUpdate.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/XFdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/XFdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..69a866c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/XFdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="XFdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="XFdrake-ti1">Налаштовування графічного сервера</title>
+
+    <subtitle>XFdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="XFdrake-im1" revision="1" align="center"
+format="PNG" fileref="XFdrake.png" /> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Доступ до цієї програми можна отримати з Центру керування Mageia, сторінка
+<emphasis role="bold">Обладнання</emphasis>. Достатньо вибрати на цій
+сторінці пункт <emphasis><guilabel>Налаштувати графічний
+сервер</guilabel></emphasis>.  <footnote>
+        <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">XFdrake</emphasis> від імені звичайного користувача
+або команду <emphasis>drakx11</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root). Зверніть увагу на регістр використаних у командах літер.</para>
+      </footnote></para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para>За допомогою цих кнопок можна налаштувати параметри графічної підсистеми.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Графічна карта</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>Тут показано виявлений програмою тип графічної картки та відповідний
+драйвер. Натисніть кнопку, щоб змінити драйвер на інший, наприклад драйвер з
+закритим кодом від виробника.</para>
+
+  <para>Доступні драйвери впорядковано у списку <guilabel>Виробник</guilabel> за
+виробником за абеткою, а потім за моделлю за абеткою. Вільні драйвери
+впорядковано за абеткою у списку <guilabel>Xorg</guilabel>.</para>
+
+  <para><note>
+      <para>Якщо у вас виникнуть проблеми, ви можете скористатися варіантом
+<emphasis>Xorg - Vesa</emphasis>, який працює для більшості карток і надасть
+вам змогу знайти і встановити належний драйвер, працюючи у вашому
+стільничному середовищі.</para>
+<para> Якщо навіть Vesa не працюватиме, виберіть варіант
+<emphasis><guilabel>Xorg</guilabel> - <guilabel>fbdev</guilabel></emphasis>,
+який використовується під час встановлення Mageia, ален не надає змоги
+змінювати роздільну здатність або частоту оновлення зображення.</para>
+    </note>Якщо ви раніше вибрали вільний драйвер, система може запропонувати
+вам скористатися замість нього закритим драйвером, який має ширші можливості
+(наприклад, може використовувати можливості апаратного прискорення під час
+показу просторових об’єктів).</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Монітор:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>Поряд з цим пунктом буде показано визначений системою монітор. Натисніть
+кнопку, щоб змінити визначену назву на іншу. Якщо потрібного вам пункту
+немає у списку <guilabel>Виробник</guilabel>, ви можете вибрати аналогічний
+монітор у списку <guilabel>Загальний</guilabel>.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Роздільна здатність:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>За допомогою цієї кнопки можна вибрати роздільну здатність (кількість
+пікселів) та глибину кольорів (кількість кольорів у показаному
+зображенні). У відповідь на її натискання буде показано таке вікно:</para>
+
+  <para><mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="XFdrake1.png" /> </imageobject></mediaobject>На зображенні монітора посередині
+вікна буде показано попередній перегляд поточних налаштувань. </para>
+
+  <para>На цій кнопці буде показано поточну роздільну здатність. Натисніть її, щоб
+змінити роздільну здатність. У списку буде показано можливі варіанти, що
+відповідають можливостям графічної картки та монітора. Ви можете вибрати
+пункт <guilabel>Інші</guilabel>, щоб вказати іншу роздільну здатність, але
+варто зважати на те, що довільне визначення параметрів роздільної здатності
+може призвести до пошкодження монітора або порушення комфортності роботи.</para>
+
+  <para>На другій кнопці буде показано поточну глибину кольорів. Натисніть кнопку,
+щоб змінити глибину кольорів на іншу.</para>
+
+  <para><note>
+      <para>Залежно від вибраної роздільної здатності, може знадобитися вихід з
+графічного середовища і наступний вхід до нього для того, щоб змінені
+налаштовування набули чинності.
+      </para>
+    </note></para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Перевірити:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>Щойно налаштовування буде завершено, рекомендуємо вам перевірити їх до
+натискання кнопки <guibutton>Гаразд</guibutton>, оскільки простіше негайно
+змінити значення параметрів, ніж отримати непрацездатне графічне середовище.</para>
+
+  <para><note>
+      <para>Якщо після налаштовування працездатність графічного середовище буде
+порушено, натисніть комбінацію клавіш Alt+Ctrl+F2, щоб відкрити текстову
+консоль, увійдіть до системи від імені адміністратора (root) і віддайте
+команду XFdrake (перші дві літери мають бути великими), щоб скористатися
+текстовою версією XFdrake. </para>
+    </note>Якщо визначені параметри не спрацюють, просто дочекайтеся завершення
+перевірки, щоб повернутися до працездатних значень параметрів. Якщо значення
+спрацюють, але ви все одно хочете їх змінити, натисніть кнопку
+<guibutton>Ні</guibutton>. Якщо ж отримані результати вас задовольнять,
+натисніть кнопку <guibutton role="bold">Гаразд</guibutton>.</para>
+
+<orderedlist><title>Параметри:</title>
+	<listitem>
+   <para>У розділі <guilabel>Загальні параметри</guilabel> ви можете налаштувати
+систему на перезапуск графічного сервера за допомогою комбінації клавіш
+Ctrl+Alt+Backspace.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem>
+  <para>За допомогою розділу <guilabel>Параметри графічної картки</guilabel> можна
+увімкнути або вимкнути три специфічних можливості, що залежать від типу
+графічної картки.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+  <para><guilabel>Графічний інтерфейс при завантаженні</guilabel>: здебільшого варто
+залишити варіант <emphasis>Автоматично стартувати графічну оболонку (Xorg)
+при завантаженні</emphasis>, щоб система завантажувалася у графічному
+режимі. Втім, ви можете зняти позначку, якщо завантаження має бути виконано
+без використання графічного сервера.</para>
+  </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+
+  <para>У відповідь на натискання кнопки <guibutton>Вийти</guibutton> програма
+запропонує вам підтвердити вихід. Ви можете скасувати внесені зміни і
+зберегти попередні налаштування або підтвердити їх внесення. Якщо зміни буде
+підтверджено, вам доведеться вийти з облікового запису і знову увійти до
+нього, щоб задіяти внесені зміни.</para>
+
+  
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--dav.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--dav.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5289c6c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--dav.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="diskdrake--dav"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="diskdrake--dav-ti1">Доступ до дисків і каталогів WebDAV спільного використання</title>
+
+    <subtitle>diskdrake --dav</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="diskdrake--dav1.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake--dav-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">diskdrake --dav</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+  </footnote> is found in the Mageia
+Control Center, under the Network Sharing tab, labeled <guilabel>Configure
+WebDAV shares</guilabel>.</para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Вступ</title>
+
+ <para><link xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebDAV">WebDAV</link> is a
+protocol that allows to mount a web server's directory locally, so that it
+appears as a local directory. It is necessary that the remote machine run a
+WebDAV server. This is not the aim of this tool to configure the WebDAV
+server.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Creating a new entry</title>
+
+    <para>The first screen of the tool displays the already configured entries, if
+any, and a <guibutton>New</guibutton> button. Use it to create a new
+entry. Insert the server URL in the field of the new screen.</para>
+
+    <para>Then you get a screen with radio buttons to select some actions.  Continue
+with the action <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> by clicking
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton> after selecting the radio button, as the
+<guibutton>Server</guibutton> is already configured. You can however correct
+it, if needed.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--dav3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The content of the remote directory will be accessible through this mount
+point.</para>
+
+    <para>In the next step, give your user name and password. If you need some other
+options, you can give them in the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> screen.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--dav4.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The option <guibutton>Mount</guibutton> allows you to mount immediately the
+access.</para>
+
+    <para>After you accepted the configuration with the radio button
+<guibutton>Done</guibutton>, the first screen is displayed again and you new
+mount point is listed. After you choose <guibutton>Quit</guibutton>, you are
+asked to save or not the modifications in
+<emphasis>/etc/fstab</emphasis>. Choose this option if you want that the
+remote directory is available at each boot. If your configuration is for
+one-time usage, do not save it.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--fileshare.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--fileshare.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e63c3069
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--fileshare.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare-ti1">Налаштування доступу до розділів жорсткого диска</title>
+
+    <subtitle>diskdrake --fileshare</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--fileshare.png" revision="1"
+xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare-im1" align="center" format="PNG" />
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This simple tool<footnote><para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">diskdrake --fileshare</emphasis> від імені
+адміністратора (root).</para></footnote> allows you, the
+administrator, to allow users to share parts of their own /home
+subdirectories with other users of a same local network which may have
+computers running either Linux or Windows operating system.</para>
+
+  <para>Доступ до цього модуля можна отримати з Центру керування Mageia, вкладка
+«Локальні диски», пункт «Налаштувати доступ до розділів жорсткого диска».</para>
+
+  <para>Спочатку вам слід дати відповідь на питання: «<guilabel>Чи хотіли б ви
+дозволити користувачам надавати доступ до деяких з їхніх тек?</guilabel>»
+Позначте пункт <guibutton>Без спільного доступу</guibutton>, якщо доступ
+слід заборонити всім користувачам, пункт <guibutton>Дозволити всім
+користувачам</guibutton>, якщо доступ слід дозволити всім, і
+<guibutton>Спеціальний</guibutton>, якщо слід деяким користувачам заборонити
+доступ, а деяким надати. У останньому випадку, користувачі, які матимуть
+доступ до надання каталогів у спільне користування, мають належати до групи
+fileshare, яку буде автоматично створено системою. Додаткове питання щодо
+цього буде задано програмою на наступних кроках налаштовування.</para>
+
+  <para>Після натискання кнопки <guilabel>Гаразд</guilabel> з’явиться друга сторінка
+налаштувань, за допомогою якої ви зможете вибрати тип спільних ресурсів,
+<guibutton>NFS</guibutton> або <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>. Виберіть варіант
+<guibutton>NFS</guibutton>, якщо єдиною операційною системою у локальній
+мережі є Linux. Якщо ж у мережі є комп’ютери під керуванням  Windows,
+виберіть пункт <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>. Щойно вибір буде зроблено,
+натисніть кнопку <guibutton>Гаразд</guibutton>. Якщо це потрібно, система
+виконає встановлення необхідних для роботи з новими налаштуваннями пакунків.</para>
+
+  <para>Якщо не було вибрано варіант «Спеціальний», на цьому налаштовування буде
+завершено. Якщо ж ви вибрали варіант «Спеціальний», з’явиться додаткова
+сторінка, на якій програма попросить вас відкрити вікно програми
+Userdrake. За допомогою Userdrake ви зможете додати користувачів, яким буде
+дозволено надавати каталоги у спільне користування, до групи fileshare. На
+вкладці «Користувачі» натисніть пункт користувача, якого слід додати до цієї
+групи, потім натисніть кнопку <guimenuitem>Виправити</guimenuitem>, на
+вкладці «Групи». Позначте пункт групи fileshare і натисніть кнопку
+<guibutton>Гаразд</guibutton>. Докладніший опис програми Userdrake можна
+знайти на <link ns2:href="userdrake.xml">цій сторінці</link>.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Щоб внесені вами зміни набули чинності, після додавання нового користувача
+до групи fileshare, слід від’єднати комп’ютер від локальної мережі, а потім
+встановити з’єднання повторно.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para>Після цієї операції кожен з учасників групи fileshare зможе просто позначити
+у програмі для керування файлами свого графічного середовища пункт каталогу,
+дані з якого слід надати у спільне користування, і скористатися можливостями
+з надання спільного доступу цієї програми (такі можливості передбачено не у
+всіх програмах).</para>
+
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--nfs.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--nfs.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8076fa18
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--nfs.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="diskdrake--nfs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="diskdrake--nfs-ti1">Налаштування спільного доступу до дисків і тек NFS</title>
+
+    <subtitle>diskdrake --nfs</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="2" xml:id="diskdrake--nfs-im1"
+align="center" fileref="diskdrake--nfs.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para>.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Вступ</title>
+
+    <para>За допомогою цієї програми<footnote>
+        <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">diskdrake --nfs</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+      </footnote> ви можете
+оголосити деякі з каталогів спільного користування доступними всім
+користувачам комп’ютера. Використаний для цього протокол — NFS, протокол, що
+використовується у більшості систем Linux або Unix. Такі спільні каталоги
+стануть доступними для користувачів одразу після завантаження
+системи. Доступ до спільних каталогів можна здійснювати безпосередньо з
+робочого сеансу користувача за допомогою програм для керування файлами.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Процедура</title>
+
+    <para>Натисніть кнопку <guibutton>Пошук серверів</guibutton>, щоб отримати список
+серверів, які надають каталоги у спільне користування.</para>
+
+    <para>Click on the > symbol before the server name to display the list of the
+shared directories and select the directory you want to access.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject ns2:href="diskdrake--nfs2.png">
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Стане доступною кнопка <guibutton>Точка монтування</guibutton>, за допомогою
+якої ви зможете вказати точку монтування для каталогу.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject ns2:href="diskdrake--nfs3.png">
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Після вибору точки монтування ви можете наказати системі змонтувати
+каталог. Ви також можете перевірити або змінити параметри монтування за
+допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Параметри</guibutton>. Після монтування каталогу
+його можна демонтувати за допомогою тієї самої кнопки.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs4.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs5.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Після підтвердження налаштувань натисканням кнопки
+<guibutton>Зроблено</guibutton> система попросить вас відповісти на питання
+щодо того, чи бажаєте ви зберегти внесені зміни до /etc/fstab. Внесення змін
+до цього файла зробить каталог доступним одразу після завантаження системи,
+якщо локальна мережа є доступною. Після цього доступ до нового каталогу
+можна буде здійснювати за допомогою програми для керування файлами вашої
+системи, наприклад Dolphin.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs6.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--removable.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--removable.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..87b55d01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--removable.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="diskdrake--removable" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+	  <title xml:id="diskdrake--removable-ti1">Програма для запису КД/DVD</title><subtitle>diskdrake --removable</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="diskdrake--removable-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="diskdrake--removable.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+     <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance. </para>
+  <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">diskdrake --removable</emphasis> від імені
+адміністратора (root).</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--smb.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--smb.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7285faec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/diskdrake--smb.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="diskdrake--smb"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="diskdrake--smb-ti1">Налаштування спільного доступу до дисків і тек Windows (SMB)</title>
+
+    <subtitle>diskdrake --smb</subtitle>
+
+  </info>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Вступ</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">diskdrake --smb</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+      </footnote> allows you to declare which
+shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The
+protocol used for this is SMB which has been popularized on Windows(R)
+systems. The shared directory will be available directly at boot. Shared
+directories can be also accessed directly in a single session by a user with
+tools such as file browsers.</para>
+
+    <para>До запуску цієї програми варто визначити назви доступних серверів, наприклад
+за допомогою <xref linkend="drakhosts"/></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Процедура</title>
+
+    <para>Натисніть кнопку <guibutton>Пошук серверів</guibutton>, щоб отримати список
+серверів, які надають каталоги у спільне користування.</para>
+
+    <para>Натисніть пункт з назвою сервера, а потім кнопку «&gt;» перед цією назвою,
+щоб переглянути список спільних каталогів. Позначте пункт каталогу, до якого
+ви хочете отримати доступ.</para>
+
+    <para>Стане доступною кнопка <guibutton>Точка монтування</guibutton>, за допомогою
+якої ви зможете вказати точку монтування для каталогу.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Після вибору точки монтування ви можете наказати системі змонтувати каталог
+за допомогою кнопки <guimenu>Монтувати</guimenu>. Ви також можете перевірити
+або змінити параметри монтування за допомогою кнопки
+<guibutton>Параметри</guibutton>.</para>
+
+    <para>За допомогою вікна параметрів ви можете вказати ім’я користувача і пароль,
+яким мають користуватися ті, хто хоче з’єднатися з сервером SMB. Після
+монтування каталогу його можна демонтувати за допомогою тієї самої кнопки.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs5.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Після підтвердження налаштувань натисканням кнопки
+<guibutton>Зроблено</guibutton> система попросить вас відповісти на питання
+щодо того, чи бажаєте ви зберегти внесені зміни до /etc/fstab. Внесення змін
+до цього файла зробить каталог доступним одразу після завантаження системи,
+якщо локальна мережа є доступною. Після цього доступ до нового каталогу
+можна буде здійснювати за допомогою програми для керування файлами вашої
+системи, наприклад Dolphin.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb5.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drak3d.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drak3d.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b1283b9e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drak3d.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drak3d" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drak3d-ti1">Ефекти 3D-стільниці</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drak3d</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drak3d-im1" revision="1" align="center"
+fileref="drak3d.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Вступ</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drak3d</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para>
+      </footnote> lets you manage the 3D
+desktop effects on your operating system. 3D effects are turned off by
+default.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section annotations="center">
+    <title>Початкові зауваження</title>
+
+    <para>Щоб скористатися цим інструментом, вам слід встановити пакунок glxinfo. Якщо
+цей пакунок ще не було встановлено, система попросить вас встановити його до
+того, як запустить drak3d.</para>
+
+    <para>After starting drak3d, you will be presented with a menu window.  Here you
+can choose either <guilabel>No 3D Desktop Effects</guilabel> or
+<guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>. Compiz Fusion is part of a
+composite/window manager, which includes hardware-accelerated special
+effects for your desktop. Choose <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel> to turn
+it on.</para>
+
+    <para>If this is your first time using this program after a clean installation of
+Mageia, you will get a warning message telling you which packages need to be
+installed in order to use Compiz Fusion. Click on the
+<guibutton>Ok</guibutton> button to continue.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drak3d-im3"
+fileref="drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Щойно буде встановлено відповідні пакунки, ви побачите позначений пункт
+Compiz Fusion у меню drak3d. Втім, для користування новими ефектами слід
+вийти з облікового запису користувача і знову увійти до нього.</para>
+
+    <para>Після повторного входу до системи буде задіяно Compiz Fusion. Налаштувати
+Compiz Fusion можна за допомогою програми ccsm (CompizConfig Settings
+Manager).</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Вирішення проблем</title>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Після входу до системи не видно стільниці</title>
+
+      <para>Якщо після вмикання Compiz Fusion і спроби увійти до облікового запису, ви
+нічого не побачите, перезавантажте операційну систему, щоб повернутися до
+вікна входу до системи. У цьому вікні натисніть кнопку «Стільниця» і
+виберіть drak3d.</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+      <para>Після входу до системи, якщо ваш обліковий запис є адміністративним, система
+попросить вас ввести пароль до вашого облікового запису. Якщо ж ваш
+обліковий запис не є адміністративним, скористайтеся обліковим записом
+адміністратора. Після входу до адміністративного облікового запису ви
+зможете скасувати зміни у системі, які призвели до її непрацездатності.</para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakauth.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakauth.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0b7266bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakauth.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakauth" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakauth-ti1">Authentication</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakauth</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakauth.png" format="PNG"
+revision="1" xml:id="drakauth-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakauth</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para></footnote> enables you to modify the
+manner in which you can be recognized as user of the machine or on the net.</para>
+
+  <para>By default, information for your authentication is stored in a file on your
+computer. Modify it only if your network administrator invites you to do so
+and give information about that.</para>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakboot--boot.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakboot--boot.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ca83778c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakboot--boot.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakboot--boot">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakboot--boot-ti1">Set up boot system</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakboot --boot</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="drakboot--boot.png"
+align="center" xml:id="drakboot--boot-im1" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>this tool<footnote>
+      <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakboot --boot</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+    </footnote> allows you to configure the
+boot options (choice of the bootloader, set a password, the default boot,
+etc.)</para>
+
+  <para>It is found under the Boot tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up
+boot system".</para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Don't use this tool if you don't know exactly what you are doing.  Changing
+some settings may prevent your machine from booting again !</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para>In the first part, called <guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>, it is possible to
+choose which <guibutton>Bootloader to use</guibutton>, Grub or Lilo, and
+with a graphical or a text menu. It is just a question of taste, there are
+no other consequences. You can also set the <guibutton>Boot
+device</guibutton>, don't change anything here unless you are an expert. The
+boot device is where the bootloader is installed and any modification can
+prevent you machine from booting.</para>
+
+  <para>In the second part, called <guilabel>Main options</guilabel>, you can set
+the <guibutton>Delay before booting default image</guibutton>, in
+seconds. During this delay, grub or Lilo will display the list of available
+operating systems, prompting you to make your choice, if no selection is
+made, the bootloader will boot the default one once the delay elapses.</para>
+
+  <para>In the third and last part, called <guibutton>Security</guibutton>, it is
+possible to set a password.</para>
+
+  <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button gives some extra options.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Enable ACPI:</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for the
+power management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices, this was
+the method used before APM. Check this box if your hardware is ACPI
+compatible.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Enable SMP:</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>SMP stands for Symmetric Multi Processors, it's an architecture for
+multicore processors.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>If you have a processor with HyperThreading, Mageia will see it as a dual
+processor and enable SMP.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Enable APIC</guibutton> and <guibutton>Enable Local
+APIC:</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>APIC stands for Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. There are two
+components in the Intel APIC system, the local APIC (LAPIC) and the I/O
+APIC. This one routes the interrupts it receives them from peripheral buses
+to one or more local APICs that are in the processor. It is really useful
+for multi-processor systems. Some computers have problems with the APIC
+system which can cause freezes or incorrect device detection (error message
+"spurious 8259A interrupt: IRQ7"). In this case, disable APIC and/or Local
+APIC.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Clean /tmp at each boot:</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>If checked, this option will empty the /tmp directory at each boot,
+preventing it from become too big and clearing the trackings that don't need
+to be kept.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakboot1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> screen, you can see the list of all the
+available entries at boot time. The default one is asterisked. To change the
+order of the menu entries, click on the up or down arrows to move the
+selected item. If you click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> or
+<guibutton>Modify </guibutton>buttons, a new window appears to add a new
+entry in the Grub menu or to modify an existing one. You need to be familiar
+with Lilo or Grub to be able to use these tools.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakboot2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>The <guilabel>Label</guilabel> field is freeform, write here what you want
+to be displayed in the menu. It matches the Grub command "title". For
+example: Mageia3.</para>
+
+  <para>The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> field contains the kernel name. It matches
+the Grub command "kernel". For example /boot/vmlinuz.</para>
+
+  <para>The <guilabel>Root</guilabel> field contains the device name where the
+kernel is stored. It matches the Grub command "root". For example (hd0,1).</para>
+
+  <para>The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to
+the kernel at boot time.</para>
+
+  <para>If the box <guilabel>Default</guilabel> is checked, Grub will boot this
+entry by default.</para>
+
+  <para>In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to
+chose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>, an <guilabel>initrd</guilabel>
+file and a Network profile in the drop-down lists. (Complements needed)</para>
+
+  <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakboot --boot</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakboot.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakboot.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c9cfebb9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakboot.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakboot">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakboot-ti1">Set up autologin to automatically log in</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakboot</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakboot-im1"
+fileref="drakboot.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakboot</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para>
+    </footnote> allows you to automatically
+login the same user, in her/his desktop environment, without asking for any
+password. It's called autologin.  This is generally a good idea when there
+is only one user like to be using the machine.</para>
+
+  <para>It is found under the <emphasis role="bold">Boot</emphasis> tab in the
+Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up autologin to automatically log in".</para>
+
+  <para>The interface buttons are pretty obvious:</para>
+
+  <para>Check <guibutton>Launch the graphical environment when your system
+starts</guibutton>, if you want X Window System to be executed after the
+boot. If not, the system will start in text mode. Nevertheless, it will be
+possible to launch the graphic interface manually.</para>
+
+  <para>If the first box is checked, two other options are available, check either
+<guibutton>No, I don't want autologin</guibutton>, if you want the system to
+continue to ask for which user to connect (and password) or check
+<guibutton>Yes, I want autologin with this (user, desktop)</guibutton>, if
+needed. In this case, you also need to supply the <guilabel>Default
+username</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Default desktop</guilabel>.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakclock.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakclock.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4e7901c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakclock.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakclock">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakclock-ti1">Керування параметрами дати і часу</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakclock</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakclock.png" xml:id="drakclock-im1"
+revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakclock</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para>
+    </footnote> is found under the tab System
+in the Mageia Control Center labelled <guilabel>"Manage date and
+time"</guilabel>. In some desktop environments it is also available by a
+right click / Adjust date and Time ... on the clock in the system tray.</para>
+
+  <para>Це дуже проста програма.</para>
+
+  <para>У верхній лівій частині розташовано панель <emphasis
+role="bold">календаря</emphasis>. На наведеному вище знімку вікна показано
+дату: «квітень» (у верхньому лівому куті), 2013 (у верхньому правому куті),
+6 число (синім кольором), неділя. Вибрати місяць (або рік) можна натисканням
+маленьких стрілочок з боків від напису «квітень» (або «2013»). День можна
+вибрати натисканням відповідного пункту у календарі.</para>
+
+  <para>У нижній лівій частині вікна розташовано панель синхронізації <emphasis
+role="bold">Протокол Network Time</emphasis>. Ви можете підтримувати завжди
+точні покази годинника за допомогою синхронізації часу з сервером. Позначте
+пункт <guilabel>Увімкнути протокол Network Time</guilabel> і виберіть
+найближчий до вашого розташування сервер.</para>
+
+  <para>У правій частині вікна розташовано панель <emphasis
+role="bold">годинника</emphasis>. Якщо увімкнено NTP, зміна показаний на ній
+даних не має сенсу. У трьох полях годинника показано значення годин, хвилин
+та секунд (17, 8 і 13 на знімку вікна). Скористайтеся невеличкими
+стрілочками, щоб встановити на годиннику належне значення часу. Формат
+показу часу змінити не можна. Для зміни формату показу скористайтеся
+відповідною програмою з вашого стільничного середовища.</para>
+
+  <para>Нарешті, у правій нижній частині вікна можна вибрати часовий пояс. Для цього
+слід натиснути кнопку <guibutton>Змінити часовий пояс</guibutton> і вибрати
+відповідний пункт з наданого списку.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Even if it isn't possible to choose a date or time format in this tool, they
+will be displayed on your desktop in accordance with the localisation
+settings.</para>
+  </note>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakconnect--del.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakconnect--del.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..43ee6238
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakconnect--del.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakconnect--del" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakconnect--del-ti1">Remove a connection</title><subtitle>drakconnect --del</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakconnect--del-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakconnect--del.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Here, you can delete a network interface<footnote><para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakconnect --del</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para></footnote>.</para> 
+    <para>Click on the drop down menu, choose the one you want to remove and then
+click <emphasis>next</emphasis>.</para> 
+    <para>You'll see a message that the network interface has been deleted
+successfully.</para> 
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakconnect.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakconnect.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f57e9333
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakconnect.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,820 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakconnect">
+  <info annotations="simonnzg listened to Aicha by Khaled &amp; Faudel whilst editing this document.">
+    <title xml:id="drakconnect-ti1">Налаштовування нового мережевого інтерфейсу (LAN, ISDN, ADSL, ...)</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakconnect</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakconnect-im1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakconnect.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Вступ</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakconnect</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+      </footnote> allows to configure much of
+local network or Internet access. You have to know some information from
+your access provider or your network administrator.</para>
+
+    <para>Виберіть тип з’єднання, яке слід налаштувати. Тип визначається використаним
+вами обладнанням та параметрами роботи компанії-надавача послуг.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Нове дротове з’єднання (Ethernet)</title>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>У першому вікні буде показано список доступних інтерфейсів. Виберіть той з
+них, який слід налаштувати.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>На цьому кроці можна визначитися зі способом отримання комп’ютером
+IP-адреси: автоматично або вручну.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Автоматична IP</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Ethernet/Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід визначити, отримуватиме
+комп’ютер дані щодо серверів DNS з сервера DHCP чи ці дані буде вказано
+вручну, у спосіб описаний нижче. У другому випадку вам слід буде вказати
+адреси серверів DNS. Тут також можна вказати назву вузла комп’ютера. Якщо
+назву вузла вказано не буде, буде призначено типову назву,
+<literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>. Назву вузла може бути надано
+сервером DHCP, якщо буде позначено пункт <emphasis>Визначити назву вузла з
+адреси DHCP</emphasis>. Можливість визначення назви вузла передбачено не на
+всіх серверах DHCP. Якщо ви налаштовуєте ваш комп’ютер на отримання
+IP-адреси з домашнього маршрутизатора ADSL, навряд чи слід позначати цей
+пункт.</para>
+
+            <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakconnect5.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>За допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Додатково</guibutton> можна додатково вказати
+такі параметри:</para>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Домен пошуку (не можна вказати, якщо адреса надається сервером DHCP)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Клієнт DHCP</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Затримку DHCP</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Отримати сервери YP з DHCP (типово позначено): вкажіть сервер NIS</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Отримати сервери NTPD з DHCP (визначає сервер синхронізації часу)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>DHCP потрібна назва вузла. Позначайте цей пункт, лише якщо сервер DHCP
+вимагає від своїх клієнтів вказувати назву вузла до призначення
+IP-адреси. Цей пункт може не працювати на деяких серверах DHCP.</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Після підтвердження внесених змін наступні кроки налаштовування може бути
+виконано у загальний для всіх типів з’єднання спосіб: <xref
+linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Налаштування вручну</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Ethernet/Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід визначити, отримуватиме
+комп’ютер дані щодо серверів DNS з сервера DHCP чи ці дані буде вказано
+вручну, у спосіб описаний нижче. У другому випадку вам слід буде вказати
+адреси серверів DNS. Тут також можна вказати назву вузла комп’ютера. Якщо
+назву вузла вказано не буде, буде призначено типову назву,
+<literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>.</para>
+
+            <para>У будинкових мережах IP-адреси завжди мають такий формат:
+<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>. Маскою мережі є
+<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>. А дані щодо шлюзу та серверів DNS можна
+отримати з сайта вашого постачальника послуг.</para>
+
+            <para>За допомогою додаткових параметрів ви можете вказати <emphasis>Домен
+пошуку</emphasis>. Він має збігатися з назвою вашого вузла без першої
+частини, до крапки. Наприклад, якщо ваш комп’ютер має назву «comp1», а його
+повна назва у домені — «comp1.domivka.net», доменом пошуку має бути
+«domivka.net». Якщо вам точно не відомо, чи слід вказувати якийсь домен
+пошуку, його можна просто не вказувати. Знову ж таки, цей пункт не потрібен
+для налаштування домашнього ADSL.</para>
+
+            <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakconnect30.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Наступні кроки описано у розділі <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Нове супутникове з’єднання (DVB)</title>
+
+    <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Нове кабельне з’єднання за допомогою модема</title>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>У першому вікні буде показано список доступних інтерфейсів. Виберіть той з
+них, який слід налаштувати.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>На цьому кроці можна визначитися зі способом отримання комп’ютером
+IP-адреси: автоматично або вручну.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Вам слід вказати спосіб розпізнавання (автентифікації):</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Немає</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>BPALogin (потрібен для Telstra). У цьому випадку вам слід вказати ім’я
+користувача і пароль.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Автоматична IP</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Кабельний/Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід визначити,
+отримуватиме комп’ютер дані щодо серверів DNS з сервера DHCP чи ці дані буде
+вказано вручну, у спосіб описаний нижче. У другому випадку вам слід буде
+вказати адреси серверів DNS. Тут також можна вказати назву вузла
+комп’ютера. Якщо назву вузла вказано не буде, буде призначено типову назву,
+<literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>. Назву вузла може бути надано
+сервером DHCP, якщо буде позначено пункт <emphasis>Визначити назву вузла з
+адреси DHCP</emphasis>. Можливість визначення назви вузла передбачено не на
+всіх серверах DHCP. Якщо ви налаштовуєте ваш комп’ютер на отримання
+IP-адреси з домашнього маршрутизатора ADSL, навряд чи слід позначати цей
+пункт.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>За допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Додатково</guibutton> можна додатково вказати
+такі параметри:</para>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Домен пошуку (не можна вказати, якщо адреса надається сервером DHCP)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Клієнт DHCP</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Затримку DHCP</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Отримати сервери YP з DHCP (типово позначено): вкажіть сервер NIS</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Отримати сервери NTPD з DHCP (визначає сервер синхронізації часу)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>DHCP потрібна назва вузла. Позначайте цей пункт, лише якщо сервер DHCP
+вимагає від своїх клієнтів вказувати назву вузла до призначення
+IP-адреси. Цей пункт може не працювати на деяких серверах DHCP.</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Після підтвердження внесених змін наступні кроки налаштовування може бути
+виконано у загальний для всіх типів з’єднання спосіб: <xref
+linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Налаштування вручну</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Кабельний/Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід визначити,
+отримуватиме комп’ютер дані щодо серверів DNS з сервера DHCP чи ці дані буде
+вказано вручну, у спосіб описаний нижче. У другому випадку вам слід буде
+вказати адреси серверів DNS. Тут також можна вказати назву вузла
+комп’ютера. Якщо назву вузла вказано не буде, буде призначено типову назву,
+<literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>.</para>
+
+            <para>У будинкових мережах IP-адреси завжди мають такий формат:
+<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>. Маскою мережі є
+<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>. А дані щодо шлюзу та серверів DNS можна
+отримати з сайта вашого постачальника послуг.</para>
+
+            <para>За допомогою додаткових параметрів ви можете вказати <emphasis>Домен
+пошуку</emphasis>. Він має збігатися з назвою вашого вузла без першої
+частини, до крапки. Наприклад, якщо ваш комп’ютер має назву «comp1», а його
+повна назва у домені — «comp1.domivka.net», доменом пошуку має бути
+«domivka.net». Якщо вам точно не відомо, чи слід вказувати якийсь домен
+пошуку, його можна просто не вказувати. Знову ж таки, цей пункт не потрібен
+для налаштування домашнього з’єднання.</para>
+
+            <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakconnect32.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Наступні кроки описано у розділі <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Нове DSL-з’єднання</title>
+
+    <para><orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Якщо програмою буде виявлено інтерфейси мережі, вона запропонує вибрати один
+з них і налаштувати його.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Програма запропонує список компаній, які буде розподілено за
+країнами. Виберіть вашу компанію. Якщо її пункту немає у списку, виберіть
+пункт <guilabel>Не показано</guilabel>, а потім вкажіть параметри, надані
+вам постачальником послуг.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Виберіть один з доступних протоколів:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Протокол динамічної конфігурації клієнта (DHCP)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Налаштування TCP/IP вручну</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>PPP через ADSL (PPPoA)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>PPP через Ethernet (PPoE)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Протокол тунелю точка-до-точки (PPTP)</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Параметри доступу</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Рахунок користувача (ім'я користувача)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Пароль рахунка</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>(Додатково) Віртуальний шлях ID (VPI)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>(Додатково) Віртуальний коловий ID (VCI)</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Наступні кроки описано у розділі <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Нове ISDN-з’єднання</title>
+
+    <para><orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Програма-майстер попросить вас вказати пристрій для налаштовування:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Вибір вручну (Внутрішня плата ISDN)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Зовнішній модем ISDN</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Програма запропонує вам список обладнання, розподіленого за категоріями та
+виробниками. Виберіть вашу картку.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Виберіть один з доступних протоколів:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Протокол для всього іншого світу, окрім Європи (DHCP)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Європейський протокол (EDSS1)</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Програма запропонує список компаній, які буде розподілено за
+країнами. Виберіть вашу компанію. Якщо її пункту немає у списку, виберіть
+пункт <guilabel>Не показано</guilabel>, а потім вкажіть параметри, надані
+вам постачальником послуг. Після цього програма попросить вас вказати такі
+дані:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Назва зв'язку</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Номер телефону</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>ID користувача</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Пароль рахунка</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Метод автентифікації</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Після цього виберіть спосіб отримання IP-адреси: автоматично чи вручну. У
+другому випадку вкажіть IP-адресу і маску підмережі.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>На наступному кроці слід вибрати спосіб отримання адрес серверів DNS:
+автоматично чи вручну. У випадку визначення вручну вам слід вказати такі
+дані:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Назва домену</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Перший і другий сервер DNS</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Вкажіть, чи слід визначати назву вузла на основі IP-адреси. Цей пункт слід
+позначати, лише якщо вам відомо, що постачальником послуг передбачено таке
+визначення.</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>На наступному кроці слід вибрати спосіб, у який комп’ютер отримуватиме
+адресу шлюзу, автоматично чи вручну. Якщо ви виберете спосіб отримання
+вручну, вам доведеться вказати IP-адресу.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Наступні кроки описано у розділі <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Нове бездротове з’єднання (WiFi)</title>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>На першій сторінці буде показано список доступних інтерфейсів та пункт для
+драйвера Windows (ndiswrapper). Виберіть інтерфейс, який ви хочете
+налаштувати. Скористайтеся пунктом ndiswrapper, лише якщо інші способи
+налаштовування не призведуть до бажаних результатів.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>На цьому кроці ви зможете вибрати потрібну вам точку доступу зі списку
+точок, які було виявлено карткою.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Специфічний параметр для карток бездротового зв’язку:</para>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakconnect31.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Режим роботи:</para>
+
+            <variablelist>
+              <varlistentry>
+                <term>Керується</term>
+
+                <listitem>
+                  <para>Для отримання доступу до точки доступу (найпоширеніший випадок).</para>
+                </listitem>
+              </varlistentry>
+
+              <varlistentry>
+                <term>Ad-Hoc</term>
+
+                <listitem>
+                  <para>Для налаштовування безпосереднього з’єднання між комп’ютерами.</para>
+                </listitem>
+              </varlistentry>
+            </variablelist>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Мережне ім'я (ESSID)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Режим шифрування, залежить від параметрів налаштування вашої точки доступу.</para>
+
+            <variablelist>
+              <varlistentry>
+                <term>WPA/WPA2</term>
+
+                <listitem>
+                  <para>Варто використовувати саме цей режим шифрування, якщо його підтримку
+передбачено з боку вашого обладнання.</para>
+                </listitem>
+              </varlistentry>
+
+              <varlistentry>
+                <term>WEP</term>
+
+                <listitem>
+                  <para>На застарілому обладнанні можливе використання лише цього способу
+шифрування.</para>
+                </listitem>
+              </varlistentry>
+            </variablelist>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Ключ шифрування</para>
+
+            <para>Зазвичай надається разом з обладнанням, яке працює як точка доступу.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>На цьому кроці можна вибрати між автоматичним призначенням IP-адреси та
+визначенням її вручну.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Автоматична IP</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід визначити, отримуватиме
+комп’ютер дані щодо серверів DNS з сервера DHCP чи ці дані буде вказано
+вручну, у спосіб описаний нижче. У другому випадку вам слід буде вказати
+адреси серверів DNS. Тут також можна вказати назву вузла комп’ютера. Якщо
+назву вузла вказано не буде, буде призначено типову назву,
+<literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>. Назву вузла може бути надано
+сервером DHCP, якщо буде позначено пункт <emphasis>Визначити назву вузла з
+адреси DHCP</emphasis>.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>За допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Додатково</guibutton> можна додатково вказати
+такі параметри:</para>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Домен пошуку (не можна вказати, якщо адреса надається сервером DHCP)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Клієнт DHCP</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Затримку DHCP</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Отримати сервери YP з DHCP (типово позначено): вкажіть сервери NIS</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Отримати сервери NTPD з DHCP (визначає сервер синхронізації часу)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>DHCP потрібна назва вузла. Позначайте цей пункт, лише якщо сервер DHCP
+вимагає від своїх клієнтів вказувати назву вузла до призначення
+IP-адреси. Цей пункт може не працювати на деяких серверах DHCP.</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Після підтвердження налаштувань, визначених цим кроком, програма перейде до
+кроку, який є спільним для всіх налаштовувань з’єднань: <xref
+linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Налаштування вручну</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Параметри IP</emphasis>: вам слід вказати сервери DNS. Тут також
+можна вказати назву вузла комп’ютера. Якщо назву вузла не буде вказано,
+типово буде призначено назву <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal>.</para>
+
+            <para>У будинкових мережах IP-адреси завжди мають такий формат:
+<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>. Маскою мережі є
+<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>. А дані щодо шлюзу та серверів DNS можна
+отримати з сайта вашого постачальника послуг.</para>
+
+            <para>За допомогою додаткових параметрів ви можете вказати <emphasis>Домен
+пошуку</emphasis>. Він має збігатися з назвою вашого вузла без першої
+частини, до крапки.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Наступні кроки описано у розділі <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Нове з’єдднання GPRS/Edge/3G</title>
+
+    <para><orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Якщо програмою буде виявлено інтерфейси бездротової мережі, вона запропонує
+вибрати один з них і налаштувати його.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Програма попросить вас вказати PIN-код. Не вказуйте, якщо PIN не потрібен.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The wizard asks for network. If it is not detected, select the option
+<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel>.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Програма запропонує список компаній, які буде розподілено за
+країнами. Виберіть вашу компанію. Якщо її пункту немає у списку, виберіть
+пункт <guilabel>Не показано</guilabel>, а потім вкажіть параметри, надані
+вам постачальником послуг.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Вкажіть параметри доступу</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Назва точки доступу</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Рахунок користувача (ім'я користувача)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Пароль рахунка</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Наступні кроки описано у розділі <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Нове з’єднання комутованого доступу до мережі з Bluetooth</title>
+
+    <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Нове аналогове телефонне з’єднання за допомогою модема (POTS)</title>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Програма-майстер попросить вас вказати пристрій для налаштовування:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Вибір вручну</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Виявлене обладнання, якщо обладнання вдасться виявити.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Список запропонованих портів. Виберіть потрібний вам порт.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Якщо цей пакунок ще не встановлено, програма запропонує встановити пакунок
+<emphasis>kppp-provider</emphasis>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Вам буде запропоновано список постачальників послуг, поділений за
+країнами. Виберіть у ньому пункт вашого постачальника. Якщо відповідного
+пункту у списку не виявиться, виберіть пункт <guilabel>Не
+показано</guilabel>, а потім вкажіть значення параметрів, надані вашим
+постачальником послуг. Після цього програма попросить вас вказати параметри
+додзвону:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Назва з’єднання</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Номер телефону</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Ідентифікатор користувача</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Пароль</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Розпізнавання</emphasis>, виберіть один з таких варіантів:</para>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>PAP/CHAP</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>На основі скрипту</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>PAP</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>На основі термінала</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>CHAP</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Наступні кроки описано у розділі <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakconnect-end">
+    <title>Завершення налаштовування</title>
+
+    <para>На наступному кроці ви можете вказати такі параметри:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Дозволити користувачам керувати з’єднанням</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>З’єднуватися під час завантаження</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Увімкнути облік потоку даних</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Дозволити керування інтерфейсом за допомогою Network
+Manager</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>У випадку бездротового з’єднання буде показано додатковий пункт
+<emphasis>Дозволити роумінг точки доступу</emphasis>. За допомогою цього
+пункту можна надати комп’ютеру змогу автоматично перемикатися між точками
+доступу відповідно до потужності сигналу.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>За допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Додатково</guibutton> ви можете вказати:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Метрику (типово 10)</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>MTU</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Увімкнення мережі «вгарячу»</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Увімкнути тунелювання з IPv6 до IPv4</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>На останньому кроці можна визначити, чи буде виконано спробу з’єднатися
+негайно.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakconnect9.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakconsole.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakconsole.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8563c017
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakconsole.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakconsole">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakconsole-ti1">Відкриття консолі від імені адміністратора</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakconsole</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakconsole-im1" fileref="drakconsole.png"
+revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakconsole</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+    </footnote> gives you access to a console
+which is directly opened as root. We do not think that you need more
+information about that.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakdisk.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakdisk.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..068da86f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakdisk.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakdisk">
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!--
+ lebarhon 2012-08-30  Added some comments. Imho, the option button needs explanations -->
+<!--marja 2012-09-02 changed title to visible title for this tool in MCC -->
+<title xml:id="drakdisk-ti1">Керування розділами диска</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakdisk або diskdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakdiskBackup-im1" revision="1"
+fileref="drakdiskBackup.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakdisk</emphasis> або <emphasis
+role="bold">diskdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para>
+      </footnote> is very powerful, a tiny
+error or a cat jumping on your keyboard can lead to losing all data on a
+partition or even to erasing the entire hard disk. For that reason, you'll
+see the screen above on top of the tool screen. Click on
+<emphasis>Exit</emphasis> if you're not sure you want to continue.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para>Якщо у вашій системі декілька жорстких дисків, ви можете перемкнутися на
+потрібний вам жорсткий диск вибором відповідної вкладки (sda, sdb, sdc
+тощо).</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="drakdisk-im1"
+fileref="drakdisk.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Ви можете вибрати одну з багатьох дій, за допомогою яких ви можете
+скоригувати розподіл вашого диска відповідно до ваших потреб. Витирання
+всього жорсткого диска, поділ та об’єднання розділів, зміна розмірів
+розділів або файлової системи розділів, форматування або перегляд вмісту
+розділу: все це можна зробити за допомогою цієї програми. Кнопку
+<emphasis><guibutton>Очистити все</guibutton></emphasis> у нижній частині
+вікна призначено для витирання всього диска. Доступ до інших кнопок дій,
+розташованих праворуч, можна отримати після натискання розділу на картинці
+диска.</para>
+
+  <para>If the selected partition is mounted, like in the example below, you cannot
+choose to resize, format or delete it. To be able to do that the partition
+must be unmounted first.</para>
+
+  <para>Зміну розмірів розділу можна виконувати лише за рахунок правої межі розділу.</para>
+
+  <para>Щоб змінити тип розділу (наприклад, з ext3 на ext4), вам слід вилучити
+розділ, а потім повторно створити його з новим значенням типу. Якщо буде
+позначено порожню частину диска, у вікні програми з’явиться кнопка
+<guibutton role="bold">Створити</guibutton>.</para>
+
+  <para>Ви можете вибрати точку монтування, якої не існує. Якщо буде здійснено такий
+вибір, відповідну точку монтування буде створено.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakdiskMountedPartition-im1" revision="1"
+fileref="drakdiskMountedPartition.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Натискання кнопки <emphasis><guibutton>Перемкнути в режим
+експерта</guibutton></emphasis> надасть вам доступ до додаткових дій,
+зокрема визначення мітки розділу, як це показано на наведеному нижче знімку.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakdiskExpertUnmounted-im1"
+align="center" fileref="drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakedm.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakedm.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2d101245
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakedm.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakedm" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    
+
+    <!--2012-09-03 marja: changed title to the title of this screen in MCC -->
+<title xml:id="drakedm-ti1">Налаштування програми для керування сеансами</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakedm</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakedm-im1" revision="1" align="center"
+format="PNG" fileref="drakedm.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="drakedm-pa1">Here<footnote>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="drakedm-pa3">Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakedm</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para>
+    </footnote> you can choose which display
+manager to use to log into your desktop environment. Only the ones available
+on your system will be shown.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="drakedm-pa2">Більшість користувачів помітять лише те, що зміниться вікно входу до
+системи. Втім, різні менеджери реєстрації мають також і різні
+можливості. LXDM є найневибагливішим і найпростішим, KDM і GDM мають значно
+ширші можливості.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakfirewall.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakfirewall.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b0f44e60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakfirewall.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakfirewall" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakfirewall-ti1">Set up your personal firewall</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakfirewall</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="drakfirewall.png"
+align="center" xml:id="drakfirewall-im1" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakfirewall</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+    </footnote> is found under the Security
+tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up your personal
+firewall". it is the same tool in the first tab of "Configure system
+security, permissions and audit"</para>
+
+  <para>A basic firewall is installed by default with Mageia. All the incoming
+connections from the outside are blocked if they aren't authorised. In the
+first screen above, you can select the services for which outside connection
+attempts are accepted. For your security, uncheck the first box -
+<guilabel>Everything (no firewall)</guilabel> - unless you want to disable
+the firewall, and only check the needed services.</para>
+
+  <para>It is possible to manually enter the port numbers to open. Click on
+<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and a new window is opened. In the field
+<guilabel>Other ports</guilabel>, enter the needed ports following these
+examples :</para>
+
+  <para>80/tcp : open the port 80 tcp protocol</para>
+
+  <para>24000:24010/udp : open all the ports from 24000 to 24010 udp protocol</para>
+
+  <para>The listed ports should be separated by a space.</para>
+
+  <para>If the box <guilabel>Log firewall messages in system logs</guilabel> is
+checked, the firewall messages will be saved in system logs</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>If you don't host specific services (web or mail server, file sharing, ...)
+it is completely possible to have nothing checked at all, it is even
+recommended, it won't prevent you from connecting to the internet.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para>The next screen deals with the Interactive Firewall options. These feature
+allow you to be warned of connection attempts if at least the first box
+<guilabel>Use Interactive Firewall </guilabel>is checked. Check the second
+box to be warned if the ports are scanned (in order to find a failure
+somewhere and enter your machine). Each box from the third one onwards
+corresponds to a port you opened in the two first screens; in the screenshot
+below, there are two such boxes: SSH server and 80:150/tcp. Check them to be
+warned each time a connection is attempted on those ports.</para>
+
+  <para>These warning are given by alert popups through the network applet.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall4.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In the last screen, choose which network interfaces are connected to the
+Internet and must be protected. Once the OK button is clicked, the necessary
+packages are downloaded.</para>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para>If you don't know what to choose, have a look in MCC tab Network &amp;
+Internet, icon Set up a new network interface.</para>
+  </tip>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakfloppy-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakfloppy-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d06ae8d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakfloppy-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakfloppy">
+  <info>
+    <title revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-ti1">DrakFloppy: Creating a Boot Disk</title>
+
+    <abstract>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-pa1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-it1">
+          <primary>boot disk</primary>
+
+          <secondary>creating</secondary>
+        </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakfloppy-it2">
+          <primary>applications</primary>
+
+          <secondary>DrakFloppy</secondary>
+        </indexterm><inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="../drakfloppy-icon.png"
+width="2cm" format="PNG"></imagedata> </imageobject></inlinemediaobject>If you did not create
+a boot disk when you installed your system, this tool allows you to do
+so. This is also a rescue disk which allows you to perform maintenance tasks
+on your system in case of failure.</para>
+    </abstract>
+  </info>
+
+  <section condition="basic">
+    <info>
+      <title revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-ti3">Using DrakFloppy</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-pa6">If you want to create a <quote>default</quote> boot disk, that is, one that
+is based on your current kernel, all you have to do is insert a floppy disk
+in the appropriate floppy drive, select that drive from the
+<guilabel>Device</guilabel> pull-down list and press the
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button. A dialog will pop up and remind you that a
+diskette must be inserted in the drive. Accept it to create the disk.</para>
+
+    <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-pa7">If you want to customize your boot disk, you will have to hit the
+<guibutton>Preferences</guibutton> button and a window will pop up (see
+<xref linkend="drakfloppy-custom-disk"></xref>).</para>
+
+    <figure floatstyle="normal" xml:id="drakfloppy-custom-disk">
+<info>
+        <title xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-ti4">Making a Custom Boot Disk</title>
+      </info> <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="2" fileref="drakfloppy-custom-disk.png"
+align="center" width="11.5cm" format="PNG"
+xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure>
+
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-pa8">The window has two sections: one containing check boxes with options for
+<command>mkinitrd</command>, and another one with the modules
+<quote>tree</quote>. Select the modules you need to be added to the
+floppy. In this example, we want to use the <acronym>IDE</acronym> tape
+module and pre-load it. Use the <guibutton>Remove a module</guibutton>
+button to remove the currently selected module. When you are done
+customizing the boot disk press the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button, return
+to <application>drakfloppy</application>'s window and then proceed as
+indicated above to create the disk.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakfont.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakfont.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2f78da43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakfont.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakfont">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakfont-ti1">Manage, add and remove fonts. Import Windows(TM) fonts</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakfont</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakfont-im1"
+fileref="drakfont.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakfont</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para>
+    </footnote> is present in the Mageia
+Control Center under the <emphasis role="bold">System</emphasis> tab. It
+allows you to manage the fonts available on the computer. The main screen
+above shows:</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>the installed font names, styles and sizes.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>a preview of the selected font.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>some buttons explained here later.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Отримати шрифти з Windows: <emphasis/></emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>This button automatically adds the fonts found on the Windows partition. You
+must have Microsoft Windows installed.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Параметри:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>It allows you to specify the applications or devices (printers mostly)  able
+to use the fonts.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Вилучити:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>This button is to remove installed fonts and possibly save some place.  Be
+careful when removing fonts because it may have serious consequences on the
+documents that use them.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Імпортувати:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>Allows you to add fonts from a third party (CD, internet, ...). The
+supported formats are ttf, pfa, pfb, pcf, pfm and gsf. Click on the
+<emphasis role="bold">Import</emphasis> button and then on <emphasis
+role="bold">Add</emphasis>, a file manager pops up where you can select the
+fonts to install, click on <emphasis role="bold">Install</emphasis> when
+done. They are installed in the folder /usr/share/fonts.</para>
+
+  <para>If the newly installed (or removed) fonts doesn't appear in the Drakfont
+main screen, close and re open it to see the modifications.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakguard.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakguard.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f77f7d04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakguard.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakguard">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakguard-ti1">Parental Controls</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakguard</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakguard.png" revision="1"
+xml:id="drakguard-im1" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakguard</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para>
+    </footnote> is found in the Mageia
+Control Center, under the Security tab, labelled <guilabel>Parental
+Control</guilabel>. If you don't see this label, you have to install the
+drakguard package (not installed by default).</para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Presentation</title>
+
+    <para>Drakguard is an easy way to set up parental controls on your computer to
+restrict who can do what, and at which times of day. Drakguard has three
+useful capabilities:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>It restricts web access to named users to set times of day. It does this by
+controlling the shorewall firewall built into Mageia.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>It blocks execution of particular commands by named users so these users can
+only execute what you accept them to execute.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>It restricts access to websites, both manually defined through
+blacklists/whitelists, but also dynamically based on the content of the
+website. To achieve this Drakguard uses the leading opensource parental
+control blocker DansGuardian.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Configuring Parental controls</title>
+
+    <para><warning>
+        <para>If your computer contains hard drive partitions that are formatted in Ext2,
+Ext3, or ReiserFS format you will see a pop up offering to configure ACL on
+your partitions. ACL stands for Access Control Lists, and is a Linux kernel
+feature that allows access to individual files to be restricted to named
+users. ACL is built into Ext4 and Btrfs file systems, but must be enabled by
+an option in Ext2, Ext3, or Reiserfs partitions. If you select 'Yes' to this
+prompt drakguard will configure all your partitions to support ACL, and will
+then suggest you reboot.</para>
+      </warning><guibutton>Enable parental control</guibutton>: If checked, the parental
+control is enable and the Block programm tab</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Block all network traffic</guibutton>: If checked, all the
+websites are blocked, except the ones in the whitelist tab. Otherwise, all
+the websites are allowed, except the ones in the blacklist tab.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>User access</guibutton>: Users on the left hand side will have
+their access restricted according to the rules you define. Users on the
+right hand side have unrestricted access so adult users of the computer are
+not inconvenienced. Select an user in the left hand side and click
+on<guibutton> Add</guibutton> to add him/her as an allowed user.  Select an
+user in the right hand side and click on<guibutton> Remove</guibutton> to
+remove him/her from the allowed users.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Time control: </guibutton>If checked, internet access is allowed
+with restrictions between the <guilabel>Start</guilabel> time and
+<guilabel>End</guilabel> time. It is totally blocked outside these time
+window.<guibutton/></para>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Blacklist/Whitelist tab</title>
+
+      <para>Enter the website URL in the first field at the top and click on the
+<guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Block Programs Tab</title>
+
+      <para><guibutton>Block Defined Applications</guibutton>: Enables the use of ACL to
+restrict access to specific applications. Insert the path to the
+applications you wish to block.</para>
+
+      <para><guibutton>Unblock Users list</guibutton>: Users listed on the right hand
+side will not be subject to acl blocking.</para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakgw.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakgw.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e6e0fd3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakgw.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakgw" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakgw-ti1">Share the Internet connection with other local machines</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakgw</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakgw.png" format="PNG"
+revision="1" xml:id="drakgw-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakgw-principles">
+    <title>Principles</title>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakgw-net.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>This is useful when you have a
+computer (3) which has Internet (2) access and is connected also to a local
+network (1). You can use computer (3) as a gateway to give that access to
+other workstations (5) and (6) in the local network (1). For this, the
+gateway must have two interfaces; the first one such as an ethernet card
+must be connected to the local network, and the second one (4) connected to
+the Internet (2).</para>
+
+    <para>The first step is to verify that the network and the access to Internet are
+set up, as documented in <xref linkend="draknetcenter"/>.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakgw-wizard">
+    <title>Gateway wizard</title>
+
+    <para>The wizard<footnote>
+        <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakgw</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para>
+      </footnote> offers successive steps
+which are shown below:</para>
+
+    <para><itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>If the wizard does not detect at least two interfaces, it warns about this
+and asks to stop the network and configure the hardware.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>specify the interface used for the Internet connection. The wizard
+automatically suggests one of the interfaces, but you should verify that
+what is proposed is correct.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>specify which interface is used for the Lan access. The wizard also proposes
+one, check that this is correct.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The wizard proposes parameters for the Lan network, such as IP address, mask
+and domain name. Check that these parameters are compatible with the actual
+configuration. It is recommended that you accept these values.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>specify if the computer has to be used as a DNS server. If yes, the wizard
+will check that <code>bind</code> is installed.  Otherwise, you have to
+specify the address of a DNS server.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>specify if the computer is to be used as a DHCP server. If yes, the wizard
+will check that <code>dhcp-server</code> is installed and offer to configure
+it, with start and end addresses in the DHCP range.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>specify if the computer is to be used as a proxy server. If yes, the wizard
+will check that <code>squid</code> is installed and offer to configure it,
+with the address of the administrator (admin@mydomain.com), name of the
+proxy (myfirewall@mydomaincom), the port (3128) and the cache size (100 Mb).</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The last step allows you to check if the gateway machine is connected to
+printers and to share them.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist></para>
+
+    <para>You will be warned about the need to check the firewall if it is active.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakgw-configure">
+    <title>Configure the client</title>
+
+    <para>If you have configured the gateway machine with DHCP, you only need to
+specify in the network configuration tool that you get an address
+automatically (using DHCP). The parameters will be obtained when connecting
+to the network. This method is valid whatever operating system the client is
+using.</para>
+
+    <para>If you must manually specify the network parameters, you must in particular
+specify the gateway by entering the IP-address of the machine acting as the
+gateway.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakgw-stop">
+    <title>Stop connection sharing</title>
+
+    <para>If you want to stop sharing the connection on the Mageia computer, launch
+the tool. It will offer to reconfigure the connection or to stop the
+sharing.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakhosts.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakhosts.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b1eb9f13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakhosts.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakhosts" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakhosts-ti1">Hosts definitions</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakhosts</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="drakhosts.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="drakhosts-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>If some systems on your network grant you services, and have fixed
+IP-addresses, this tool<footnote>
+      <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakhosts</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para>
+    </footnote> allows to
+specify a name to access them more easily. Then you can use that name
+instead of the IP-address.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Додати</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>With this button, you add the name for a new system. You will get a window
+to specify the IP-address, the host name for the system, and optionally an
+alias which can be used in the same way that the name is.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Змінити</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>You can access the parameters of an entry previously defined. You get the
+same window.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakinvictus.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakinvictus.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..41c2e31a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakinvictus.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakinvictus" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakinvictus-ti1">Advanced setup for network interfaces and firewall</title><subtitle>drakinvictus</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakinvictus-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakinvictus.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+  <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakinvictus</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/draknetcenter.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draknetcenter.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5a418016
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draknetcenter.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="draknetcenter" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Written AM desmottes (lebarhon) 2012-08-31 
+Write some text means i can't do it :(
+What must we say about networks out of wired (Ethernet) and wireless (WI fi) like GPRS, bluetooth ? I can't write anything.
+-->
+<!-- -->
+<title xml:id="draknetcenter-ti1">Network Center</title>
+
+    <subtitle>draknetcenter</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="draknetcenter.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="draknetcenter-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">draknetcenter</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+    </footnote> is found under the Network
+&amp; Internet tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Network Center"</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Вступ</title>
+
+    <para>When this tool is launched, a window opens listing all the networks
+configured on the computer, whatever their type (wired, wireless, satellite,
+etc.). When clicking on one of them, three or four buttons appear, depending
+on the network type, to allow you to look after the network, change its
+settings or connect/disconnect. This tool isn't intended to create a
+network, for this see <guilabel>Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN,
+ADSL, ...)</guilabel> in the same MCC tab.</para>
+
+    <para>In the screenshot below, given as example, we can see two networks, the
+first one is wired and connected, recognizable by this icon <inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenterEthernet-on.png"/>
+</imageobject></inlinemediaobject> (this one is not connected<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenterEthernet-off.png"/>
+</imageobject></inlinemediaobject> ) and the second section shows wireless
+networks, not connected recognizable by this icon <inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenterWireless-off.png"/>
+</imageobject></inlinemediaobject> and this one <inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenterWireless-on.png"/>
+</imageobject></inlinemediaobject>if connected. For the other network types,
+the colour code is always the same, green if connected and red if not
+connected.</para>
+
+    <para>In the wireless part of the screen, you can also see all the detected
+networks, with the <guilabel>SSID</guilabel>, the <guilabel>Signal
+strengh</guilabel>, if they are encrypted (in red) or not (in green), and
+the <guilabel>Operating mode</guilabel>. Click on the chosen one and then
+either on <guibutton>Monitor</guibutton>, <guibutton>Configure</guibutton>
+or <guibutton>Connect</guibutton>. It is possible here to go from a network
+to another one. If a private network is selected, the Network Settings
+window (see below) will open and ask you for extra settings ( an encryption
+key in particular).</para>
+
+    <para>Click on <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> to update the screen.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The Monitor button</title>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter4.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>This button allows you to watch the network activity, downloads (toward the
+PC, in red) and uploads (toward the Internet, in green). The same screen is
+available by right clicking on the <guimenu>Internet icon in the system tray
+-> Monitor Network</guimenu>.</para>
+
+    <para>There is a tab for each network (here eth0 is the wired network, lo the
+local loopback and wlan0 the wireless network) and a tab connection which
+gives details about connection status.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>At the bottom of the window is a title <guilabel>Traffic
+accounting</guilabel>, we will look at that in the next section.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The Configure button</title>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">A - For a wired network</emphasis></para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>It is possible to change all the settings given during network
+creation. Most of the time, checking <guibutton>Automatic IP</guibutton>
+<guibutton>(BOOTP/DHCP)</guibutton> will do, but in case of problems, manual
+configuration may give better results.</para>
+
+    <para>For a residential network, the <guilabel>IP address</guilabel> always looks
+like 192.168.0.x, <guilabel>Netmask</guilabel> is 255.255.255.0, and the
+<guilabel>Gateway</guilabel> and <guilabel>DNS servers</guilabel> are
+available from your providers website.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Enable traffic accounting</guibutton> if checked this will count
+the traffic on a hourly, daily or monthly basis. The results are visible in
+the Network monitor detailed in the previous section. Once enabled, you may
+have to reconnect to the network.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Allow interface to be controlled by Network
+Manager:</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter5.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">B - For a wireless network</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>Only the item not already seen above are explained.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Режим роботи:</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>Select <guilabel>Managed</guilabel> if the connection is via an access
+point, there is an <emphasis role="bold">ESSID</emphasis> detected.  Select
+<guilabel>Ad-hoc</guilabel> if it is a peer to peer network. Select
+<emphasis role="bold">Master</emphasis> if your network card is used as the
+access point, your network card needs to support this mode.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Encryption mode and Encryption key:</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>If it is a private network, you need to know this settings.</para>
+
+    <para><guilabel>WEP</guilabel> uses a password and is weaker than WPA which uses a
+passphrase. <guilabel>WPA Pre-Shared Key</guilabel> is also called WPA
+personal or WPA home. <guilabel>WPA Enterprise</guilabel> is not often used
+in private networks.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Allow access point roaming</emphasis>:</para>
+
+    <para>Roaming is a technology which enables allows computer to change its access
+point while remaining connected to the network.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter6.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The Advanced Settings button</title>
+
+    <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter7.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/draknetprofile.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draknetprofile.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..34f4ace8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draknetprofile.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="draknetprofile" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draknetprofile-ti1">Manage different network profiles</title><subtitle>draknetprofile</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="draknetprofile-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="draknetprofile.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+   <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+  <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">draknetprofile</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/draknfs.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draknfs.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b519e071
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draknfs.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="draknfs" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draknfs-ti1">Share drives and directories using NFS</title>
+
+    <subtitle>draknfs</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs.png" format="PNG"
+revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Prerequisites</title>
+
+    <para>When the wizard<footnote>
+        <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">draknfs</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para>
+      </footnote> is launched for the
+first time, it may display the following message:</para>
+
+    <blockquote>
+      <para>The package nfs-utils needs to be installed. Do you want to install it?</para>
+    </blockquote>
+
+    <para>After completing the installation, a window with an empty list is displayed.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Main window</title>
+
+    <para>A list of directories which are shared is displayed. At this step, the list
+is empty. The <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button gives access to a
+configuration tool.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Modify entry</title>
+
+    <para>The configuration tool is labeled "Modify entry". It may be also launched
+with the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. The following parameters are
+available.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs4.png" format="PNG"
+revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im4"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>NFS Directory</title>
+
+      <para>Here you can specify which directory is to be shared. The
+<guibutton>Directory</guibutton> button gives access to a browser to choose
+it.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Host access</title>
+
+      <para>Here you can specify the hosts that are authorized to access the shared
+directory.</para>
+
+      <para>NFS clients may be specified in a number of ways:</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>single host</emphasis>: a host either by an abbreviated name
+recognized be the resolver, fully qualified domain name, or an IP address</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>netgroups</emphasis>: NIS netgroups may be given as @group.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>wildcards</emphasis>: machine names may contain the wildcard
+characters * and ?. For instance: *.cs.foo.edu matches all hosts in the
+domain cs.foo.edu.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>IP networks</emphasis>: you can also export directories to all
+hosts on an IP (sub-)network simultaneously. For example, either
+`/255.255.252.0' or `/22' appended to the network base address.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>User ID Mapping</title>
+
+      <para><emphasis>map root user as anonymous</emphasis>: maps requests from uid/gid
+0 to the anonymous uid/gid (root_squash). The root user from the client
+cannot read or write to the files on the server which are created by root on
+the server itself.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>allow real remote root access</emphasis>: turn off root
+squashing. This option is mainly useful for diskless clients
+(no_root_squash).</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>map all users to anonymous user</emphasis>: maps all uids and gids
+to the anonymous user (all_squash). Useful for NFS-exported public FTP
+directories, news spool directories, etc. The opposite option is no user UID
+mapping (no_all_squash), which is the default setting.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>anonuid and anongid</emphasis>: explicitly set the uid and gid of
+the anonymous account.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Advanced options</title>
+
+      <para><emphasis>Secured Connection</emphasis>: this option requires that requests
+originate on an internet port less than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024).  This option
+is on by default.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>Read-Only share</emphasis>: allow either only read or both read
+and write requests on this NFS volume. The default is to disallow any
+request which changes the filesystem. This can also be made explicit by
+using this option.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>Synchronous access</emphasis>: prevents the NFS server from
+violating the NFS protocol and to reply to requests before any changes made
+by these requests have been committed to stable storage (e.g. disc drive).</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>Subtree checking</emphasis>: enable subtree checking which can
+help improve security in some cases, but can decrease reliability. See
+exports(5) man page for more details.</para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Menu entries</title>
+
+    <para>So far the list is has at least one entry.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs5.png" format="PNG"
+revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im5"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>File|Write conf</title>
+
+      <para>Save the current configuration.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>NFS Server|Restart</title>
+
+      <para>The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>NFS Server|Reload</title>
+
+      <para>The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration
+files.</para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakproxy.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakproxy.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..474a5a42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakproxy.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakproxy"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakproxy-ti1">Proxy</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakproxy</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakproxy.png" format="PNG"
+revision="1" xml:id="drakproxy-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>If you have to use a proxy server to access to the internet, you can use
+this tool<footnote>
+      <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakproxy</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para>
+    </footnote> to configure it. Your net
+administrator will give you the information you need. You can also specify
+some services which can be accessed without the proxy by exception.</para>
+
+  <para>From Wikipedia, on 2012-09-24, article Proxy server: In computer networks, a
+proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application)  that acts as
+an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other
+servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service,
+such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a
+different server. The proxy server evaluates the request as a way to
+simplify and control their complexity.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakrpm-edit-media.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakrpm-edit-media.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c7eca406
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakrpm-edit-media.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,198 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-ti1">Налаштувати джерело</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakrpm-edit-media</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- 2013-01-06 marja - added Qilaq's and spturtle's corrections -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-im1"
+fileref="drakrpm-edit-media.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para><important>
+      <para>Одразу після встановлення системи слід додати записи джерел програмного
+забезпечення (їх також називають сховищами, носіями даних, дзеркалами). Це
+означає, що вам слід вибрати джерела програмного забезпечення, які буде
+використано для встановлення і оновлення пакунків та програм (див. кнопку
+<guilabel>Додати</guilabel>, описану нижче).</para>
+    </important><note>
+      <para>Ваша система може працювати на 32-бітовій апаратній архітектурі, яка
+називається у дистрибутиві i586, або 64-бітовій архітектурі, яка має назву
+x86_64. Вам слід вибрати сховища, які відповідають вашій системі та сховища
+для пакунків, які не залежать від архітектури (їх ще називають noarch).</para>
+    </note></para>
+
+  <para>Доступ до цієї програми можна отримати з Центру керування Mageia, сторінка
+<emphasis role="bold">Менеджер програм</emphasis><footnote>
+      <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakrpm-edit-media</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+    </footnote>.</para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-columns">Стовпчики</title>
+
+    <bridgehead>Стовпчик «Доступний»:</bridgehead>
+
+    <para>The checked media will be used to install new packages. Be cautious with
+some media such as Testing and Debug, they could make your system unusable.</para>
+
+    <bridgehead>Стовпчик «Поновлення»:</bridgehead>
+
+    <para>Якщо джерело буде використано для оновлення пакунків, його слід позначити у
+цьому стовпчику. Має бути позначено лише джерела зі словом «Update»
+(оновлення) у назві. З міркувань безпеки значення у цьому стовпчику не можна
+змінювати за допомогою цієї програми. Вам доведеться відкрити консоль і від
+імені адміністратора (root) віддати команду <emphasis
+role="bold">drakrpm-edit-media --expert</emphasis>.</para>
+
+    <bridgehead>Стовпчик «Джерело»:</bridgehead>
+
+    <para>Тут буде показано назву джерела. Офіційні сховища Mageia для остаточних
+випусків містять принаймні такі елементи:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Core</emphasis> which contains most programs available
+supported by Mageia.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Nonfree</emphasis> which contains some programs which
+are not free</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Tainted</emphasis> free software for which there might
+be patent claims in some countries.</para>
+
+        <para>Кожен запис джерела містить 4 підрозділи:</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Release</emphasis> the packages as of the day the this
+version of Mageia was released.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Updates</emphasis> the packages updated since release
+due to security or bug concerns. Everyone should have this medium enabled,
+even with a very slow internet connection.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Backports</emphasis> some packages of new versions
+backported from Cauldron (the next version under development).</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Testing</emphasis> which is used for temporary tests
+of new updates, to allow the bug reporters and the QA team to validate the
+corrections.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-right-button">Кнопки на панелі праворуч</title>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Вилучити:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>Щоб вилучити джерело, наведіть на його пункт вказівник миші і клацніть лівою
+кнопкою, потім натисніть цю кнопку. Іноді варто вилучити пункт носія, який
+було використано для встановлення системи (компакт-диск або DVD) оскільки
+всі пакунки з цього носія можна встановити з офіційного джерела основних
+пакунків (Core) відповідного випуску.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Виправити:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>Надає вам змогу вносити зміни до параметрів позначеного запису джерела
+(адресу, програму для звантаження і параметри проксі-сервера).</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Додати:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>Кнопка для додавання офіційних сховищ з інтернету. У офіційних сховищах
+містяться лише надійні і добре перевірені пакунки. Після натискання кнопки
+<guibutton>Додати</guibutton> програма відкриє контекстне вікно, за
+допомогою якого ви зможете вибрати набір джерел для встановлення: «Тільки
+джерела з поновленнями» або «Повний набір джерел». Перший варіант є
+мінімалістичним, другий — найкориснішим.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Кнопки зі стрілками вгору і вниз:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>Ці кнопки призначено для впорядковування списку. Під час пошуків пакунків
+програмою Drakrpm виконується завантаження списку сховищ у показаному
+порядку, пакунок встановлюється зі сховища, яке стоятиме вище у списку (якщо
+номер випуску пакунка є однаковим в усіх сховищах; якщо номер буде різним,
+програма встановить пакунок з найсвіжішого випуску). Отже, якщо можна,
+розташовуйте сховища з найшвидшим доступом на початку списку.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-menu">Меню програми</title>
+
+    <para><guimenu>File -> Update:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>У відповідь на вибір цього пункту буде відкрито вікно зі списком
+джерел. Виберіть ті з них, дані яких слід оновити, і натисніть кнопку
+<guibutton>Оновити</guibutton>.</para>
+
+    <para><guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>Suppose you aren't happy with the actual mirror, because for example it's
+too slow or often unavailable, you can choose another mirror. Select all the
+actual media and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to take them
+out. Click on <guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror</guimenu>, choose
+between update only or the full set (if you do not know, choose the
+<guibutton>Full set of sources</guibutton>) and accept the contact by
+clicking on <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>. This window opens:</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakrpmEditMedia2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>You can see, on the left, a list of countries, choose yours or one very
+close by clicking on the > symbol, this will display all the available
+mirrors in that country. Select one and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+
+    <para><guimenu>File -> Add a custom medium:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>Ви можете виконати встановлення з нового джерела (наприклад, зі стороннього
+сховища спільноти), яке не підтримується офіційно спільнотою Mageia. У
+відповідь на вибір цього пункту меню буде показано нове вікно:</para>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>Виберіть тип джерела, вкажіть
+коротку назву, яка добре описує відповідне сховище, і додайте адресу (або
+шлях до джерела, залежно від його типу).</para>
+
+    <para><guimenu>Options -> Global options:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>За допомогою цього пункту меню ви можете визначити, коли слід
+<guilabel>Перевіряти пакунки, які встановлюються</guilabel> (завжди або
+ніколи), визначити програму для отримання пакунків (curl, wget або aria2) і
+вказати правила отримання даних щодо пакунків (на запит (типовий варіант),
+тільки поновлення, завжди або ніколи).</para>
+
+    <para><guimenu>Options -> Manage keys:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>З метою забезпечення кращої безпеки для розпізнавання джерела
+використовуються цифрові ключі. Для кожного з джерел можна дозволити або
+заборонити використання ключа. У вікні, яке буде відкрито, виберіть джерело
+і натисніть кнопку <guibutton>Додати</guibutton>, щоб уможливити
+використання нового ключа, або позначте пункт ключа і натисніть кнопку
+<guibutton>Вилучити</guibutton>, щоб заборонити його використання.</para>
+
+    <para><warning>
+        <para>Будьте обережними, як і з усіма іншими питаннями, пов’язаними з безпекою.</para>
+      </warning><guimenu>Options -> Proxy:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>Якщо для доступу до інтернету з вашого комп’ютера слід користуватися
+проксі-сервером, ви можете вказати параметри його роботи. Вам слід вказати
+<guibutton>Назву проксі</guibutton> і, якщо потрібно, вказати
+<guilabel>Користувача</guilabel> і <guilabel>Пароль</guilabel>.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakrpm-update.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakrpm-update.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..320d5c9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakrpm-update.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakrpm-update" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakrpm-update-ti1">Software Packages Update (OLD)</title><subtitle>drakrpm-update</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+    <para>DON'T USE THIS FILE, USE MageiaUpdate.xml INSTEAD!</para> 
+
+  
+    
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksambashare.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksambashare.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f356c963
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksambashare.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,207 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="draksambashare"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draksambashare-ti1">Share directories and drives with Samba</title>
+
+    <subtitle>draksambashare</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Вступ</title>
+
+    <para>Samba is a protocol used in different Operating Systems to share some
+resources like directories or printers. This tool allows you to configure
+the machine as a Samba server using the protocol SMB/CIFS. This protocol is
+also used by Windows(R) and workstations with this OS can access the
+resources of the Samba server.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Preparation</title>
+
+    <para>To be accessed from other workstations, the server has to have a fixed IP
+address. This can be specified directly on the server, for example with
+<xref linkend="draknetcenter-ti1"/></para>
+
+    <para>, or at the DHCP server which identifies the station with its MAC-address
+and give it always the same address. The firewall has also to allow the
+incoming requests to the Samba server.</para>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Wizard - Standalone server</title>
+
+    <para>At the first run, the tools <footnote>
+        <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">draksambashare</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+      </footnote> checks if
+needed packages are installed and proposes to install them if they are not
+yet present. Then the wizard to configure the Samba server is launched.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare0.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare0-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>In the next window the Standalone server configuration option is already
+selected.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare1.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare1-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Then specify the name of the workgroup. This name should be the same for the
+access to the shared resources.</para>
+
+    <para>The netbios name is the name which will be used to designate the server on
+the network.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare2.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare2-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Choose the security mode:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>user</guilabel>: the client must be authorized to access the
+resource</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>share</guilabel>: the client authenticates itself separately for
+each share</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>You can specify which hosts are allowed to access the resources, with IP
+addess or host name.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare3.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare3-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Specify the server banner. The banner is the way this server will be
+described in the Windows workstations.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare4.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare-im4"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The place where Samba can log information can be specified at the next step.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare5.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare-im5"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The wizard displays a list of the chosen parameters before you accept the
+configuration. When accepted, the configuration will be written in
+<code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare6.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare-im6"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Wizard - Primary domain controller</title>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draksambashare13.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>If the "Primary domain controller"
+option is selected, the wizard asks for indication if Wins is to support or
+not and to provide admin users names. The following steps are then the same
+as for standalone server, except you can choose also the security mode:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>domain</guilabel>: provides a mechanism for storing all user and
+group accounts in a central, shared, account repository.  The centralized
+account repository is shared between (security)  controllers.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Declare a directory to share</title>
+
+    <para>With the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, we get:</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare15.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare-im7"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>A new entry is thus added. It can be modified with the
+<guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. Options can be edited, such as whether
+the directory is visible to the public, writable or browseable.  The share
+name can not be modified.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare16.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare-im8"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Menu entries</title>
+
+    <para>When the list has at least one entry, menu entries can be used.</para>
+
+    <formalpara>
+      <title>File|Write conf</title>
+
+      <para>Save the current configuration in <code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>.</para>
+    </formalpara>
+
+    <formalpara>
+      <title>Samba server|Configure</title>
+
+      <para>The wizard can be run again with this command.</para>
+    </formalpara>
+
+    <formalpara>
+      <title>Samba server|Restart</title>
+
+      <para>The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files.</para>
+    </formalpara>
+
+    <formalpara>
+      <title>Samba Server|Reload</title>
+
+      <para>The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration
+files.</para>
+    </formalpara>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Printers share</title>
+
+    <para>Samba also allows you to share printers.</para>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draksambashare17.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Samba users</title>
+
+    <para>In this tab, you can add users who are allowed to access the shared
+resources when authentication is required. You can add users from <xref
+linkend="userdrake-ti1"/><mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="draksambashare18.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksec.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksec.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..90bab9c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksec.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="draksec">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draksec-ti1">Configure authentication for Mageia tools</title>
+
+    <subtitle>draksec</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="draksec-im1" revision="1" align="center"
+format="PNG" fileref="draksec.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">draksec</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para>
+    </footnote> is present in the Mageia
+Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Security</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>It allows to give the regular users the needed rights to accomplish tasks
+usually done by the administrator.</para>
+
+  <para>Most of the tools available in the Mageia Control Center are displayed in
+the left side of the window (see the screenshot above) and for each tool, a
+drop down list gives the choice between:</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>No password: The tool is launched without asking any password.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>User password: The user password is asked before the tool launching.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Root password: the root password is asked before the tool launching</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <para>The default values depend of the chosen security level. See in the same MCC
+tab, the tool "Configure system security, permissions and audit".</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksnapshot-config.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksnapshot-config.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f6f2dd55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksnapshot-config.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xml:id="draksnapshot-config" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draksnapshot-config-ti1">Snapshots</title><subtitle>draksnapshot-config</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="draksnapshot-config-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="draksnapshot-config.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>If you see the screen above when starting this tool, please close it. This
+crash has been reported many times. </para>
+
+  <para>You can read more about the problem in this bug report: <link
+xlink:href="https://bugs.mageia.org/show_bug.cgi?id=3032">bug 3032</link></para>
+
+  
+    <para>We shall replace the screenshot with a correct one of the tool, and fill
+this page with instructions about how to use it, when the bug is fixed.</para> 
+    
+  <!--  <para>
+Write some text.</para> 
+    <para>Write some text.</para> -->
+<para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">draksnapshot-config</emphasis> від імені
+адміністратора (root).</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksound.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksound.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8c2584b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/draksound.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="draksound" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draksound-ti1">Налаштовування звуку</title>
+
+    <subtitle>draksound</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="draksound-im1"
+fileref="draksound.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">draksound</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para>
+    </footnote> is present in the Mageia
+Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>.¶</para>
+
+  <para>Draksound deals with the sound configuration, including the driver choice,
+PulseAudio options and trouble shooting. It will help you if you experience
+sound problems or if you change the sound card.</para>
+
+  <para>The drop down list called <guilabel>Driver</guilabel> allows you to select a
+driver from all the ones available on the computer that match the sound
+card.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Most of the time, it is possible to choose a driver using the OSS or ALSA
+API. OSS is the oldest and very basic, we recommend to choose ALSA when
+possible for its enhanced features.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para><guilabel>PulseAudio</guilabel> is a sound server. It receives all the sound
+inputs, mixes them according to the user preferences and sends the resulting
+sound to the output. See <guimenu>Menu ->Sound and video -> PulseAudio
+volume control</guimenu> to set these preferences.</para>
+
+  <para>PulseAudio is the default sound server and it is recommended to leave it
+enabled.</para>
+
+  <para><guilabel>Glitch-Free</guilabel> improves PulseAudio with some programs. It
+is also recommended to leave it enabled.</para>
+
+  <para>The button <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> display a new windows with three
+buttons :</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="Draksound1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>The first button gives total freedom of choice. You have to know what you
+are doing.</para>
+
+  <para>The second one is obvious and the last one gives assistance with fixing any
+problems you may have. You will find it helpful to try this before asking
+the community for help.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakups.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakups.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..13fe5abe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakups.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakups" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakups-ti1">Set up a UPS for power monitoring</title><subtitle>drakups</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakups-im1" revision="1" align="center"
+format="PNG" fileref="drakups.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+
+  <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakups</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakvpn.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakvpn.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..db35f02b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakvpn.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakvpn">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakvpn-ti1">Configure VPN Connection to secure network access</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakvpn</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakvpn-im1" align="center"
+fileref="drakvpn1.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Вступ</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakvpn</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para>
+      </footnote> allows to configure secure
+access to a remote network establishing a tunnel between the local
+workstation and the remote network. We discuss here only of the
+configuration on the workstation side. We assume that the remote network is
+already in operation, and that you have the connection information from the
+network administrator, like a .pcf configuration file .</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Налаштування</title>
+
+    <para>First, select either Cisco VPN Concentrator or OpenVPN, depending on which
+protocol is used for your virtual private network.</para>
+
+    <para>Then give your connection a name.</para>
+
+    <para>At the next screen, provide the details for your VPN connection.</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>For Cisco VPN</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakvpn3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>For openvpn. The openvpn package and its dependencies will be installed the
+first time the tools is used.</para>
+
+        <para><mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakvpn7.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>Select the files that you received
+from the network administrator.</para>
+
+        <para>Advanced parameters:</para>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="drakvpn8.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+        <para>The next screen asks for IP-address of the gateway.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>When the parameters are set, you have the option of starting the VPN
+connection.</para>
+
+    <para>This VPN connection can be set to start automatically with a network
+connection. To do this, reconfigure the network connection to always connect
+to this VPN.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_apache2.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_apache2.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5831f2f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_apache2.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_apache2" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-ti1">Configure webserver</title><subtitle>drakwizard apache2</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_apache2.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+
+  <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakwizard apache2</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_bind.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_bind.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e567bb02
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_bind.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_bind" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_bind-ti1">Налаштовування DNS</title><subtitle>drakwizard bind</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_bind-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_bind.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+
+  <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakwizard bind</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_dhcp.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_dhcp.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..589a1660
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_dhcp.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-ti1">Налаштовування DHCP</title><subtitle>drakwizard dhcp</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_dhcp.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+
+  <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakwizard dhcp</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_ntp.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_ntp.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..db630bff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_ntp.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_ntp" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_ntp-ti1">Налаштовування часу</title><subtitle>drakwizard ntp</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_ntp-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_ntp.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+
+  <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakwizard ntp</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_proftpd.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_proftpd.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f29e8610
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_proftpd.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+	  <title xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-ti1">Налаштовування FTP</title><subtitle>drakwizard proftpd</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_proftpd.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+
+  <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakwizard proftpd</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_squid.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_squid.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ff52604a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_squid.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_squid" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_squid-ti1">Налаштовування проксі-сервера</title><subtitle>drakwizard squid</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_squid.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+
+  <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakwizard squid</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_sshd.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_sshd.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d6919dbc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakwizard_sshd.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_sshd" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-ti1">Налаштовування фонової служби OpenSSH</title><subtitle>drakwizard sshd</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_sshd.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+
+  <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakwizard sshd</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0fcaf5ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,729 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<chapter xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakx-MNF" ><info><title xml:id="drakx-title">Встановлення за допомогою DrakX</title></info>
+  
+
+  
+
+
+  <section><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti1">Deprecated - Introduction to the MandrakeSecurity Installer</title></info>
+    
+
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa1"> <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it31">
+    <primary>DrakX</primary> </indexterm> <application>DrakX</application> is
+<application>Mandrakesecurity</application>'s installation program.  Its
+ease of use has been enhanced with a graphical user interface, allowing you
+to move forward and backward through the installation and prompting you when
+required.  With <application>DrakX</application>, it doesn't matter whether
+you're a new user to <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> or an old
+pro – <application>DrakX</application>'s job is to give you a smooth
+installation and an easy transition into
+<application>Mandrakesecurity</application>.</para>
+
+
+    <figure xml:id="dx-welcome"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti2">Very First Installation Welcome Screen</title></info> <mediaobject>
+  <imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="../dx-MNF-welcome.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im1" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject></figure>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa2" revision="2">When you begin, the first screen that comes up will present some information
+and give you installation options. (<xref linkend="dx-welcome"/>). Doing
+nothing will simply begin the installation in normal or <quote>linux</quote>
+mode.  The next few paragraphs will go over some options and parameters that
+you can pass to the install program if you run into problems.</para>
+
+    <para condition="expert" xml:id="drakx-pa3a" revision="2">Pressing <keycap>F1</keycap> will open a help screen. Here are some useful
+options to choose from:</para>
+
+
+    <itemizedlist condition="expert" xml:id="dx-help-options" revision="1">
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa3" revision="2"><literal>vgalo</literal>: <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it32"> <primary>installation options</primary><secondary>vgalo</secondary> </indexterm>if you tried
+a default installation and did not see the graphical interface as shown
+below in <xref linkend="drakxid-selectLanguage"/>, you can try to run the
+installation in low resolution mode. This happens with certain types of
+graphics cards, so with <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> we give
+you a number of options to work around problems with older hardware.  To try
+the installation in low resolution mode, type <userinput>vgalo</userinput>
+at the prompt.</para>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa4"><literal>text</literal>: <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it33"> <primary>installation options</primary><secondary>text</secondary> </indexterm>if your video
+card is very old and graphical installation does not work at all, you can
+always choose the text mode installation.  Because all video cards can
+display text, this is the <quote>installation of last resort</quote>. Don't
+worry though – it's not likely that you'll need to use the text install.</para>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+       <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa5" revision="1"><literal>expert</literal>: <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it34"> <primary>installation options</primary><secondary>expert</secondary>
+       </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it35"><primary>installation options </primary><secondary>linux</secondary></indexterm>in some rare cases, your PC
+may appear to freeze or lock-up during the hardware detection phase.  If
+that happens, then adding the word <literal>expert</literal> as a parameter
+will tell the install program to bypass hardware detection.  Because
+<application>DrakX</application> will not scan for hardware, you will need
+to manually specify hardware parameters later in the installation.  The
+<literal>expert</literal> parameter can be added to the previous modes, so
+you may end up specifying <screen xml:id="drakx-scRK">boot: vgalo expert</screen> to perform a
+low resolution graphical install without <application>DrakX</application>
+performing a hardware scan.</para>
+    <note>
+     <para xml:id="drakx-pa5a">Selecting the <literal>expert</literal> mode will ask you for more details
+about the installation process, letting you perform a more customized
+installation.</para>
+    </note>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa6"><literal>kernel options</literal>: <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it36"><primary>installation options</primary><secondary>kernel options</secondary></indexterm>Kernel options usually aren't required for most machines.  There are
+a few cases of motherboards incorrectly reporting the amount of memory
+installed due to bugs in the design or in the BIOS.  If you need to manually
+specify the amount of DRAM installed in your PC, use the <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it37">
+       <primary>commands</primary> <secondary>mem= xxxM</secondary>
+       </indexterm> <command>mem= xxxM</command> parameter. For
+example, to start the installation in normal mode with a computer having 256
+<acronym>MB</acronym> of memory, your command line would look like this:
+<screen xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-sc1">boot: linux mem=256M</screen></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa7" revision="1">Now that we've gone over what <emphasis>might</emphasis> go wrong, let's
+move on to the actual installation process.  When the installer starts,
+you'll see a nice graphical interface ( <xref linkend="selectLanguage-fig"/>
+). On the left will be the various installation steps. Depending on the
+installation's progress level, some stages may or may not be available.  If
+a particular stage is available it will be highlighted when you move the
+mouse pointer over it.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa8">The colors of the buttons on the left side of the screen let you quickly see
+what's going on with the installation:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa9">red: this installation phase has not yet been carried out</para>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa10">orange: the installation stage that is currently being processed</para>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa11">green: this installation stage has already been configured. However, nothing
+stops you from going back to a stage that has already been completed if you
+need to reconfigure something.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa12" revision="1">This guide assumes that you are performing a standard, step-by-step
+installation, as described below.</para>
+
+
+  </section>
+  
+
+  <section xml:id="drakxid-selectLanguage"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti3">Choosing Your Language</title></info>    
+    
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa13">The first step is to choose your preferred language.</para>
+
+    <figure xml:id="selectLanguage-fig" revision="2"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti4">Choosing the Default Language</title></info> <mediaobject>
+  <imageobject> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx-MNF-selectLanguage.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im2"
+revision="1" width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure>    
+    
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa14"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it38"><primary>language</primary></indexterm> Your choice of preferred language
+will affect the language of the documentation, the installer and the system
+in general.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa15">Clicking on the <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button will allow you to
+select other languages to be installed on your workstation, thereby
+installing the language-specific files for system documentation and
+applications. For example, if you will host users from Spain on your
+machine, select English as the default language in the tree view and
+<guilabel>Spanish|Spain</guilabel> in the Advanced section.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa16">Note that you're not limited to choosing a single additional language. Once
+you have selected additional locales, click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton>
+button to continue.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para xml:id="drakx-pa18a" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it8a">
+	  <primary>language</primary> <secondary>setting</secondary>
+	  </indexterm>Not all languages listed here are
+supported in the <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> Web interface.</para>
+    </note>
+
+  </section>
+  
+  
+  <section xml:id="drakxid-acceptLicense"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti5">License Terms of the Distribution</title></info>    
+    
+
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-license.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im3" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa17"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it39"><primary>ліцензія</primary></indexterm>Before continuing, you should
+carefully read the terms of the license. It covers the entire
+<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> distribution, and if you do not
+agree with all the terms in it you should click on the <guibutton>Refuse
+</guibutton> button.  This will immediately terminate the installation.
+Clicking on the <guibutton>Accept</guibutton> button will continue the
+installation.</para>
+
+  </section>
+
+  
+  
+  <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-setupSCSI"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti6">Disk Detection and Configuration</title></info>
+    
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-setupSCSI.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im4" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa18"><application>DrakX</application> will first detect any <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it40"><primary>IDE</primary><secondary>detection
+    </secondary> </indexterm> IDE devices present in your computer. It will also
+scan for one or more <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it41"><primary>PCI SCSI</primary>
+    </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it42"><primary>SCSI</primary></indexterm> PCI SCSI cards on your system. If a SCSI card is
+found, <application>DrakX</application> will automatically install the
+appropriate driver.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa19">Because hardware detection is not foolproof,
+<application>DrakX</application> will ask you if you have a PCI SCSI
+installed. Clicking <guibutton>Yes</guibutton> will display a list of SCSI
+cards to choose from. Click <guibutton>No</guibutton> if you know that you
+have no SCSI hardware in your machine. If you're not sure, you can check the
+list of hardware detected in your machine by selecting <guilabel>See
+hardware info </guilabel> and clicking the
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Examine the list of hardware and then click on
+the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to return to the SCSI interface
+question.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa20">If you had to manually specify your PCI SCSI adapter,
+<application>DrakX</application> will ask if you want to configure options
+for it. You should allow <application>DrakX</application> to probe the
+hardware for the card-specific options which are needed to initialize the
+adapter. Most of the time, <application>DrakX</application> will get through
+this step without any issues.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa21" revision="1">If <application>DrakX</application> is not able to probe for the options to
+automatically determine which parameters need to be passed to the hardware,
+you'll need to manually configure the driver.</para>
+
+    <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it43">
+      <primary>hard disk</primary>
+      <secondary>detection</secondary>
+    </indexterm>
+
+
+  </section>
+  
+  <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-selectMouse"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti7">Configuring your Mouse</title></info>
+    
+
+
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-selectMouse.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im5" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa22" revision="11"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it44"><primary>mouse</primary> </indexterm> Usually,
+<application>DrakX</application> has no problems detecting the number of
+buttons on your mouse. If it does, it assumes you have a two-button mouse
+and will configure it for third-button emulation. The third-button mouse
+button of a two-button mouse can be <quote>pressed </quote> by
+simultaneously clicking the left and right mouse
+buttons. <application>DrakX</application> will automatically know whether
+your mouse uses a <acronym>PS/2</acronym>, serial or <acronym>USB</acronym>
+interface.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa23">If for some reason you wish to specify a different type of mouse, select it
+from the provided list.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa24" revision="10">If you choose a mouse other than the default, a test screen will be
+displayed. Use the buttons and wheel to verify that the settings are correct
+and that the mouse is working correctly. If the mouse is not working well,
+press the space bar or <keycap> Return</keycap> key to
+<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> the test and to go back to the list of
+choices.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa25" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it45"><primary>mouse</primary>
+	  <secondary>wheel</secondary> </indexterm>Wheel mice are occasionally not
+detected automatically, so you will need to select your mouse from a
+list. Be sure to select the one corresponding to the port that your mouse is
+attached to.  After selecting a mouse and pressing the
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button, a mouse image is displayed
+on-screen. Scroll the mouse wheel to ensure that it is activated
+correctly. Once you see the on-screen scroll wheel moving as you scroll your
+mouse wheel, test the buttons and check that the mouse pointer moves
+on-screen as you move your mouse.</para>
+    </note>
+
+  </section>
+  
+  <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-selectKeyboard"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti8">Configuring the Keyboard</title></info>
+    
+
+
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-selectKeyboard.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im6" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa26" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it46">
+      <primary>keyboard</primary></indexterm>Depending on the default language you
+chose in <xref linkend="drakxid-selectLanguage"/>,
+<application>DrakX</application> will automatically select a particular type
+of keyboard configuration. However, you might not have a keyboard that
+corresponds exactly to your language: for example, if you are an English
+speaking Swiss person, you may have a Swiss keyboard. Or if you speak
+English but are located in Québec, you may find yourself in the same
+situation where your native language and keyboard do not match. In either
+case, this installation step will allow you to select an appropriate
+keyboard from a list.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa27">Click on the <guibutton revision="1">More</guibutton> button to be presented
+with the complete list of supported keyboards.</para>
+
+  </section>
+  
+
+  <section xml:id="drakxid-doPartitionDisks"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti9">Selecting the Mount Points</title></info>
+    
+
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx-MNF-doPartitionDisks.png" format="PNG"
+xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im7" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa28"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it47"><primary>mount points</primary></indexterm>At this point, you need to decide
+where you want to install the <application>Mandrakesecurity</application>
+operating system on your hard drive. If your hard drive is empty or if an
+existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to
+partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard drive consists of
+logically dividing it to create the space needed to install your new
+<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> system.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa29" revision="2">Because the process of partitioning a hard drive is usually irreversible and
+can lead to lost data if there is an existing operating system already
+installed on the drive, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful if
+you are an inexperienced user. Fortunately, <application>DrakX</application>
+includes a wizard which simplifies this process. Before continuing with this
+step, read through the rest of this section and above all, take your time.</para>
+
+    <para condition="expert" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa30" revision="5"/>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa31">If your hard drive has already been partitioned, either from a previous
+installation of <application>GNU/Linux</application> or by another
+partitioning tool, select the appropriate partitions that you want to
+install your Linux system into.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa32">If partitions haven't been configured, you will need to create them using
+the wizard. Depending on your hard drive configuration, several options are
+available:<itemizedlist revision="2">
+	<listitem>
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa33"><guibutton>Use free space</guibutton>: this option will perform an automatic
+partitioning of your blank drive(s).  If you use this option there will be
+no further prompts.  </para></listitem>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa34" revision="1"><guibutton>Use existing partition</guibutton>: the wizard has detected one
+or more existing Linux partitions on your hard drive. If you want to use
+them, choose this option. You will then be asked to choose the mount points
+associated with each of the partitions. The legacy mount points are selected
+by default, and for the most part it's a good idea to keep them.</para>
+	</listitem>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa35" revision="12"><guibutton>Use the free space on the Windows partition</guibutton>: if
+<application>Microsoft</application><superscript>®</superscript>
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application><superscript>©</superscript>
+is installed on your hard drive and takes all the space available on it, you
+have to create free space for Linux data. To do so, you can delete your
+<application>Microsoft</application>
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition and
+data (see <quote> Erase entire disk</quote> or <quote>Expert mode</quote>
+solutions) or resize your <application>Microsoft</application>
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> FAT
+partition. Resizing can be performed without the loss of any data,
+<emphasis>provided you previously defragment the
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition and
+that it uses the FAT format. Backing up your data is strongly
+recommended.</emphasis>. Using this option is recommended if you want to use
+both <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> and
+<application>Microsoft</application>
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> on the same
+computer.</para>
+
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa36">Before choosing this option, please understand that after this procedure,
+the size of your <application>Microsoft</application>
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition
+will be smaller then when you started. You will have less free space under
+<application>Microsoft</application>
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> to store your
+data or to install new software.</para>
+	</listitem>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa37"><guibutton>Erase entire disk</guibutton>: if you want to delete all data and
+all partitions present on your hard drive and replace them with your new
+<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> system, choose this option. Be
+careful, because you will not be able to undo your choice after you confirm.</para>
+	  <warning>
+	    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa38">If you choose this option, <emphasis>all</emphasis> data on your disk will
+be deleted.
+      </para></warning>
+	</listitem>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa39"><guibutton>Remove Windows</guibutton>: this will simply erase everything on
+the drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from
+scratch. <emphasis>All</emphasis> data on your disk will be lost.</para>
+	  <warning>
+	    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa40">If you choose this option, <emphasis>all</emphasis> data on your disk will
+be lost.</para>
+	  </warning>
+	</listitem>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa41" revision="3"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it48"><primary>partitions</primary>
+	      <secondary>manual formatting</secondary></indexterm> <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it49">
+	      <primary>partitioning</primary> </indexterm> <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it50"><primary>DiskDrake</primary></indexterm> <guibutton>Custom disk
+partitioning</guibutton>: choose this option if you want to manually
+partition your hard drive. Be careful –– it is a powerful but dangerous
+choice and you can very easily lose all your data. That's why this option is
+really only recommended if you have done something like this before and have
+some experience. For more instructions on how to use the
+<application>DiskDrake</application> utility, refer to the <link
+xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+xlink:href="http://www.mandrakelinux.com/en/doc/82/en/user.html/diskdrake.html">online
+documentation for <application>DiskDrake</application></link>.</para></listitem>
+	      </itemizedlist></para>
+
+
+  </section>
+  
+  <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-formatPartitions"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti10">Choose Partitions to Be Formatted</title></info>
+    
+
+
+
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx-MNF-formatPartitions.png" format="PNG"
+xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im8" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa42"> <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it51"><primary>partitions</primary>
+	<secondary>formatting</secondary></indexterm>Any partitions that have been newly
+defined must be formatted for use (formatting means creating a file system).</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa43">At this time, you may wish to reformat some already existing partitions to
+erase any data they contain. If you wish to do that, please select those
+partitions as well.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa44">Please note that it is not necessary to reformat all <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it52"><primary>partitions</primary>
+   <secondary>pre-existing</secondary></indexterm>pre-existing partitions. You must reformat the
+partitions containing the operating system (such as <literal>/</literal>,
+<literal>/usr</literal> or <literal>/var</literal>) but you do not have to
+reformat partitions containing data that you wish to keep (typically
+<literal>/home</literal>).</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa45">Please be careful when selecting partitions. After formatting, all data on
+the selected partitions will be deleted and you will not be able to recover
+it.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa46">Click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton> when you are ready to format partitions.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa47">Click on <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> if you want to choose another
+partition for your new <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> operating
+system installation.</para>
+    
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa48">Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> if you wish to select partitions
+that will be checked for <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it53"><primary>partitions</primary><secondary>bad blocks</secondary></indexterm>bad blocks on
+the disk.</para>
+
+  </section>
+  
+
+  <section xml:id="drakxid-installPackages"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti11">Actual Packages Installation</title></info>
+    
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa49" revision="2">Then comes the actual system installation. The packages list is predefined
+and cannot be changed at this time. The time required to complete the
+installation depends on the speed of your hardware. An estimate of the
+remaining time-to-go will be displayed on-screen to help gauge if there is
+sufficient time to enjoy a cup of coffee.</para>
+
+  </section>
+  
+  <section xml:id="drakxid-setRootPassword"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti12">Root Password</title></info>
+    
+
+
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-setRootPassword.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im9" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa50">This is the most crucial decision point for the security of your
+<application>GNU/Linux</application> system: you have to enter the
+<indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it54"><primary>root</primary>
+   <secondary>password</secondary></indexterm> <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it55"><primary>password</primary>
+   <secondary>root</secondary></indexterm> <literal>root</literal> password. <literal>Root</literal> is the
+system administrator and is the only one authorized to make updates, add
+users, change the overall system configuration, and so on. In short,
+<literal>root</literal> can do everything! That is why you must choose a
+password that is difficult to guess – <application>DrakX</application> will
+tell you if the password that you chose is too easy. As you can see, you are
+not forced to enter a password, but we strongly advise you against.
+<application>GNU/Linux</application> is as prone to operator error as any
+other operating system.  Since <literal>root</literal> can overcome all
+limitations and unintentionally erase all data on partitions by carelessly
+accessing the partitions themselves, it is important that it be difficult to
+become <literal>root</literal>.</para>
+    
+    <note>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa51" revision="1">The <application>msec</application> security level is set to
+<literal>4</literal> (<quote>high</quote>) by default. The password should
+be a mixture of alphanumeric characters and must be at least 8 characters
+long. Never write down the <literal>root</literal> password –– it makes it
+too easy to compromise a system.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa52">One caveat –– do not make the password too long or complicated because you
+must be able to remember it!</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa53">The password will not be displayed on screen as you type it in. To reduce
+the chance of a blind typing error you will need to enter the password
+twice. If you do happen to make the same typing error twice, this
+<quote>incorrect</quote> password will have to be used the first time you
+connect.</para>
+
+  </section>
+  
+  <section xml:id="drakxid-setAdminPassword"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti13">Administrator Password</title></info>
+    
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa54">You are then asked to enter the password for the system administrator
+(login: <literal>admin</literal>). It is differentiated from the
+<literal>root</literal> user, for security reasons, and also because it may
+not be the same person. It is that <literal>admin</literal> account that
+will be required to access the <application>Mandrakesecurity</application>
+Web interface. The criterion for choosing this password are the same as for
+the <literal>root</literal> password.</para>
+
+  </section>
+  
+  <section xml:id="drakxid-addUser"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti14">Adding a User</title></info>
+    
+    
+
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-addUser.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im10" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa55" revision="2">All necessary users have already been added, and you shouldn't need adding
+more users for normal <application>Mandrakesecurity</application>
+operations. However, if you plan to use the <application>squid</application>
+<acronym>PAM</acronym> authentication feature, you can add here the users
+that will be authorized.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa56">The first field asks you for a real name. Of course, this is not
+mandatory –– you can actually enter whatever you
+like. <application>DrakX</application> will use the first word you typed in
+and copy it to the <guimenu>User name</guimenu> field, which is the name
+this user will enter to log onto the system. If you like, you may override
+the default and change the username. The next step is to enter a
+password. From a security point of view, a non-privileged (regular) user
+password is not as crucial as the <literal>root</literal> password, but that
+is no reason to neglect it by making it blank or too simple: after all,
+<emphasis>your</emphasis> files could be the ones at risk.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa57" revision="2">You can then choose to make that user member of one or more special groups
+that will give him special priviledges. Check the button for the priviledges
+you want for that user.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa58" revision="1">Once you click on <guimenu>Accept user</guimenu>, you can add additional
+users. Select <guimenu>Done</guimenu> when you have finished adding users.</para>
+
+    <tip>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa59">Clicking the <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button allows you to change the
+default <literal>shell</literal> for that user
+(<application>bash</application> by default).</para>
+    </tip>
+
+  </section>
+  
+  <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-configureNetwork"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti15">Configure your Local Network</title></info>
+    
+
+
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx-MNF-configureNetwork.png" format="PNG"
+xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im11" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+    
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa60" revision="1">You will now set up your local network connection (<acronym>LAN</acronym>).
+<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> will attempt to autodetect
+network devices and modems. If this detection fails, uncheck the
+<guilabel>Use auto detection</guilabel> box.</para>
+
+    <warning>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa61" revision="1">Even though many connection types are offered here, do not configure your
+Internet connection now. You should now limit yourself to configuring the
+<literal>Ethernet</literal> <acronym>LAN</acronym> access, so that you can
+later connect to the administration interface and configure other
+connections easily through it.</para>
+    </warning>
+    
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa62">We will not detail each configuration option –  just make sure that you have
+all the parameters, such as IP address, default gateway, DNS servers,
+etc. from your Internet Service Provider or system administrator.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa63" revision="1">You will be able to configure all your other network interfaces (Internet,
+<acronym>DMZ</acronym>, etc.) later on through
+<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> interface.</para>
+
+  </section>
+
+  
+
+  <section condition="extended" xml:id="drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti16">Where Should You Place the Bootloader</title></info>
+    
+
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx-MNF-setupBootloaderBeginner.png" format="PNG"
+xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im12" width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa64">You must indicate where you wish to place the information the bootloader
+requires to boot to <application>GNU/Linux</application>.</para>
+    
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa65">Unless you know exactly what you are doing, choose <guibutton>First sector
+of drive (MBR)</guibutton>.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa66" revision="1">You are then presented the different boot entries that will be proposed at
+system boot. You can modify them here.</para>
+
+  </section>
+  
+  <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-createBootdisk"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti17">Boot Disk</title></info>
+    
+
+    
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-createBootdisk.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im13" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa67">The <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym>
+has a built-in rescue mode. You can access it by booting the
+<acronym>CD-ROM</acronym>, pressing the <userinput>F1</userinput> key at
+boot and typing <userinput>rescue</userinput> at the prompt.  If your
+computer cannot boot from the <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym>, there are at least
+two situations where having a boot floppy is critical:
+    <itemizedlist>
+	<listitem>
+        <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa68" revision="1">when installing the <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it56"><primary>bootloader</primary>
+        </indexterm>bootloader,
+<application>DrakX</application> will rewrite the boot sector (<indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it57">
+        <primary>MBR</primary></indexterm><acronym>MBR</acronym>) of your main disk (unless
+you are using another boot manager), to allow you to start up with either
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> or
+<application>GNU/Linux</application> (assuming you have
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> on your
+system). If at some point you need to reinstall
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application>, the
+<application>Microsoft</application> install process will rewrite the boot
+sector and remove your ability to start
+<application>GNU/Linux</application>!</para>
+	</listitem>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa69">if a problem arises and you cannot start
+<application>GNU/Linux</application> from the hard disk, this <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it58"> <primary>boot disk</primary></indexterm>floppy will be the only means of starting up
+<application>GNU/Linux</application>. It contains a fair number of system
+tools for restoring a system that has crashed due to a power failure, an
+unfortunate typing error, a forgotten root password, or any other reason.</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>If you say <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>, you will be asked to insert a disk in
+the drive. The floppy disk must be blank or have non-critical data on it –
+<application>DrakX</application> will format the floppy and will rewrite the
+whole disk.</para>
+
+
+  </section>
+  
+  <section xml:id="drakxid-installUpdates"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti18" revision="1">Installing Updates from the Internet</title></info>
+    
+    
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-installUpdates.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im14" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+    
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa70" revision="1">At the time you are installing <application>Mandrakesecurity</application>,
+it is likely that some packages have been updated since the initial
+release.  Bugs may have been fixed, security issues resolved. To allow you
+to benefit from these updates, you are now able to download them from the
+Internet.  Choose <guibutton>Yes</guibutton> if you have a working Internet
+connection, or <guibutton>No</guibutton> if you prefer to install updated
+packages later.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa71">Choosing <guibutton>Yes</guibutton> displays a list of places from which
+updates can be retrieved. Choose the one nearest you. A package-selection
+tree will appear: review the selection, and press
+<guibutton>Install</guibutton> to retrieve and install the selected
+package(s), or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to abort.</para>
+
+
+  </section>
+  
+  <section xml:id="drakxid-exitInstall"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti19">It's Finished!</title></info>
+    
+
+
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-exitInstall.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im15" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa72" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it59"><primary>boot</primary>
+        <secondary>dual-boot</secondary></indexterm>There you are. Installation is now
+complete and your <application>GNU/Linux</application> system is ready to
+use. Carefully write down the <acronym>URL</acronym> given in that dialog,
+it's the address you'll have to use in your Web browser to access the
+<application>Mandrakesecurity</application> Web interface with
+<literal>admin</literal> account. Now, just click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>
+twice to reboot the system.</para>
+
+  </section>
+
+  
+  <section><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti20">How to Uninstall Linux</title></info>
+    
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa73">The uninstallation process consists of two steps:</para>
+
+    <orderedlist inheritnum="ignore" continuation="restarts">
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa74">Delete all partitions on your hard drive and replace them by a single
+<acronym>FAT</acronym> partition with <application>DiskDrake</application>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa75">Uninstall the <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it30"><primary>bootloader</primary>
+<secondary>uninstall</secondary> </indexterm> bootloader (generally
+<application>GRUB</application>) from the Master Boot Record
+(<acronym>MBR</acronym>). To do so, boot under
+<application>DOS</application> and run the <command>fdisk /mbr</command>
+command.</para>
+
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa76">If you have another <acronym>OS</acronym>, please consult its documentation
+to determine how to perform the same step.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+    
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa77" revision="1">Goodbye, and thank you for using
+<application>Mandrakesecurity</application>!</para>
+
+  </section>
+</chapter>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-acceptLicense-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-acceptLicense-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..15db214e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-acceptLicense-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakxid-acceptLicense"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-acceptLicense-ti1">Застаріле — ліцензійна угода щодо дистрибутива</title></info>
+  
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-license.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-acceptLicense-im1" revision="3"
+width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-acceptLicense-pa1" revision="5"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-acceptLicense-it1">
+      <primary>ліцензія</primary>
+    </indexterm>Before continuing, you should
+carefully read the terms of the license. It covers the entire
+<application>Mageia</application> distribution. If you agree with all the
+terms it contains, select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and click on
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. If not, clicking on <guibutton>Quit</guibutton>
+will reboot your computer.</para>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-acceptLicense-pa2">If you are curious about any technical changes which have occurred in the
+distribution since the last release, you can click on the <guibutton>Release
+Notes</guibutton> button to display them.</para>
+  </tip>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cdcb5dfd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakxid-addUser" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-ti1">Застаріле — додавання користувача</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx-addUser.png"
+width="11.5cm" align="center" format="PNG"
+xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-pa1"><application>GNU/Linux</application> is a multi-user system which means each
+user can have his or her own preferences, own files and so on. But unlike
+<literal>root</literal>, who is the system administrator, the <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-it1">
+      <primary>users</primary>
+
+      <secondary>adding</secondary>
+    </indexterm>users you add at this point won't be authorized to
+change anything except their own files and their own configurations,
+protecting the system from unintentional or malicious changes which could
+have a serious impact on it.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-addUser-pa5">You will have to create at least one regular user for yourself — this is the
+account which you should use for routine, day-to-day usage. Although it's
+very easy to log in as <literal>root</literal> to do anything and
+everything, it may also be very dangerous! A very simple mistake could mean
+that your system won't work any more. If you make a serious mistake as a
+regular user, the worst that can happen is that you'll lose some
+information, but you won't affect the entire system.</para>
+
+  <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-pa2">The first field asks you for a real name. <application>DrakX</application>
+will use the first word you type in this field and copy it, all in
+lowercase, to the <guimenu>Login name</guimenu> field, which is the name
+this user will enter to log on to the system. You can override it and change
+the <guimenu>Login Name</guimenu>. The next step is to enter a
+password. From a security point of view, a non-privileged (regular) user's
+password is not as crucial as the <literal>root</literal> password, but
+that's no reason to neglect it by making it blank or too simple: after all,
+<emphasis>your</emphasis> files could be the ones at risk.</para>
+
+  <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-pa3">Once you click on <guimenu>Accept user</guimenu> you can add other
+users. Add a user for each one of your friends, your father, your sister,
+etc. Click <guimenu>Next</guimenu> when you're finished adding users.</para>
+
+  <para revision="3"></para>
+
+  <para revision="3"></para>
+
+  <tip condition="expert">
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-pa4">Clicking the <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button allows you to change the
+default <literal>shell</literal> for that user
+(<application>bash</application> by default).</para>
+  </tip>
+
+  
+<!-- We don't give the option to autologin anymore - Marja 20120317 - <mediaobject condition="expert">
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-autologin.png" format="PNG" xml:id="drakx-im17a" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+  
+ 
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakx-pa142a" revision="6">When you're finished adding
+  users, you'll be asked to choose a user who will be automatically
+  logged into the system when the computer boots up. If you're
+  interested in that feature (and don't care much about security),
+  choose the desired user (if more than one regular user is defined)
+  and select a window manager, then click on
+  <guibutton>
+Next</guibutton>. If you're not interested in this
+  feature, uncheck the <guilabel>Do you want to use this
+    feature?</guilabel> box.</para> -->
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..20c2422e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" condition="extended" xml:id="drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s"  revision="1" userlevel="expert"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-ti1">Deprecated - Choosing Mount Points</title></info>
+    
+
+    
+
+    
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-pa1">Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard
+drive. You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for
+most common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define
+a <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-it1"><primary>root</primary>
+   <secondary>partition</secondary></indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-it2"><primary>partitions</primary>
+   <secondary>root</secondary></indexterm>root partition (<literal revision="3">/</literal>). Do not choose
+too small a partition or you will not be able to install enough software. In
+most cases it is best to also create a <literal>/home</literal> partition,
+to store your data on (only possible if you have more than one Linux
+partition available).</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-pa2">Each partition is listed as follows: "Device", "Capacity", "Mount
+point","Type".</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-pa3">"Device", is structured: "hard drive type", "hard drive number", "partition
+number" (for example, "sda5"). </para>
+
+    
+    
+	  
+    <!-- This paragraph might not be true, I thought I was always able to do this at this point, but now in Mga2b2 my four Mga partitions aren't mounted yet, so impossible to see what is where with "df" - Marja, 20120317 
+      <note><para xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-pa6">You can switch to tty 2 with ctrl+alt+F2 and type df to view the partitions if you're not sure installer's choice is correct and then switch back to the installer screen with ctrl+alt+F7</para>
+</note> -->
+<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-pa7">When the mount points are correct, or corrected, click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. You'll then be given the choice to format one
+or more of the partitions you just chose to install Mageia on. Usually,
+formatting <literal>/</literal> and saving <literal>/home</literal> (if the
+same partition was your <literal>/home</literal> before), is a good choice.</para>
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-chooseCd-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-chooseCd-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ac6f3e12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-chooseCd-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakxid-chooseCd"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-chooseCd-ti1">Deprecated - Multiple CD-ROM Installation</title></info>
+ 
+
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-chooseCd-pa1" revision="4">The <application>Mandriva Linux</application> installation is distributed on
+several <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym>s. If a selected package is located on
+another <acronym>CD</acronym>, <application>DrakX</application> will eject
+the current <acronym>CD</acronym> and ask you to insert the required one. If
+you do not have the requested <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym> at hand, just click
+on <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>, and the corresponding packages will not be
+installed.</para>
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8e392a66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,160 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakx-choosePackages"><!-- <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-choosePackages-pa20">
+Depending on the
+    installation media you are currently using, you may be first asked
+      to select the <acronym>CD</acronym>s you actually have at hand.</para> -->
+<info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-ti1">Deprecated - Choose Packages to Install</title></info>
+  
+
+
+
+ 
+  <section xml:id="drakxid-choose-graphical-env"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-choose-graphical-env-ti2" >Graphical Environment</title></info>  
+   
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choose-graphical-env-pa1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-choose-graphical-env-it5"> <primary>packages</primary>
+      <secondary>graphical environment</secondary></indexterm> <guilabel>Graphical
+Environment</guilabel>: this is where you will choose your preferred
+graphical environment. At least one must be selected if you want to have a
+graphical interface available.</para>
+    </section>
+
+ <section xml:id="drakxid-choosePackages"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackagesGroups-ti3" revision="1">Choose Package Groups to Install</title></info>
+  
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-choosePackages.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-im1" revision="3"
+width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-it1"><primary>packages</primary>
+    <secondary>installing</secondary></indexterm>It's now time to specify which
+programs you wish to install on your system. There are thousands of packages
+available for <application>Mageia</application>, and to make it simpler to
+manage, they have been placed into groups of similar applications.</para>
+
+
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa2" revision="3"><application>Mageia</application> sorts package groups into categories. You
+can mix and match applications from the various categories, so a
+<guilabel>Workstation</guilabel> installation can still have applications
+from the <guilabel>Server</guilabel> category installed.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist revision="5" inheritnum="ignore" continuation="restarts">
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa3" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-it2"> <primary>packages</primary>
+      <secondary>workstation</secondary></indexterm><guilabel>Workstation</guilabel>: if
+you plan to use your machine as a workstation, select one or more of the
+groups in this category. The special <literal>LSB</literal> group will
+configure your system so that it complies as much as possible with the <link
+xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+xlink:href="http://www.linuxbase.org/">Linux Standard Base Project</link>
+specifications.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa5"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-it4"> <primary>packages</primary>
+      <secondary>server</secondary></indexterm><guilabel>Server</guilabel>: if your
+machine is intended to be a server, select which of the more common services
+you wish to install on your machine.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   
+    </orderedlist>
+
+    <tip>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa7" revision="11">Moving the mouse cursor over a group name will display a short explanatory
+text about that group.</para>
+    </tip>
+
+    <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-it6">
+      <primary>packages</primary>
+      <secondary>individual selection</secondary>
+    </indexterm>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa11" revision="4">You can check the <guilabel>Individual package selection</guilabel> box,
+which is useful if you're familiar with the packages being offered or if you
+want to have total control over what will be installed.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa12" revision="11">If you start the installation in <guilabel>Upgrade</guilabel> mode, you can
+deselect all groups and prevent the installation of any new packages. This
+is useful for repairing or updating an existing system.</para>
+
+</section>
+
+      
+   <section condition="expert" xml:id="minimal-install"><info><title xml:id="BId-minimal-install-ti4" revision="1">Minimal Installation</title></info>
+      
+   <para xml:id="BIdNEW-minimal-install-pa19" revision="3">If you deselect all groups when performing a regular installation (as
+opposed to an upgrade), a new dialog shows after pressing the
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button, suggesting different options for a
+minimal installation:</para>
+
+   <itemizedlist xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-choosePackages-item1" revision="2">
+    <listitem>
+     <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa8"><guilabel>With X</guilabel>: install the minimum number of packages possible
+to have a working graphical desktop.</para>
+    </listitem>
+    <listitem>
+     <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa9"><guilabel>With basic documentation</guilabel>: installs the base system plus
+basic utilities and their documentation. This installation is suitable for
+setting up a server.</para>
+    </listitem>
+    <listitem>
+     <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa10" revision="13"><guilabel>Truly minimal install</guilabel>: installs the absolute minimum
+number of packages necessary to get a working
+<application>Linux</application> system. With this installation you will
+only have a command-line interface.</para>
+    </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+ <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-choosePackagesTree"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackagesTree-ti5" revision="1">Choosing Individual Packages to Install</title></info>
+  
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-choosePackagesTree.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-im2" revision="1"
+width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa13" revision="2">If you choose to install packages individually, the installer will present a
+tree structure containing all packages classified by groups and
+subgroups. While browsing the tree, you can select entire groups, subgroups,
+or individual packages.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa14">Whenever you select a package on the tree, a description will appear on the
+right to let you know the purpose of that package.</para>
+
+  <warning>
+   <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa15" revision="2">If a server package has been selected, either because you specifically chose
+the individual package or because it was part of a group of packages, you
+will be asked to confirm that you really want those server packages to be
+installed. By default <application>Mageia</application> will automatically
+start any installed services (servers) at boot time. Even if they are safe
+and have no known issues at the time the distribution was shipped, it is
+entirely possible that security holes were discovered after this version of
+<application>Mageia</application> was finalized. If you don't know what a
+particular service is supposed to do or why it's being installed, then click
+<guibutton>No</guibutton>.</para>
+    </warning>
+
+  
+   <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa16" revision="4"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-it7">
+     <primary>залежності</primary>
+     <secondary>automatic</secondary></indexterm> The <guilabel>Show automatically
+selected packages</guilabel> option is used to disable the warning
+dialog. Those appear whenever the installer automatically selects a package
+to resolve a dependency issue.  Some packages depend on others and the
+installation of one particular package may require the installation of
+another one. The installer can determine which packages are required to
+satisfy a dependency and to successfully complete the installation.</para>
+
+  
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa17" revision="4">The little floppy disk icon at the bottom of the list allows you to load or
+save the packages list. This is useful if you have a number of machines that
+you wish to configure identically. Click on this icon and select whether you
+wish to <guilabel>Load</guilabel> or <guilabel>Save</guilabel> the packages
+list, then select the medium in the following screen and click on the
+<guibutton>Ok</guibutton> button.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c1379198
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakxid-doPartitionDisks"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ti1" revision="1">Deprecated - Partitioning your Disk</title></info>
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-doPartitionDisks.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-im1" revision="1"
+width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa1" revision="2">You now need to decide where you want to install
+<application>Mageia</application> on your hard drive. If your hard drive is
+empty or if an existing operating system is using all the available space
+you will have to re-partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard
+drive means to logically divide it in order to create the space required for
+your new <application>Mageia</application> system.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa2" revision="3"><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-it3"><primary>partitions</primary><secondary>DrakX</secondary>
+    </indexterm>Because the process of partitioning a
+hard drive is usually irreversible and can lead to data loss, partitioning
+can be intimidating and stressful for the inexperienced user. Fortunately,
+<application>DrakX</application> includes a wizard which simplifies this
+process. Before continuing with this step, read through the rest of this
+section and, above all, take your time.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa3" revision="2">Depending on the configuration of your hard drive, several options are
+available:</para>
+
+  
+  
+  <itemizedlist revision="2">
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa4"><guibutton>Use free space</guibutton>. This option will perform an automatic
+partitioning of your blank drive(s). If you use this option there will be no
+further prompts.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa5" revision="4"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-it1"><primary>mount points</primary></indexterm><guibutton>Use existing
+partitions</guibutton>. The wizard has detected one or more existing
+<application>Linux</application> partitions on your hard drive. If you want
+to use them, choose this option. You will then be asked to choose the mount
+points associated with each of the partitions. The legacy mount points are
+selected by default, and for the most part it's a good idea to keep
+them. You will also be asked to choose the partitions to be formatted or
+preserved.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+
+
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa6" revision="15"><guibutton>Use the free space on the Windows partition</guibutton>. If
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> is installed
+on your hard drive, you might have to create free space for
+<application>GNU/Linux</application>. To do so, you can delete your
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition and
+data (see the <quote>Erase entire disk</quote> solution below) or resize
+your <acronym>FAT</acronym> or <acronym>NTFS</acronym> partition. Resizing
+can be performed without the loss of any data, <emphasis>provided you've
+previously defragmented the
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application>
+partition. Backing up your data is strongly recommended</emphasis>. Using
+this option is recommended if you want to use both
+<application>Mageia</application> and
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> on the same
+computer in a <emphasis>dual boot</emphasis> configuration.</para>
+
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa7" revision="1">Before choosing this option, please understand that after this procedure,
+the size of your
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition
+will be smaller than when you started, which means you will have less free
+space to store your data or to install new software.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa8" revision="1"><guibutton>Erase entire disk</guibutton>. If you want to delete all data and
+all partitions present on your hard drive and replace them with
+<application>Mageia</application>, choose this option. Be warned that you
+won't be able to undo this operation after you confirm.</para>
+
+      <warning>
+        <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa9">If you choose this option, <emphasis>all</emphasis> data on your disk will
+be deleted.</para>
+      </warning>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa10" revision="4"><guibutton>Remove Windows(TM)</guibutton>. This option appears when the hard
+drive is entirely taken by
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application>. Choosing
+this option will simply erase everything on the drive, partitioning
+everything from scratch.</para>
+
+      <warning>
+        <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa11">If you choose this option, <emphasis>all</emphasis> data on your disk will
+be lost.</para>
+      </warning>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa12" revision="5"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-it2">
+       <primary>partitions</primary><secondary>custom</secondary>
+       </indexterm><guibutton>Custom disk
+partitioning</guibutton>. Choose this option if you want to manually
+partition your hard drive. Be careful: it is a powerful but dangerous choice
+and you can very easily lose all your data. That's why this option is only
+recommended if you have performed custom disk partitioning before, and have
+enough <application>GNU/Linux</application> experience to know what you are
+doing. For more instructions on how to use the
+<application>DiskDrake</application> utility, refer to <phrase
+condition="Starter" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ph1"><xref
+linkend="diskdrake"/></phrase><phrase condition="Discovery"
+xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ph3">the <citetitle
+xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ct1">Managing Your
+Partitions</citetitle> section in the <citetitle>Starter
+Guide</citetitle></phrase><phrase condition="QSP"
+xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ph4">the <citetitle
+xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ct2">Managing Your
+Partitions</citetitle> section in the <citetitle>Starter
+Guide</citetitle></phrase>.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..15d2f21d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakxid-exitInstall" ><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-ti1">Deprecated - It's Done!</title></info>
+  
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-exitInstall.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-im1" revision="1"
+width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+  
+
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa1" revision="3"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-it1"><primary>boot</primary>
+   <secondary>dual-boot</secondary></indexterm>There you are. The installation is now
+complete and your <application>GNU/Linux</application> system is ready to be
+used. Just click on <guibutton>Reboot</guibutton> to restart the
+system. Don't forget to remove the installation media
+(<acronym>CD-ROM</acronym> or floppy). The first thing you should see after
+your computer has finished doing its hardware tests is the bootloader menu,
+which allows you to choose between the <acronym>OS</acronym>es your system
+can boot.</para>
+  
+ <section><info><title xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-exitInstall-ti2">Advanced Options</title></info>
+  
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa2" revision="5">The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button shows more buttons to:</para>
+    
+  <orderedlist inheritnum="ignore" continuation="restarts">
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa3"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-it2"><primary>floppy</primary>
+      <secondary>auto-install</secondary>
+      </indexterm><guibutton>Generate auto-install
+floppy</guibutton>: enables you to create an installation floppy disk which
+will automatically perform a whole installation, similar to the one just
+finished, without the help of an operator.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa4">Note that two different options are available after clicking on that button:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+     <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa5"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-it3">
+	<primary>installation</primary><secondary>replay</secondary>
+	</indexterm><guibutton>Replay</guibutton>. This is
+a partially automated installation. The partitioning step is the only
+interactive procedure.</para>
+     </listitem>
+     <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa6"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-it4">
+	<primary>installation</primary>
+	<secondary>automated</secondary>
+	</indexterm><guibutton>Automated</guibutton>. Fully automated installation:
+<emphasis>the hard disk is completely rewritten, all data is
+lost</emphasis>.</para>
+     </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+
+
+    <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-exitInstall-pa9">This feature is very handy when installing on a number of similar
+machines. See the <link xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+xlink:href="http://www.mandrakelinux.com/drakx/auto_inst.html">Auto
+install</link> section on our web site for more information.</para>
+   </listitem>
+      
+   <listitem>
+    
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa7" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-it5">
+      <primary>installation</primary> <secondary>save package selection</secondary> </indexterm><guibutton>Save package
+selection</guibutton><footnote><para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa8" revision="3">If you chose to save on a floppy, you will need a
+<acronym>FAT</acronym>-formatted floppy. To create one under
+<application>GNU/Linux</application>, type <command>mformat a:</command> or,
+as root, <command>fdformat /dev/fd0</command> followed by <command>mkfs.vfat
+/dev/fd0</command>.</para></footnote>: saves a list of
+the packages selected in this installation. The following screen shows you
+the possible media to use to save the package list onto: you might need to
+fill some parameters when you click on the <guilabel>Next</guilabel> button.</para>
+
+    
+
+    <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-exitInstall-pa10">To use this selection of packages with another installation, perform the
+installation as usual up to the point of the package selection, and choose
+to select individual packages, without worrying about the current package
+selection. Use the floppy icon and select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel>
+option. Then choose the medium which contains the package list. Finally
+click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>: the list of packages you loaded will be
+selected and be installed.</para>
+   </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+ </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d8c8d7eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakxid-formatPartitions" revision="1" condition="extra"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-ti1">Deprecated - Choose Partitions to Be Formatted</title></info>
+
+
+  
+
+ <note>
+  <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa8" revision="2">This step is available only if you chose to reuse existing
+<application>Linux</application> partitions.</para>
+  </note>
+
+ <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-formatPartitions.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-im1" revision="1"
+width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+  
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa2" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-it1">
+   <primary>partitions</primary><secondary>formatting</secondary></indexterm>If you chose to reuse some legacy
+<application>GNU/Linux</application> partitions, you may wish to reformat
+some of them and erase any data they contain. To do so, please select those
+partitions as well.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa3">Please note that it's not necessary to reformat all <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-it2">
+   <primary>partitions</primary><secondary>pre-existing</secondary>
+   </indexterm>pre-existing partitions. You must reformat the
+partitions containing the operating system (such as <literal>/</literal>,
+<literal>/usr</literal> or <literal>/var</literal>) but not the partitions
+containing data you wish to keep (typically <literal>/home</literal>).</para>
+
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa4" revision="1">Please be careful when selecting partitions. After the formatting is
+completed, <emphasis>all data on the selected partitions will be
+deleted</emphasis> and you won't be able to recover it.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa5" revision="1">Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> when you're ready to format the
+partitions.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa6" revision="1">Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you want to choose other
+partitions for your new <application>Mageia</application> operating system
+installation.</para>
+  
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa7">Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> if you wish to select partitions
+which will be checked for <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-it3">
+    <primary>partitions</primary><secondary>bad blocks</secondary></indexterm>bad blocks
+on the disk.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1fe02b2c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakxid-installUpdates"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-installUpdates-ti1" revision="1">Deprecated - Installing Updates from the Internet</title></info>
+  
+  
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-installUpdates.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-installUpdates-im1" revision="1"
+width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+  
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-installUpdates-pa1" revision="4"><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-installUpdates-it1">
+  <primary>installation</primary><secondary>updates</secondary></indexterm> <indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-installUpdates-it2"><primary>updates</primary></indexterm>By the time you install <application>Mageia</application>, it's
+likely that some packages will have been updated since the initial
+release. Bugs may have been fixed, security issues resolved, etc. To allow
+you to benefit from these updates, you're now able to download them from the
+Internet. Select <guilabel>Yes</guilabel> if you have a working Internet
+connection and you want to install any updated packages now, or
+<guilabel>No</guilabel> if you prefer to install updated packages later.</para>
+
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-installUpdates-pa2" revision="2">Choosing <guilabel>Yes</guilabel> will display a list of web locations from
+which updates can be retrieved. You should choose one near to you. A tree
+containing package selections will appear: review the selection, and press
+<guibutton>Install</guibutton> to retrieve and install the selected
+package(s), or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to abort.</para>
+
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-intro.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-intro.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..558f6623
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-intro.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakx-intro" role="titlepage">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakx-intro-ti1">About the Installer Help Manual</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Всі сторінки, описані у цьому підручнику побачити одразу неможливо. Набір
+сторінок, які ви побачите залежить від набору обладнання у вашій системі та
+вибраного вами варіанта встановлення.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA
+3.0 license <link
+xlink:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link></para>
+
+  <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link
+xlink:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link
+xlink:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link></para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..68906cc9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,244 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakx-misc-params"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-ti1">Deprecated - Checking Miscellaneous Parameters</title></info>
+  
+  
+ <section xml:id="drakxid-summary"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-ti2" revision="1">Summary</title></info>
+    
+    
+    <mediaobject condition="expert" xml:id="dx-summary">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-summary.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-im1" revision="1"
+width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+    
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa1" revision="4"><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-it16">
+   <primary>configuration</primary> </indexterm>As a review,
+<application>DrakX</application> will present a summary of information it
+has gathered about your system. Depending on the hardware installed on your
+machine, you may have some or all of the following entries. Each entry is
+made up of the hardware item to be configured, followed by a quick summary
+of the current configuration. Click on the corresponding
+<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button to make any changes.</para>
+
+   <itemizedlist>
+    
+    <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa3" revision="2"><guilabel>Timezone</guilabel>: <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it2"><primary>time zone</primary><secondary>configuration</secondary></indexterm>by
+default, <application>DrakX</application> deduces your time zone based on
+the country you have chosen. You can click on the
+<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button here if this is not correct.</para>
+   </listitem>
+  
+   <listitem>    
+    <para xml:id="drakxidselectCountry" revision="5"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it54a"> <primary>country</primary>
+     <secondary>configuration</secondary>
+     </indexterm><guilabel>Country / Region</guilabel>:
+check the current country selection. If you're not in the country selected
+by <application>DrakX</application>, click on the
+<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button and choose another. If your country
+isn't in the list shown, click on the <guibutton>Other Countries</guibutton>
+button to get a complete country list.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="drakx-pa152a" revision="3"><guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>: if you wish to change your bootloader
+configuration, click this button. This should be reserved to advanced
+users. Refer to the printed documentation or the in-line help about
+bootloader configuration in the <application>Mageia Control
+Center</application>.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="drakx-pa155b"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it57c">
+      <primary>services</primary> <secondary>configuration</secondary>
+      </indexterm><guilabel>Services</guilabel>: with
+this entry you can fine tune which services will be run on your machine. If
+you plan to use this machine as a server it's a good idea to review this
+setup.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   
+     
+   
+    <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa2" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it1"> <primary>keyboard</primary>
+     <secondary>configuration</secondary>
+     </indexterm><guilabel>Keyboard</guilabel>: check
+the current keyboard map configuration and change it if necessary.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa4"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it3"> <primary>mouse</primary>
+      <secondary>configuration</secondary></indexterm><guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>: verify the
+current mouse configuration and click on the button to change it if
+necessary.</para>
+   </listitem>
+
+
+
+   <!--  Printers are no longer in Summary section or Installer - John
+   <listitem>
+
+    <para xml:id="drakxid-configurePrinter" revision="3"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it4"> <primary>printer</primary>
+      <secondary>configuration</secondary></indexterm><guilabel>Printer</guilabel>:
+      clicking on the <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button will
+      open the printer configuration wizard. Consult <phrase xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph2" condition="Discovery">the
+      corresponding chapter of the
+      <citetitle>Starter Guide</citetitle></phrase><phrase condition="Startonly" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph3" revision="1"><xref linkend="printerdrake"/></phrase><phrase condition="only-in-ML-Full-Manual" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph4" revision="1"><xref linkend="printerdrake"/></phrase> for more information on how to
+      set up a new printer. The interface presented in our manual is
+      similar to the one used during installation.</para>
+   </listitem>
+
+-->
+<listitem>
+    <para xml:id="drakxid-sound_config" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it5"> <primary>sound card</primary>
+       <secondary>configuration</secondary>
+       </indexterm><guilabel>Sound card</guilabel>: if a
+sound card is detected on your system, it will be displayed here. If you
+notice the sound card isn't the one actually present on your system, you can
+click on the button and choose a different driver.</para>
+   </listitem>
+    
+
+   <!--  TV cards are no longer in Summary section or Installer - Marja
+   <listitem>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa5" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it6"> <primary>tv card</primary>
+       <secondary>configuration</secondary> </indexterm><guilabel>TV
+       card</guilabel>: if you have a TV card, this is where
+       information about its configuration will be displayed. If you
+       want to try a different driver for your TV card, or its
+       detection wasn't accurate you can click on
+       <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> to try to configure it
+       manually.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   -->
+<listitem>
+    <para xml:id="drakx-pa152b" revision="3"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it57b">
+       <primary>graphical interface</primary>
+       <secondary>configuration</secondary>
+       </indexterm><guilabel>Graphical
+Interface</guilabel>: by default, <application>DrakX</application>
+configures your graphical interface with a resolution that best matches your
+video card and monitor combination. If that doesn't suit you, or
+<application>DrakX</application> could not automatically configure it
+(<guilabel>not configured</guilabel> is displayed), click on
+<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> to reconfigure your graphical
+interface. You can click on <guibutton>Help</guibutton> from within the
+configuration wizard to benefit from full in-line help.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="drakx-pa152c" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it57d">
+      <primary>network</primary>
+      <secondary>configuration</secondary></indexterm> <guilabel>Network</guilabel>: if you
+wish to configure your Internet or local network access, you can do so from
+here. Refer to the printed documentation or use the <application>Mageia
+Control Center</application> after the installation has finished to benefit
+from full in-line help.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-pa62" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-it17"> <primary>network</primary>
+      <secondary>proxy</secondary>
+      </indexterm><guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>: allows
+you to configure <acronym>HTTP</acronym> and <acronym>FTP</acronym> proxy
+addresses if the machine you're installing on is to be located behind a
+proxy server.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="drakx-pa155a"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it58a">
+      <primary>security</primary>
+      <secondary>configuration</secondary></indexterm><guilabel>Security Level</guilabel>:
+this entry allows you to redefine the security level<phrase
+condition="Starter" xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-ph1"> as set in a previous
+step (see <xref linkend="drakxidmiscellaneous"/>)</phrase>.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem>
+    
+    <para xml:id="draxid-tinyfirewall" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it59a"> <primary>firewall</primary>
+    <secondary>configuration</secondary>
+    </indexterm><guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>: if you
+plan to connect your machine to the Internet, it's a good idea to protect
+yourself from intrusions by setting up a firewall. Consult <phrase
+condition="Discovery" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph5">the
+corresponding chapter of the <citetitle>Starter
+Guide</citetitle></phrase><phrase condition="Startonly"
+xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph6" revision="2"><xref
+linkend="tinyfirewall"/></phrase><phrase condition="only-in-ML-Full-Manual"
+xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph7" revision="2"><xref
+linkend="tinyfirewall"/></phrase> for details about firewall settings.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   
+   
+  </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakxidconfigureTimezoneGMT" revision="11" role="manual"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-ti3" revision="2">Time Zone Options</title></info>
+    
+    
+  
+  <mediaobject condition="expert" xml:id="dx-configureTimezoneGMT">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx-configureTimezoneGMT.png" format="PNG"
+xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-im2" revision="2" width="11.5cm"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+  
+  <para condition="no-inline-help" xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa7" revision="3">This dialog appears after selecting a new time zone in the time zones
+list. After you've chosen the location nearest to your time zone, two more
+options are shown.</para>
+  
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa8" revision="1"><application>GNU/Linux</application> manages time in <acronym>GMT</acronym>
+(Greenwich Mean Time) and translates it to local time according to the time
+zone you selected. If the clock on your motherboard is set to local time,
+you may deactivate this by deselecting <guilabel>Hardware clock set to
+GMT</guilabel>, which will let <application>GNU/Linux</application> know
+that the system clock and the hardware clock are in the same time zone. This
+is useful when the machine also hosts another operating system.</para>
+    
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa9" revision="3">The <guilabel>Automatic time synchronization</guilabel> option will
+automatically regulate the system clock by connecting to a remote time
+server on the Internet. For this feature to work, you must have a working
+Internet connection. We recommend that you choose a time server located near
+you or the generic <guilabel>World Wide</guilabel> entry which will select
+the best server for you. This option actually installs a time server which
+can be used by other machines on your local network as well.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  
+
+
+
+  <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxidconfigureServices"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-ti10">Selecting Available Services at Boot Time</title></info>
+  
+  
+  
+  <mediaobject condition="expert" xml:id="dx-configureServices">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-configureServices.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-im5" revision="2"
+width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa57" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it15"> <primary>services</primary>
+   </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-it18">
+   <primary>boot</primary><secondary>services</secondary></indexterm>This dialog is used to select which services you wish to start at
+boot time.</para>
+  
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa58" revision="2"><application>DrakX</application> will list all services available on the
+current installation. Review each of them carefully and uncheck those which
+aren't needed at boot time.</para>
+
+  <tip>
+   <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa59" revision="1">A short explanatory text will be displayed about a service when it is
+selected. However, if you're not sure whether a service is useful or not, it
+is safer to leave the default behavior.</para>
+    </tip>
+
+  <warning>
+   <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa60" revision="2">At this stage, be very careful if you intend to use your machine as a
+server: you probably don't want to start any services which you don't
+need. Please remember that some services can be dangerous if they're enabled
+on a server. In general, select only those services you
+<emphasis>really</emphasis> need.</para>
+  </warning>
+ </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d8dc94e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakxid-miscellaneous"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-miscellaneous-ti1">Deprecated - Security Level</title></info>
+  
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-miscellaneous.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-miscellaneous-im1" revision="1"
+width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-miscellaneous-pa1" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-miscellaneous-it1"><primary>security</primary>
+   <secondary>level</secondary></indexterm>At this point,
+<application>DrakX</application> allows you to choose your machine's
+security level. As a rule of thumb, the security level should be set higher
+if the machine is to contain crucial data, or if it's to be directly exposed
+to the Internet. The trade-off is that a higher security level is generally
+obtained at the expense of ease of use.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-miscellaneous-pa2" revision="3">If you don't know what to choose, keep the default option. You'll be able to
+change it later with the <application>draksec</application> tool<phrase
+condition="not-in-QSPlus" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-miscellaneous-ph1"> (see
+<xref linkend="draksec"/>)</phrase>.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-miscellaneous-pa3" revision="1">Fill the <guilabel>Security Administrator</guilabel> field with the e-mail
+address of the person responsible for security. Security-related messages
+will be sent to that address.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f26852f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" condition="extended" xml:id="drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake"  userlevel="expert"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-ti1">Deprecated - Format Disks with DiskDrake</title></info>
+    
+
+    
+
+    
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa1">At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the
+installation of your <application>Mandriva Linux</application> system. If
+partitions have already been defined, either from a previous installation of
+<application>GNU/Linux</application> or by another partitioning tool, you
+can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard drive partitions must be
+defined.</para>
+    
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa2">To create partitions, you must first select a hard drive. You can select the
+disk for partitioning by clicking on <quote>hda</quote> for the first IDE
+drive, <quote>hdb</quote> for the second, <quote>sda</quote> for the first
+<acronym>SCSI</acronym> drive and so on.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa3">To partition the selected hard drive, you can use these options:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa4"><guibutton>Clear all</guibutton>: this option deletes all partitions on the
+selected hard drive</para></listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa5" revision="1"><guibutton>Auto allocate</guibutton>: this option enables you to
+automatically create <acronym>ext3</acronym> and swap partitions in the free
+space of your hard drive</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa6" revision="1"><guibutton>More</guibutton>: gives access to additional features:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa7"><guibutton>Save partition table</guibutton>: saves the partition table to a
+floppy. Useful for later partition-table recovery if necessary. It is
+strongly recommended that you perform this step.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa8"><guibutton>Restore partition table</guibutton>: allows you to restore a
+previously saved partition table from a floppy disk.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa9"><guibutton>Rescue partition table</guibutton>: if your partition table is
+damaged, you can try to recover it using this option. Please be careful and
+remember that it doesn't always work.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa10"><guibutton>Reload partition table</guibutton>: discards all changes and
+reloads the partition table that was originally on the hard drive.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa11"><guilabel>Removable media auto-mounting</guilabel>: unchecking this option
+will force users to manually mount and unmount removable media such as
+floppies and <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym>s.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem><para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa12"><guibutton>Wizard</guibutton>: use this option if you wish to use a wizard
+to partition your hard drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good
+understanding of partitioning.</para></listitem>
+
+      <listitem><para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa13"><guibutton>Undo</guibutton>: use this option to cancel your changes.</para></listitem>
+
+      <listitem><para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa14"><guibutton>Toggle between normal/expert mode</guibutton>: allows additional
+actions on partitions (type, options, format) and gives more information
+about the hard drive.</para></listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa15"><guibutton>Done</guibutton>: when you are finished partitioning your hard
+drive, this will save your changes back to disk.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <tip>
+      <para xml:id="drakx-pa71a">When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition size
+by using the <keysym>Arrow</keysym> keys of your keyboard.</para>
+    </tip>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa16">Note: you can reach any option using the keyboard. Navigate through the
+partitions using <keycap>Tab</keycap> and the <keycap>Up/Down</keycap>
+arrows.</para>
+    
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa17">When a partition is selected, you can use:<itemizedlist>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa18"><keycombo><keysym>Ctrl-</keysym><keysym>c</keysym></keycombo> to create a
+new partition (when an empty partition is selected)</para>
+	</listitem>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa19"><keycombo><keysym>Ctrl-</keysym><keysym>d</keysym></keycombo> to delete a
+partition</para>
+	</listitem>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa20"><keycombo><keysym>Ctrl-</keysym><keysym>m</keysym></keycombo> to set the
+mount point</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </itemizedlist></para> 
+
+    <note revision="10">
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa21">To get information about the different file system types available, please
+read the <acronym>ext2FS</acronym> chapter from the <citetitle>Reference
+Manual</citetitle>.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <para condition="ppc" xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa22" revision="1">If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS
+<quote>bootstrap</quote> partition of at least 1<acronym>MB</acronym> which
+will be used by the <application>yaboot</application> bootloader. If you opt
+to make the partition a bit larger, say 50<acronym>MB</acronym>, you may
+find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for
+emergency boot situations.</para>
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c86c6352
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section condition="extended" userlevel="expert" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"
+         xml:id="drakxid-resizeFATChoose"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-ti1">Deprecated - Choose FAT Partition to Be Resized</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa1"><indexterm>
+      <primary>partitions</primary>
+
+      <secondary>resize</secondary>
+    </indexterm> More than one
+<application>Microsoft</application> partition has been detected on your
+hard drive. Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to
+install your new <application>Mageia</application> operating system.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa2">Each partition is listed as follows: "Linux name", "Windows name",
+"Capacity".</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa3">"Linux name" is structured: "hard drive type", "hard drive number",
+"partition number" (for example, "sda1").</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa4">"Hard drive type" is "sd"
+  </para>
+
+  <para><!-- (mentioning SCSI doesn't seem needed anymore - Marja) if it is a <acronym>SCSI</acronym> hard drive.
+I rewrote it and added it back - MrsB-->
+This is standard for hard drives now and has nothing to do with SD Memory
+Cards. Hard drives were previously prefixed "hd" for IDE drives or "sd" for
+SATA drives but they are all now prefixed with "sd". </para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa5">"Hard drive number" is actually a letter and always follows "sd": <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa6">"a" means "first hard drive";</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa7">"b" means "second hard drive";</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa8">and so on...</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist></para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa11">"Windows name" is the letter of your hard drive under
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> (the first
+disk or partition is called "C:").</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7eb7d355
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-selectInstallClass" ><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-ti1">Deprecated - Installation Class</title></info>
+  
+
+  <para xml:id="drakx-pa19a" revision="1">This step is shown only if an existing <application>GNU/Linux</application>
+partition is found on your machine.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-selectInstallClass.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-im1" revision="1"
+width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-pa1" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-it1"><primary>installation</primary>
+   <secondary>class</secondary></indexterm><application>DrakX</application> now
+needs to know if you want to install from scratch or upgrade your existing
+<application>Mageia</application> system:</para>
+
+
+
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+
+<listitem>
+   <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-pa3" revision="2"><guilabel>Upgrade</guilabel>.<indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-it2" revision="2">
+     <primary>upgrade</primary></indexterm>If you
+have an older <application>Mageia</application> operating system, this
+option allows you to upgrade it. Your existing partitioning scheme and user
+data won't be altered. Most of the other configuration steps remain
+available and are similar to a standard installation.</para>
+  </listitem>
+
+  <listitem>
+   <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-pa2" revision="4"><!-- Removed - simon, grenoya and marja think it is not needed: - For the most part, this
+    completely wipes out the old system. However, depending on your
+    partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of your existing data
+    (particularly <literal>
+/home</literal> directories) from being
+    overwritten. If you wish to change how your hard drives are
+    partitioned, or to change the file system, you should use this
+      option.-->
+<guilabel>Install</guilabel>. Use this option for everything except
+upgrading an existing Mageia installation.</para>
+  </listitem>
+  
+  
+  
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+
+
+
+<!-- This note is not needed, now. To be used again when we have older Mageia versions from which upgrading is no longer supported. -marja
+ <note revision="12">
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-pa4" revision="1">Using the
+   <quote>Upgrade</quote> option should work fine on <application>Mageia</application>
+   systems running version <literal>1</literal> or later. Performing
+   an upgrade on prior versions is not recommended.</para>
+ </note> -->
+</section>
+
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d60a4e08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-selectKeyboard"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-ti1">Deprecated - Configuring the Keyboard</title></info>
+  
+
+ <note>
+  <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-selectKeyboard-pa5">DrakX shows one or more keyboards, depending on which language(s) you have
+chosen</para>
+  </note>
+  
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-selectKeyboard.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-im1" revision="1"
+width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-pa1" revision="3"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-it1"><primary>keyboard</primary>
+  </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-selectKeyboard-it2">
+  <primary>language</primary><secondary>keyboard</secondary></indexterm>Depending on the language you chose (see <xref
+linkend="drakxid-selectLanguage"/>), <application>DrakX</application>
+automatically selects a particular type of keyboard configuration. Verify
+that the selection suits you or choose another keyboard layout. If you don't
+know which layout your keyboard has, look in the specifications that came
+with your system, or ask the computer vendor. You can also look here: <link
+xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout">en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>
+</para>
+  
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-pa2">If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <guibutton
+revision="1">More</guibutton> to get a full list, and select your keyboard
+there. Note that after having chosen your keyboard, you will return to the
+first screen and it'll seem that a keyboard from this first screen was
+chosen. You can safely ignore this and go on, the keyboard you chose from
+the full list will now be configured! </para>
+  
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-pa3">If you choose a keyboard layout based on a non-Latin alphabet, the next
+dialog will allow you to choose the key binding which will switch the
+keyboard between the Latin and non-Latin layouts.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-pa4" revision="1">Additional information: You may have a keyboard which does not correspond
+exactly to your language: for example, if you are an English-speaking Swiss
+native, you may have a Swiss keyboard. Or if you speak English and are
+located in Québec, you may find yourself in the same situation where your
+native language and country-set keyboard don't match. In either case, this
+installation step will allow you to select an appropriate keyboard. </para>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bcbbfe80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakxid-selectLanguage" ><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-ti1">Deprecated - Choosing your Language</title></info>    
+  
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa1" revision="1">The first step is to choose your preferred language.</para>
+  
+ <figure xml:id="selectLanguage-fig" revision="2"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-ti2">Choosing the Default Language</title></info> <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-selectLanguage.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-im1" revision="4"
+width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure>    
+  
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa2" revision="5"><indexterm
+      xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-it1">
+      <primary>language</primary>
+    </indexterm>First open the tree relative to the
+continent you are located in, and then choose the language you speak. Your
+language choice will affect the installer, the documentation, and the system
+in general. </para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa3" revision="3">Click the <guilabel>Multiple languages</guilabel> button near the botom of
+the list to go to the screen to select additional languages for your
+workstation, thereby installing the language-specific files for system
+documentation and applications. For example, if Spanish friends are to use
+your machine, select English as the default language in the first screen and
+<guilabel>Español</guilabel> in the <guilabel>Multiple languages</guilabel>
+screen.</para>
+
+<note>
+<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa4" revision="2">You are advised to install the language of your keyboard and the language of
+the country you live in as additional languages if they are not the same as
+your preferred language.</para>
+ </note>
+
+  <note>
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa5" revision="2">About <acronym>UTF-8</acronym> (unicode) support: Unicode is a character
+encoding intended to cover all existing languages. <application>Mageia
+Linux</application> uses <acronym>UTF-8</acronym> by default for all
+languages</para>
+
+
+  <orderedlist inheritnum="ignore" continuation="restarts">
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa6" revision="1">If you know UTF-8 encoding doesn't work well for your language, tick the box
+<guilabel>Old compatibility (non-UTF) encoding</guilabel> at the top of the
+<guilabel>Multiple languages</guilabel> screen</para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa7" revision="1">Be aware that this will then apply to all languages on your system</para>
+   </listitem>
+     </orderedlist>
+ </note>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa4" revision="4">Note that you're not limited to choosing a single additional language. You
+may choose several, or even install them all by selecting the <guilabel>All
+languages</guilabel> box. Selecting support for a language means
+translations, fonts, spell checkers, etc. will also be installed for that
+language. Make sure you select all languages which are likely to be useful
+on the machine now, it may be difficult to configure support for languages
+not chosen at install time at a later date.</para>
+
+
+
+ <tip>
+  <para xml:id="drakx-pa18a" revision="2">To switch between the various languages installed on your system, you can
+launch the <command>localedrake</command> command as <literal>root</literal>
+to change the language used by the entire system. Running the command as a
+regular user will only change the language settings for that particular
+user.</para>
+  </tip>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..22336cb3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-selectMouse" ><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-ti1">Deprecated - Configuring your Mouse</title></info>
+  
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-selectMouse.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-im1" revision="1"
+width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-pa1" revision="12"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-it1"><primary>mouse</primary></indexterm>Usually,
+<application>DrakX</application> has no problems detecting the number of
+buttons on your mouse. If it fails to properly recognize it, it assumes you
+have a two-button mouse and will configure it for third-button
+emulation. The third-button mouse button of a two-button mouse can be
+obtained by simultaneously clicking the left and right mouse
+buttons. <application>DrakX</application> will automatically know whether
+your mouse uses a <acronym>PS/2</acronym>, serial or <acronym>USB</acronym>
+interface.</para>
+
+ <note>
+  <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-selectMouse-pa5" revision="2">If you have a 3-button mouse without a wheel, you can choose a
+<guilabel>with Wheel emulation</guilabel>
+mouse. <application>DrakX</application> will then configure your mouse so
+that you can simulate the wheel with it: to do so, press the middle button
+and move your mouse pointer up and down.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-pa2">If for some reason you wish to specify a different type of mouse, select it
+from the list provided.</para>
+
+ <tip>
+  <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-selectMouse-pa6">You can select the <guilabel>Universal | Any PS/2 &amp; USB mice</guilabel>
+entry to choose a <quote>generic</quote> mouse type which will work with
+nearly all mice.</para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-pa3" revision="12">If you choose a mouse other than the default one, a test screen will be
+displayed. Use the buttons and wheel to verify that the settings are correct
+and that the mouse is working correctly. If the mouse isn't working well,
+press the <keycap>space</keycap> bar or <keycap>Enter</keycap> key to cancel
+the test and you will be returned to the mouse list.</para>
+
+  <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-it2">
+   <primary>mouse</primary> <secondary>Wheel</secondary>
+  </indexterm>
+
+ <note>
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-pa4" revision="3">Occasionally wheel mice are not detected automatically, so you will need to
+select your mouse from a list. Be sure to select the one corresponding to
+the port that your mouse is attached to. After selecting a mouse and
+pressing the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button, a mouse image will be
+displayed on-screen. Scroll the mouse wheel to ensure that it is correctly
+activated. As you scroll your mouse wheel, you will see the on-screen scroll
+wheel moving. Test the buttons and check that the mouse pointer moves
+on-screen as you move your mouse about.</para>
+ </note>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectSerialPort-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectSerialPort-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6f179ed1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-selectSerialPort-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" condition="extended" xml:id="drakxid-selectSerialPort" userlevel="expert"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectSerialPort-ti1">Deprecated - Configuring your Mouse</title></info>
+    
+
+    
+
+    
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectSerialPort-pa1" revision="10">Please select the correct port. For example, the <literal>COM1</literal>
+port under <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> is
+named <literal>ttyS0</literal> under <application>GNU/Linux</application>.</para>
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e2a43525
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakxid-setRootPassword">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-ti1">Deprecated - Root Password</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx-setRootPassword.png"
+width="11.5cm" align="center" format="PNG"
+xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it1">
+    <primary>root</primary>
+
+    <secondary>password</secondary>
+  </indexterm>
+
+  <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it2">
+    <primary>password</primary>
+
+    <secondary>root</secondary>
+  </indexterm>
+
+  <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa1">This is the most crucial decision point for the security of your
+<application>GNU/Linux</application> system: you must enter the
+<literal>root</literal> password. <literal>Root</literal> is the system
+administrator and is the only user authorized to make updates, add users,
+change the overall system configuration, and so on. In short,
+<literal>root</literal> can do everything! That's why you must choose a
+password which is difficult to guess: <application>DrakX</application> will
+tell you if the password you chose is too simple. You're not forced to enter
+a password, but we <emphasis>strongly</emphasis> encourage you to do so.
+<application>GNU/Linux</application> is just as prone to operator error as
+any other operating system. Since <literal>root</literal> can overcome all
+limitations and unintentionally erase all data on partitions by carelessly
+accessing the partitions themselves, it is important that it be difficult to
+become <literal>root</literal>.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa2">The password should be a mixture of alphanumeric characters and at least 8
+characters long. Never write down <literal>root</literal>'s password — it
+makes it far too easy to compromise your system.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa3">One caveat: don't make the password too long or too complicated because you
+must be able to remember it!</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa4">The password won't be displayed on screen as you type it. To reduce the
+chance of a blind typing error you will need to enter the password twice. If
+you do happen to make the same typing error twice, you will have to use this
+<quote>incorrect</quote> password when you try to connect as
+<literal>root</literal>, at least for the first time.</para>
+
+  <para revision="4" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa5">You can change the way users are authenticated on your computer by clicking
+on the <guibutton>Authentication method</guibutton> button. The following
+authentication methods are available:</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa7"><guilabel>Local file</guilabel>. Use a local file for all authentication and
+user information. This is the default method.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa8"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it3">
+          <primary>LDAP</primary>
+        </indexterm><indexterm revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it4">
+          <primary>authentication</primary>
+
+          <secondary>LDAP</secondary>
+        </indexterm><guilabel>LDAP</guilabel>. Use an <acronym>LDAP</acronym> server for
+some or all authentication needs. An <acronym>LDAP</acronym> directory
+consolidates certain types of information within your organization.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa9"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it5">
+          <primary>NIS</primary>
+        </indexterm><indexterm revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it6">
+          <primary>authentication</primary>
+
+          <secondary>NIS</secondary>
+        </indexterm><guilabel>NIS</guilabel>. Authenticates users against a
+<acronym>NIS</acronym> domain. This allows you to run a group of computers
+in the same <acronym>NIS</acronym> domain using a common password and group
+file.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem condition="ML-Full-Manual" xml:id="drakxid-setRootPassword-SmartCard">
+      <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa10"><guilabel>Smart Card</guilabel>. Uses <application>SmartCard</application>
+hardware for providing authentication services.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa11"><indexterm revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it7">
+          <primary>authentication</primary>
+
+          <secondary>PDC</secondary>
+        </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-setRootPassword-it8">
+          <primary>authentication</primary>
+
+          <secondary>Active Directory</secondary>
+        </indexterm><guilabel>Windows Domain</guilabel>. Uses a
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> domain
+controller to provide authentication services through <application>Active
+Directory</application>, <application>Microsoft</application>'s
+implementation of <acronym>LDAP</acronym>.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakx-pa6">If you select a method other than <guilabel>Local file</guilabel>, you will
+be asked to provide some parameters, which vary from one method to the
+other. If you don't know those parameters, you should ask your network
+administrator.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakx-pa137a">If you happen to have problems remembering passwords, or if your computer
+will never be connected to the Internet and you absolutely trust everybody
+who uses your computer, you can choose to have <guibutton>No
+password</guibutton>.  Please bear in mind that this is an insecure option,
+and it is not recommended.</para>
+
+    <para revision="2"></para>
+
+    <para revision="2"></para>
+  </note>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..78858054
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner" ><info><title xml:id="setupBootloaderBeginner-title">Deprecated - Installing a Bootloader</title></info>
+  
+
+  
+
+ 
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-setupBootloader.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-im1" revision="1"
+width="11.5cm"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-it1">
+    <primary>bootloader</primary>
+    <secondary>LILO</secondary>
+  </indexterm>
+  <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-it2">
+    <primary>bootloader</primary>
+    <secondary>GRUB</secondary>
+  </indexterm> 
+  <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-it3">
+    <primary>LILO</primary> 
+  </indexterm> 
+  <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-it4">
+    <primary>GRUB</primary>
+  </indexterm>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-pa1" revision="4">A bootloader is a small program which is started by the computer at boot
+time. It's responsible for starting up the whole system. Normally, the
+bootloader installation is totally
+automated. <application>DrakX</application> will analyze the disk boot
+sector and act according to what it finds there:</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem>
+   <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-pa2" revision="1">If a <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> boot
+sector is found, it will replace it with a
+<application>GRUB</application>/<application>LILO</application> boot
+sector. This way you will be able to load either
+<application>GNU/Linux</application> or any other <acronym>OS</acronym>
+installed on your machine.</para>
+  </listitem>
+
+  
+  <listitem>
+   <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-pa3" revision="1">In any other case it will ask you where it should place the boot
+loader. Generally, the <guilabel>First sector of the drive (MBR)</guilabel>
+is the safest place.</para>
+  </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-pa4" revision="1">Choosing <guilabel>Skip</guilabel> won't install a bootloader. Use this
+option only if you know what you're doing.</para>
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setupSCSI.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setupSCSI.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3a0e6f23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setupSCSI.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns52="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" condition="extended" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="drakxid-setupSCSI">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-ti1">Hard Disk Detection and Configuration</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-pa1"><application>DrakX</application> will first attempt to detect any
+<acronym>IDE</acronym> and <acronym>SATA</acronym> devices present in your
+computer. It will also scan for one or more <acronym>PCI</acronym>
+<acronym>SCSI</acronym> cards. If a <acronym>SCSI</acronym> card is found,
+<application>DrakX</application> will attempt to install the correct driver.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-pa2">However, because hardware detection is not foolproof,
+<application>DrakX</application> may fail to detect your
+<acronym>SCSI</acronym> hard drives. If so, you mayl need to specify your
+hardware.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-pa3">If you have had to specify your <acronym>PCI</acronym>
+<acronym>SCSI</acronym> adapter(s), <application>DrakX</application> will
+ask if you want to pass configuration options to it. Allow
+<application>DrakX</application> to probe the hardware to determine any
+card-specific options needed to initialize the adapter.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-pa4"><application>DrakX</application> will usually complete this step without
+issues.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-pa5">If <application>DrakX</application> cannot automatically determine the
+parameters to be passed to the hardware, you'll need to manually configure
+the driver.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-pa6">How you determine these parameters is beyond the scope of this help screen.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3d13a472
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+
+
+  <!-- Created by Marja Van Waes -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" condition="extended" xml:id="drakx-setupX"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-ti1">Deprecated - Configuring X, the Graphical Server</title></info>
+    
+    
+  
+    <mediaobject condition="expert" xml:id="dx-setupX">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-configureX.png"
+format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-im3" revision="2" width="11.5cm"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-it9"> <primary>X Window System</primary>
+    </indexterm><application>X</application> (for X
+Window System) is the heart of the <application>GNU/Linux</application>
+graphical interface on which all the graphical environments
+(<application>KDE</application>, <application>GNOME</application>,
+<application>AfterStep</application>,
+<application>WindowMaker</application>, etc.) bundled with
+<application>Mageia</application> rely on.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa2">You will see a list of different parameters which you can change in order to
+optimize your graphical display.</para>
+
+  <variablelist>
+   <varlistentry xml:id="drakxid-configureX_card_list">
+    <term xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-te1">Graphic Card</term>
+
+
+
+
+
+    <listitem>
+     <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa3">If everything works fine, the installer should detect and configure the
+video card installed on your machine. If the detection or configuration is
+incorrect, you can choose the card installed on your system from a list.</para>
+
+
+    </listitem>
+   </varlistentry>
+   <varlistentry xml:id="drakxid-configureX_monitor">
+    <term xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-te2">Monitor</term>
+    <listitem>
+     <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa4">If the installer fails to detect or configure your monitor properly, you can
+choose from this list the monitor which is connected to your computer.</para>
+    </listitem>
+   </varlistentry>
+   <varlistentry xml:id="drakxid-configureX_resolution">
+    <term xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-te3">Роздільна здатність</term>
+    <listitem>
+     <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa5">Here you can choose the resolutions and color depths available for your
+graphics hardware. Choose the one which best suits your needs (you will be
+able to make changes after the installation). A sample of the chosen
+configuration will be shown in the monitor picture.</para>
+    </listitem>
+   </varlistentry>
+   <varlistentry>
+    <term xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-te4">Перевірити</term>
+    <listitem>
+     
+     <note>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa6">Depending on your hardware, this entry might not appear.</para>
+     </note>
+     
+     
+     <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa7">The system will try to open a graphical screen at the desired resolution. If
+you see the test message during the test and answer <guimenu>Yes</guimenu>,
+then <application>DrakX</application> will proceed to the next step. If you
+don't see it, it means that some part of the auto-detected configuration was
+incorrect and the test will automatically end after a few seconds and return
+you to the menu. Change settings until you get a correct graphical display.</para>
+    </listitem>
+   </varlistentry>
+   <varlistentry xml:id="drakxid-configureXxdm">
+    <term xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-te5">Параметри</term>
+    <listitem>
+     
+     <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa8">This step allows you to choose whether you want your machine to
+automatically switch to a graphical interface at boot. Obviously, you may
+want to select the <guilabel>No</guilabel> option if your machine is to act
+as a server, or if you were not successful in getting the display
+configured.</para>
+    </listitem>
+   </varlistentry>
+  </variablelist>
+ </section>
+  
+  
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-takeOverHdChoose-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-takeOverHdChoose-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..872e219b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-takeOverHdChoose-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" condition="extended" xml:id="drakxid-takeOverHdChoose" userlevel="expert"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-takeOverHdChoose-ti1">Deprecated - Choose drive to install Linux on</title></info>
+    
+
+    
+
+    
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-takeOverHdChoose-pa1" revision="1">Choose the hard drive you want to erase in order to install your new
+<application>Mageia</application> partition. Be careful, all data on this
+drive will be lost and will not be recoverable!</para>
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-takeOverHdConfirm-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-takeOverHdConfirm-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..55df583c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakx-takeOverHdConfirm-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" condition="extended" xml:id="drakxid-takeOverHdConfirm"  userlevel="expert"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-takeOverHdConfirm-ti1" revision="1">Deprecated - Confirm data deletion</title></info>
+    
+
+    
+
+    
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-takeOverHdConfirm-pa1"><!-- The arrows aren't on the button anymore -marja -&#x0003E; -->
+<!-- -&#x0003E;-->
+Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you want to delete all data and
+partitions present on this hard drive. Be careful, after clicking on
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton> you will not be able to recover any data and
+partitions present on this hard drive, including any
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> data.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-takeOverHdConfirm-pa2"><!--&lt;- -->
+Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> to quit this operation without
+losing data and partitions present on this hard drive.</para>
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakxservices.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakxservices.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4fe3282e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/drakxservices.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakxservices" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakxservices-ti1">Manage system services by enabling or disabling them</title><subtitle>drakxservices</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata width="80%" xml:id="drakxservices-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakxservices.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+  <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">drakxservices</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/harddrake2.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/harddrake2.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..dbac2d2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/harddrake2.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="harddrake2"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="harddrake2-ti1">Налаштування обладнання</title>
+
+    <subtitle>harddrake2</subtitle> 
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="harddrake2.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="harddrake2-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>За допомогою цієї програми<footnote>
+      <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">harddrake2</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para>
+    </footnote> ви зможете
+здійснити загальний огляд обладнання вашого комп’ютера. Після запуску
+програма виконує автоматичний пошук всіх компонентів обладнання. З цією
+метою вона використовує програму <code>ldetect</code>, яка у своїй роботі
+покладається на список обладнання з пакунка <code>ldetect-lst</code>.</para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Вікно програми</title>
+
+    <para>Вікно поділено на два стовпчики.</para>
+
+    <para>У лівому стовпчику буде показано список виявленого обладнання. Пристрої буде
+згруповано за категоріями. Натисніть кнопочку &gt;, щоб розгорнути список
+категорії. За допомогою цього стовпчика можна вибирати пристрій зі списку.</para>
+
+    <para>У правому стовпчику буде показано дані щодо позначеного пристрою. За
+допомогою пункту меню <guimenu>Довідка -&gt; Опис полів</guimenu> можна
+отримати докладніший опис показаних полів.</para>
+
+    <para>Відповідно до вибраного типу пристрою, у нижній частині правої панелі вікна
+буде показано одну або дві кнопки:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guibutton>Встановити параметри поточного драйвера</guibutton>: за допомогою
+цієї кнопки можна змінити параметри роботи модуля системи, пов’язаного з
+роботою пристрою. Цією кнопкою варто користуватися лише досвідченим
+користувачам.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guibutton>Запустити інструмент налаштування</guibutton>: отримати доступ до
+засобу налаштовування пристрою. Зазвичай, доступ до цього засобу можна
+отримати безпосередньо з Центру керування Mageia.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Меню програми</title>
+
+    <para><bridgehead>Параметри</bridgehead></para>
+
+    <para>За допомогою пунктів меню <guimenu>Параметри</guimenu> ви можете увімкнути
+автоматичне виявлення деяких типів пристроїв:</para>
+
+    <para><itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>модемів</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>пристроїв Jaz</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>паралельних пристроїв Zip</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>Типово, таке виявлення не виконується, оскільки воно є доволі
+тривалим. Позначте відповідні пункти, якщо на вашому комп’ютері встановлено
+відповідне обладнання. Виявлення буде виконано під час наступного запуску
+програми.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/keyboarddrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/keyboarddrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e901f735
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/keyboarddrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="keyboarddrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="keyboarddrake-ti1">Налаштовування розкладки клавіатури</title>
+
+    
+
+    <!-- 2012-09-02 marja changed the title to "Set up the Keyboard Layout", so it is the same as the title in MCC -->
+<subtitle>keyboarddrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center"
+fileref="keyboarddrake.png" xml:id="keyboarddrake-im1" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Вступ</title>
+
+    <para>The keyboarddrake tool<footnote>
+        <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">keyboarddrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+      </footnote> helps you
+configure the basic layout for the keyboard that you wish to use on
+Mageia. It affects the keyboard layout for all users on the system. It can
+be found in the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled
+"Configure mouse and keyboard".</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Розкладка клавіатури</title>
+
+    <para>Here you can select which keyboard layout you wish to use. The names (listed
+in alphabetical order) describe the language, country, and/or ethnicity each
+layout should be used for.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Тип клавіатури</title>
+
+    <para>This menu lets you select the type of keyboard you are using. If you are
+unsure of which to choose, it is best to leave it as the default type.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/localedrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/localedrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bdf3dae1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/localedrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="localedrake"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="localedrake-ti1">Налаштовування локалізації системи</title>
+
+    <subtitle>localedrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="localedrake.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="localedrake-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Цим модулем<footnote><para>Запустити цю програму можна також за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести
+команду <emphasis role="bold">localedrake</emphasis> від імені
+адміністратора (root).
+  </para></footnote> можна скористатися за
+допомогою розділу «Система» Центру керування Mageia. Пункт модуля підписано
+«Налаштувати локалізацію системи». У разі його вибору буде відкрито вікно,
+за допомогою якого ви можете вибрати мову. Типовий список буде підібрано за
+мовами, які було вибрано під час встановлення системи.</para>
+
+  <para>За допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Додатково</guibutton> можна задіяти режим
+сумісності з застарілими кодуваннями (не-UTF8).</para>
+
+  <para>У другому вікні буде показано список країн, у яких може використовуватися
+вказана мова. Доступ до пунктів країн, яких немає у списку, можна отримати
+за допомогою кнопки <guibutton>Інші країни</guibutton>.</para>
+
+  <para>Щоб внесені вами зміни набули чинності, вам слід вийти з вашого облікового
+запису у системі і знову увійти до нього.</para>
+  
+<section xml:id="input_method">
+      <info>
+          <title xml:id="input_method-ti1">Метод вводу</title>
+      </info>
+  <para>За допомогою сторінки <guilabel>Інші країни</guilabel> ви також можете
+вибрати метод вводу або спосіб введення (зі спадного меню під списком). За
+допомогою способів введення можна вводити символи мов, у яких запис
+здійснюється не за допомогою літер (китайської, японської, корейської тощо).</para>
+  <para> Для азійських і африканських мов типовим способом введення буде вибрано
+IBus, отже потреби у налаштовуванні цього способу введення вручну немає.</para>
+  <para>Інші способи введення (SCIM, GCIN, HIME тощо) також надають подібні
+функціональні можливості. Встановити пакунки цих способів, якщо їх немає у
+контекстному меню, можна за допомогою іншого модуля Центру керування
+Mageia. Див. <xref linkend="rpmdrake"></xref>.</para>
+</section>
+
+</section>
+
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/logdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/logdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4a9c0b31
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/logdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="logdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="logdrake-ti1">Перегляд системного журналу</title>
+
+    <subtitle>logdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="logdrake-im1"
+format="PNG" fileref="logdrake.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">logdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para>
+    </footnote> is found in the Mageia
+Control Center System tab, labelled "<guilabel>View and search system
+logs</guilabel>".</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>To do a search in the logs</title>
+
+    <para>First, enter the key string you want to look for in the <emphasis
+role="bold">Matching</emphasis> field and/or the key string you want to
+<emphasis>do not</emphasis> wish to see amongst the answers in the field
+<emphasis role="bold">but not matching</emphasis>. Then select the file(s)
+to search in the <guilabel>Choose file</guilabel> field. Optionally, it is
+possible to limit the search to only one day. Select it in the <emphasis
+role="bold">Calendar</emphasis>, using the little arrows on each side of the
+month and year, and check "<guibutton>Show only for the selected
+day</guibutton>". At last, click on the <guibutton>search</guibutton> button
+to see the results in the window called <guilabel>Content of the
+file</guilabel>. It is possible to save the results in the .txt format by
+clicking on the <emphasis role="bold">Save</emphasis> button.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>The <guibutton>Mageia Tools Logs</guibutton> houses the logs from the Mageia
+configuration tools such as the Mageia Control Center tools.  These logs are
+updated each time a configuration is modified.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>To configure a mail alert</title>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Mail alert</guibutton> automatically checks the system load and
+the services every hour and if necessary sends an e-mail to the configured
+address.</para>
+
+    <para>To configure this tool, click on the <emphasis role="bold">Mail
+Alert</emphasis> button and then, in the next screen, on the<guibutton>
+Configure the mail alert system</guibutton> drop down button. Here, all the
+running services are displayed and you can choose which ones you want to
+look watch. (See screenshot above).</para>
+
+    <para>The following services can be watched :</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Служба Webmin</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Поштовий сервер postfix</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Сервер FTP</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Сервер World Wide Web Apache</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Сервер SSH</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Сервер Samba</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Служба xinetd</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>BIND Domain Name Resolve</para>
+
+        <para><mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="logdrake1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>In the next screen, select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel> value you consider
+unacceptable. The load represents the demand to a process, a high load slows
+the system down and a very high load may indicate that a process has gone
+out of control. The default value is 3. We recommend setting the load value
+to 3 times the number of processors.</para>
+
+    <para>In the last screen, enter the <guilabel>Email address</guilabel> of the
+person to be warned and the <guilabel>Email server</guilabel> to use (local
+or on the Internet</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mageia-doc-readme.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mageia-doc-readme.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f8a12504
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mageia-doc-readme.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="mageia-test-document" xml:lang="uk">
+    <info>
+        <title>Mageia Test Document</title>
+    </info>
+    
+<para>Testing testing</para>
+<para>This is a <application>Mageia</application> test document. This is an
+absolute minimal format XML document.  As you can see: It's not very
+complex...</para>
+    <para>I nicked the container from an old <application>Mandriva</application> XML
+document and have been using it to play with XML rather than alter any of
+the main documentation files.  <note userlevel="beginner"><para>This is an interesting note with a revision tag..</para></note>    
+    
+    <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem><para>This is the first item in a list</para></listitem>
+        <listitem><para>This is the second item</para></listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+    </para>
+    
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-boot.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-boot.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..63724327
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-boot.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="uk" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="mcc-boot">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-boot-ti1">Завантаження</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-boot.png" format="PNG"
+revision="1" xml:id="mcc-boot-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your boot
+steps. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Налаштовування послідовності завантаження</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakboot"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakboot--boot"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakedm"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakboot.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakboot--boot.xml"></xi:include>
+
+    <xi:include href="drakedm.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-hardware.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-hardware.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..de61f388
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-hardware.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="uk" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="mcc-hardware">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-hardware-ti1">Обладнання</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-hardware.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="mcc-hardware-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your
+hardware. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Налаштовування обладнання</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="harddrake2"/><emphasis>Переглянути і налаштувати
+обладнання</emphasis></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="draksound"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Налаштовування графіки</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drak3d"/><emphasis> = Configure 3D Desktop effects</emphasis></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="XFdrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Configure mouse and keyboard</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="keyboarddrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="mousedrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Configure printing and scanning</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="system-config-printer"/><emphasis> = Set up the printer(s),
+the print job queues, ...</emphasis></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="scannerdrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Інше</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakups"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+	<xi:include href="harddrake2.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="draksound.xml"></xi:include>
+
+        <xi:include href="drak3d.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="XFdrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="keyboarddrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="mousedrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="system-config-printer.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="scannerdrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakups.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-intro.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-intro.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0526a4bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-intro.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xml:id="mcc-intro"><info><title xml:id="mcc-intro-ti1">About the Manual for the Mageia Control Center</title></info>
+
+ 
+	<para>The Mageia Control Center (MCC) has eight different options to choose from
+in the left column. Each of these options gives a different set of tools
+that can be selected in the big right panel.</para>
+
+	<para>The eight following chapters are about those eight options and the related
+tools.</para>
+
+	<para>The titles of those pages will often be the same as the titles of the tool
+screens.</para>
+
+        <para>There is also a search bar available, which you can access by clicking on
+the "Search" tab in the left column.</para>
+  
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-localdisks.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-localdisks.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f05b4f01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-localdisks.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="mcc-localdisks" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-localdisks-ti1">Local disks</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="mcc-localdisks-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="mcc-localdisks.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to manage or share your
+local disks. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist><title>Local disks</title>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="drakdisk"></xref></para></listitem>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--removable"></xref></para></listitem>
+  		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--fileshare"></xref></para></listitem>
+	          </orderedlist>
+
+ <xi:include href="drakdisk.xml"></xi:include>
+
+ <xi:include href="diskdrake--removable.xml"></xi:include>
+
+ <xi:include href="diskdrake--fileshare.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-network.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-network.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..73e749d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-network.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-network" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-network-ti1">Network and Internet</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"
+fileref="mcc-network.png" xml:id="mcc-network-im1" /> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several network tools. Click on a link
+below to learn more.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <orderedlist>
+        <title>Manage your network devices</title>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="draknetcenter"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakconnect"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakconnect--del"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <orderedlist>
+        <title>Personalize and Secure your network</title>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakproxy"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakgw"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="draknetprofile"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakvpn"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <orderedlist>
+        <title>Інше</title>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakhosts"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+  <xi:include href="draknetcenter.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakconnect.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakconnect--del.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakproxy.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakgw.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="draknetprofile.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakvpn.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakhosts.xml"/>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-networkservices.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-networkservices.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a020cc33
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-networkservices.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="uk" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="mcc-networkservices">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-networkservices-ti1">Мережеві служби</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-networkservices.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="mcc-networkservices-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This screen and the one for <emphasis>Sharing</emphasis> are only visible if
+the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can choose
+between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link below or
+on <xref linkend="mcc-sharing"/>to learn more.</para>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Мережеві служби</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_dhcp"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_bind"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_squid"/></para>
+  </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_ntp"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_sshd"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+  </orderedlist>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_dhcp.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_bind.xml"></xi:include>
+
+        <xi:include href="drakwizard_squid.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_ntp.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_sshd.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-networksharing.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-networksharing.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..81138111
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-networksharing.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="mcc-networksharing" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-networksharing-ti1">Спільний доступ</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="mcc-networksharing-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="mcc-networksharing.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools for sharing drives and
+directories. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+	  <listitem>
+		  <orderedlist><title>Налаштовування доступу до ресурсів Windows</title>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--smb"></xref></para></listitem>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="draksambashare"></xref><emphasis> = Share drives and
+directories with Windows (SMB) systems</emphasis></para></listitem>
+	  </orderedlist></listitem>
+  	  <listitem>
+		  <orderedlist><title>Configure NFS shares</title>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--nfs"></xref></para></listitem>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="draknfs"></xref></para></listitem>
+	  </orderedlist></listitem>
+	  <listitem>
+		  <orderedlist><title>Configure WebDAV shares</title>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--dav"></xref></para></listitem>
+	  </orderedlist></listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake--smb.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="draksambashare.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake--nfs.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="draknfs.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake--dav.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-security.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-security.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..725a0fa6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-security.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="uk" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="mcc-security">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-security-ti1">Безпека</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-security.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="mcc-security-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several security tools. Click on a
+link below to learn more.</para>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Безпека</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="msecgui"/><emphasis> = Configure system security, permissions
+and audit</emphasis></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakfirewall"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="draksec"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakinvictus"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakguard"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+
+  <xi:include href="msecgui.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakfirewall.xml"></xi:include>
+  <xi:include href="draksec.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakinvictus.xml"></xi:include> 
+  <xi:include href="drakguard.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-sharing.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-sharing.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..33e9d144
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-sharing.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="uk" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="mcc-sharing">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-sharing-ti1">Sharing</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-sharing.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="mcc-sharing-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This screen and the one for <emphasis>Network Services</emphasis> are only
+visible if the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can
+choose between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link
+below or on <xref linkend="mcc-networkservices"/>to learn more.</para>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Sharing</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_proftpd"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_apache2"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_proftpd.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_apache2.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-system.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-system.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..79b3e526
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mcc-system.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="uk" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="mcc-system">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-system-ti1">System</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="mcc-system.png" xml:id="mcc-system-im1"
+revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several system and administration
+tools. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Керування системними службами</title>
+        <listitem>
+		<para> <xref linkend="drakauth"></xref> </para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakxservices"></xref></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+		<para><xref linkend="drakfont"></xref></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Локалізація</title>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><xref linkend="drakclock"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><xref linkend="localedrake"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+</listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Інструменти адміністрування</title>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><xref linkend="logdrake"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><xref linkend="drakconsole"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+	      <para><xref linkend="userdrake"></xref><emphasis> = Manage users on
+system</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><xref linkend="transfugdrake"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><xref linkend="draksnapshot-config"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+</listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakauth.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakxservices.xml"></xi:include>
+
+   <xi:include href="drakfont.xml"></xi:include>
+
+   <xi:include href="drakclock.xml"></xi:include>
+
+   <xi:include href="localedrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+   <xi:include href="logdrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+   <xi:include href="drakconsole.xml"></xi:include>
+
+   <xi:include href="userdrake.xml"></xi:include> 
+
+   <xi:include href="transfugdrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+   <xi:include href="draksnapshot-config.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mgaapplet-config.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mgaapplet-config.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ed8883b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mgaapplet-config.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mgaapplet-config" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mgaapplet-config-ti1">Configure updates frequency</title>
+
+    <subtitle>mgaapplet-config</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center"
+xml:id="mgaapplet-config-im1" format="PNG" fileref="mgaapplet-config.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">mgaapplet-config</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+    </footnote> is present in the Mageia
+Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Software
+management</emphasis>. It is also available by a <guimenu>right click /
+Updates configuration</guimenu> on the red icon <inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="MageiaUpdate1.png"/> </imageobject></inlinemediaobject> in the system tray.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para>The first slider allows you to change how frequently Mageia will check for
+updates and the second the delay after booting before the first check.  The
+check box gives you the option to be warned when a new Mageia release is
+out.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/mousedrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mousedrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..14b85f89
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/mousedrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mousedrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mousedrake-ti1">Налаштовування пристрою введення (миша, сенсорна панель)</title>
+
+    <subtitle>mousedrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="mousedrake-im1" revision="1"
+fileref="mousedrake.png" align="center" format="PNG" /> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">mousedrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para></footnote> is present in the Mageia
+Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>.</para>
+
+  <para>As you must have a mouse to install Mageia, that one is already installed by
+Drakinstall. This tool allows installation of another mouse.</para>
+
+  <para>The mice are sorted by connection type and then by model. Select your mouse
+and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Most of the time "Universal / Any
+PS/2 &amp; USB mice"' is suitable for a recent mouse. The new mouse is
+immediately taken into account.</para>
+
+  </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/msecgui.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/msecgui.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fb727a26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/msecgui.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="msecgui" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <info>
+	  <title xml:id="msecgui-ti1">MSEC: System Security and Audit</title><subtitle>msecgui</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="msecgui-im1" revision="1" align="center"
+format="PNG" fileref="msecgui.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>  
+
+  <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">msecgui</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/rpmdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/rpmdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f9110d70
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/rpmdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,218 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="rpmdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  <!--2012-09-03 marja expanded xml:id's of section and title below, because they conflicted with identical xml:id's in another page of MCC help, also replaced first para in some sections with title tags, removed figure tags-->
+<info annotations="simonnzg 6jan2013">
+    <title xml:id="rpmdrake-ti1">Керування програмним забезпеченням (Встановлення або вилучення програм)</title>
+
+    <subtitle>rpmdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="rpmdrake-im1" revision="1"
+fileref="rpmdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  
+
+  <section xml:id="rpmdrake-introduction">
+    <title xml:id="rpmdrake-introduction-ti1">Вступ до rpmdrake</title>
+
+    <para>За допомогою цього інструмента<footnote>
+        <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">rpmdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para>
+      </footnote>, також
+відомого за назвою drakrpm, можна встановлювати, вилучати і оновлювати
+пакунки з програмним забезпеченням. Програма є графічним інтерфейсом до
+URPMI. Під час кожного запуску вона перевірятиме списки пакунків у інтернеті
+(які називаються «носіями» пакунків), отримані безпосередньо з офіційних
+серверів Mageia, і показуватиме список найсвіжіших пакунків з програмним
+забезпеченням для вашої системи. Система фільтрування надає вам змогу
+переглядати списки пакунків лише певного типу: ви можете переглянути список
+встановлених пакунків (типове фільтрування) або лише доступні
+оновлення. Також можна ознайомитися зі списком невстановлених пакунків. Ви
+можете знайти пакунок за назвою або словом у резюме опису пакунка, а також
+на назвами файлів, які є частиною пакунка.</para>
+
+    <para>Для належної роботи rpmdrake слід налаштувати параметри сховищ пакунків за
+допомогою <xref linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"/>.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Основні частини вікна</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake1_uk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></screenshot>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Фільтрування за типом пакунка:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>За допомогою цього фільтра ви можете звузити список пакунків до певного
+типу. Під час першого запуску програми для керування пакунками у списку
+будуть лише програми з графічним інтерфейсом. Ви можете наказати програмі
+показувати всі пакунки і всі залежності цих пакунків разом з бібліотеками
+або наказати показувати лише групи пакунків (цілісні програмні комплекси),
+лише оновлення або лише пакунки, портовані з новіших версій Mageia Linux.</para>
+
+        <warning>
+          <para>Типовий режим фільтрування призначено для користувачів, які не мають
+значного досвіду користування Linux або Mageia, тобто тих, кому не потрібні
+програми, які керуються командним рядком, чи програми для
+спеціалістів. Оскільки ви читаєте цю документацію, ви очевидно зацікавлені у
+розширенні ваших знань щодо Mageia, отже, краще вибрати варіант «Всі».</para>
+        </warning>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><firstterm> <emphasis role="bold">Фільтрування за станом пакунка:</emphasis>
+</firstterm></para>
+
+        <para>За допомогою цього фільтрування ви можете наказати програмі показати лише
+встановлені пакунки, пакунки, які ще не встановлено, або всі пакунки,
+встановлені і невстановлені.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Режим пошуку:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>Натисніть цю піктограму, щоб вибрати дані, у яких виконуватиметься пошук:
+назви пакунків, резюме, повні описи або списки файлів, що містяться у
+пакунках.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Поле «Знайти»:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>У цьому полі можна вказати одне або декілька ключових слів. Якщо для пошук
+ви хочете використати декілька ключових слів, відокремте їх символом
+«|». Наприклад, якщо ви хочете знайти пакунки для mplayer або xine, вкажіть:
+«mplayer | xine» (без лапок).</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Витерти все:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>За допомогою натискання цієї піктограми можна вилучити всі ключові слова у
+полі «Знайти».</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Список категорій:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>На цій панелі наведено список всіх програм і пакунків, розподілених за
+категоріями та підкатегоріями.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Панель опису:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>На цій панелі буде показано назву пакунка, резюме та короткий опис. Тут ви
+зможете знайти багато корисних даних щодо позначеного пакунка, а також точні
+дані щодо пакунка, включених до нього файлів та список змін у пакунку,
+створений супровідниками пакунка.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Стовпчик стану</title>
+
+    <para>Після належного визначення параметрів фільтрування ви можете шукати
+програмне забезпечення або за категоріями (у області 6 на рисунку) або за
+назвою, резюме, описом тощо, за допомогою області 4. Список пакунків, які
+відповідають вашому запиту на вказаних вами носіях пакунків, буде показано з
+позначками стану (встановлено, не встановлено, оновлення). Щоб змінити цей
+стан, просто позначте або зніміть позначку з пункту перед назвою пакунка у
+списку і натисніть кнопку <guibutton>Застосувати</guibutton>.</para>
+
+    <para><table>
+        <title/>
+
+        <tgroup cols="2" align="left">
+          <colspec align="center"/>
+
+          <thead>
+            <row>
+              <entry align="center">Піктограма</entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle" align="center">Умовне позначення</entry>
+            </row>
+          </thead>
+
+          <tbody>
+            <row>
+              <entry><mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake2_uk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle">Цей пакунок вже встановлено</entry>
+            </row>
+
+            <row>
+              <entry><mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake3_uk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle">Цей пакунок буде встановлено</entry>
+            </row>
+
+            <row>
+              <entry><mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake4_uk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle">Стан цього пакунка змінювати не можна</entry>
+            </row>
+
+            <row>
+              <entry><mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake5_uk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle">Цей пакунок є оновленням</entry>
+            </row>
+
+            <row>
+              <entry><mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake6_uk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle">Цей пакунок буде вилучено</entry>
+            </row>
+          </tbody>
+        </tgroup>
+      </table></para>
+
+    <para>Приклади на наведеному вище знімку:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Якщо зняти позначку з пункту digikam (значок з зеленою стрілкою означає, що
+цей пакунок встановлено), піктограма стану стане червоною із зображенням
+стрілки вгору. Пакунок буде вилучено одразу після натискання кнопки
+<guibutton>Застосувати</guibutton>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Якщо позначити пункт qdigidoc (пакунок не встановлено, як можна бачити зі
+стовпчика стану), у стовпчику стану з’явиться помаранчева піктограма стану
+зі стрілкою вниз. Пакунок буде встановлено одразу після натискання кнопки
+<guibutton>Застосувати</guibutton>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Залежності</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake7_uk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></screenshot>
+
+    <para>Для належної роботи деяких пакунків доведеться встановити інші пакунки, які
+називають залежностями. Ці пакунки містять бібліотеки або додаткові
+інструменти. Якщо вам трапиться такий пакунок, rpmdrake покаже інформаційне
+вікно, за допомогою якого ви зможете погодитися зі встановленням
+залежностей, скасувати встановлення або отримати додаткові дані
+(див. вище). Також ви зможете вибрати потрібний вам пакунок, якщо залежності
+можна вдовольнити у декілька способів. rpmdrake просто покаже вам вікно зі
+списком варіантів задоволення залежностей і кнопками отримання додаткових
+даних та вибору пакунка, який слід встановити.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-icons.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-icons.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ab972ed8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-icons.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 26 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="sample-page-icons">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="BId-sample-page-icons-ti1">Simple sample page</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <note>
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-sample-page-icons-pa1">Paragraph with <emphasis>note</emphasis> icon.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-sample-page-icons-pa2">Paragraph with <emphasis>tip</emphasis> icon.</para>
+  </tip>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-sample-page-icons-pa3">Paragraph with <emphasis>warning</emphasis> icon.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-sample-page-icons-pa4"><emphasis>If you want to use other icons, make sure you import some cc-by-sa
+ones first.</emphasis></para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-itemized-list.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-itemized-list.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e015a56d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-itemized-list.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+
+
+
+
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 18 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="sample-page-itemized-list"><info><title xml:id="sample-page-itemized-list-ti1">Sample page with itemized list</title></info>
+
+
+   
+
+  <para xml:id="sample-page-itemized-list-pa1" revision="1">If you want to copy this list to your page, don't forget to adjust the page
+names and paragraph numbers in the code </para>
+  
+  <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem>
+  <para xml:id="sample-page-itemized-list-pa2" revision="1">First item on the list</para>
+  </listitem>
+  
+   <listitem>  
+  
+  <para xml:id="sample-page-itemized-list-pa3" revision="1">Second item on the list</para>
+  </listitem>
+  
+   <listitem>  
+  
+   <para xml:id="sample-page-itemized-list-pa4" revision="1">Та інше</para>
+  </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+  
+    </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-picture.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-picture.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..65cdeed7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-picture.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="sample-page-picture"><!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 24 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- Same day, replaced <literal>
+ tags with <code> tags -->
+<!-- Same day, replaced <literal>
+ tags with <example> tags arond the code for the screenhot and around part of the text in a paragraph .-->
+<!-- Same day nested <code>
+ inside <para> -->
+<!-- sams day, gave up on finding correct way of showing code -->
+<info><title xml:id="sample-page-picture-ti1">Sample page with picture</title></info>
+
+
+   
+
+
+
+
+
+ 
+ 
+   
+
+  <para xml:id="sample-page-picture-pa1" revision="1">Look at the xml code of this page to see how the picture below was inserted</para>
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-license.png" format="PNG"
+align="center" xml:id="acceptLicense-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+  
+  
+  
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-sections.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-sections.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b0d81212
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-sections.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 18 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="sample-page-sections"><info><title xml:id="sample-page-sections-ti1">Sample page with several sections</title></info>
+
+<section xml:id="first-section"><info><title xml:id="first-section-ti2" >This is the first section</title></info>  
+   <para xml:id="sample-page-sections-pa2" revision="1">This section is nested in a section that covers the whole page</para>
+   
+   </section>
+
+
+
+   
+   
+   <section xml:id="second-section"><info><title xml:id="second-section-ti3" >This is the second section</title></info>  
+   <para xml:id="sample-page-sections-pa2" revision="1">In html you can link to it by adding #second-section to the link to this
+page</para>
+   
+   </section>
+   
+   <section xml:id="third-section"><info><title xml:id="third-section-ti3" >This is the third section</title></info>  
+   
+   <para xml:id="sample-page-sections-pa3" revision="1">And this section will be shown when going to
+<code>/sample-page-sections#third-section</code> </para>
+   
+    </section>
+    
+    </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-simple.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-simple.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..878bb613
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/sample-page-simple.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 18 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="sample-page-simple"><info><title xml:id="sample-page-simple-ti1">Simple sample page</title></info>
+
+ <para> TEST3: Again writing a line to test whether version number is increased on
+saving this file </para>
+   
+
+  <para xml:id="sample-page-simple-pa1" revision="1">You can use this page to make another simple page, but if you do so, don't
+forget to not only change the name of this file, but to change the page name
+in the code of this page, too </para>
+  
+  <para xml:id="sample-page-simple-pa2" revision="1">Everywhere where you see <code>sample-page-simple</code> in the code, you
+should change that into your page name</para>
+  
+  <para xml:id="sample-page-simple-pa3" revision="1">If you want to make more paragraphs, copy one and change its number in the
+code, for instance <code>pa3</code> to <code>pa4</code> and then change the
+content. It is possible to put a paragraph between existing ones by adding a
+letter to the number, e.g. <code>pa2a</code> </para>
+  
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/scannerdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/scannerdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8dd5192a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/scannerdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,224 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="scannerdrake"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="scannerdrake-ti1">Налаштовування сканера</title>
+    <subtitle>scannerdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+
+
+  <section xml:id="scannerinstallation">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="scannerinstallation-ti1">Встановлення</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>This tool <footnote>
+        <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">scannerdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+      </footnote> allows you to configure a
+single scanner device or a multifunction device which includes scanning. It
+also allows you to share local devices connected to this computer with a
+remote computer or to access remote scanners.</para>
+
+    <para>When you start this tool for the first time, you may get the following
+message:</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis>"SANE packages need to be installed to use scanners</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para><emphasis>Do you want to install the SANE packages?"</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>Choose <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> to continue. It will install
+<code>scanner-gui</code> and <code>task-scanning</code> if they are not yet
+installed.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="scannerdrake-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>If your scanner is identified correctly, so if in the above screen you see
+the name of your scanner, the scanner is ready for use with, for instance,
+<emphasis>XSane</emphasis> or <emphasis>Simple Scan</emphasis>.</para>
+
+    <para>In that case, you might now want to want to configure the <emphasis>Scanner
+sharing</emphasis> option. You can read about it in the <xref
+linkend="scannersharing"/>.</para>
+
+    
+    <para>However, if your scanner hasn't been correctly identified, and checking its
+cable(s) and power switch and then pressing <emphasis>Search for new
+scanners</emphasis> doesn't help, you'll need to press <emphasis>Add a
+scanner manually</emphasis>.</para>
+
+    <para>Choose the brand of your scanner in the list you see, then its type from the
+list for that brand and click <emphasis>Ok</emphasis></para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake2.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="scannerdrake-im2"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>If you can't find your scanner in the list, then click
+<emphasis>Cancel</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>Please check whether your scanner is supported on the <link
+xlink:href="http://www.sane-project.org/lists/sane-mfgs-cvs.html">SANE:
+Supported Devices</link> page and ask for help in the <link
+xlink:href="http://forums.mageia.org/en/">forums</link>.</para>
+    </note>
+
+<figure  xml:id="choosescannerport">
+<info>
+      <title xml:id="choosescannerport-ti1">Choose port</title>
+    </info> <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake3.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="scannerdrake-im3"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure>
+
+    <para>You can leave this setting to <emphasis>Auto-detect available
+ports</emphasis> unless your scanner's interface is a parallel port. In that
+case, select <emphasis>/dev/parport0</emphasis> if you have only one.</para>
+
+    <para>After clicking <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>, in most cases you will see a screen
+similar to the one below.</para>
+<para>If you don't get that screen, then please read the <xref
+linkend="scannerextrasteps"/>.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake4.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="scannerdrake-im4"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="scannersharing">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="scannersharing-ti2">Scannersharing</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake5.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="scannerdrake-im5"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Here you can choose whether the scanners connected to this machine should be
+accessible by remote machines and by which remote machines. You can also
+decide here whether scanners on remote machines should be made available on
+this machine.</para>
+
+    <para>Scanner sharing to hosts : name or IP address of hosts can be added or
+deleted from the list of hosts allowed to access the local device(s), on
+this computer.</para>
+
+    <para>Usage of remote scanners : name or IP address of hosts can added or deleted
+from the list of hosts which give access to a remote scanner.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake6.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="scannerdrake-im6"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Scanner sharing to hosts: you can add host.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake7.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="scannerdrake-im7"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Scanner sharing to hosts: specify which host(s) to add, or allow all remote
+machines.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake8.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="scannerdrake-im8"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>"All remote machines" are allowed to access the local scanner.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake9.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="scannerdrake-im9"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>If the package <emphasis>saned</emphasis> is not yet installed, the tool
+offers to do it.</para>
+
+    <para>At the end, the tool will alter these files:</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/saned.conf</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/net.conf</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/dll.conf </emphasis>to add or comment the directive
+"net"</para>
+
+    <para>It will also configure <emphasis>saned</emphasis> and
+<emphasis>xinetd</emphasis> to be started on boot.</para>
+  </section>
+
+<section xml:id="scannerspecifics">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="scannerspecifics-ti2">Специфічні поради</title>
+    </info>  
+
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Hewlett-Packard</para>
+
+        <para>Most HP scanners are managed from <emphasis>HP Device Manager</emphasis>
+(hplip) which also manages printers. In this case, this tool does not allow
+you to configure it and invites you to use <emphasis>HP Device
+Manager</emphasis>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Epson</para>
+
+        <para>Drivers are available from <link
+xlink:href="http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX">this
+page</link>. When indicated, you must install the
+<emphasis>iscan-data</emphasis> package first, then
+<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> (in this order). It is possible that the
+<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> package will generate a warning about a conflict
+with <emphasis>sane</emphasis>. Users have reported that this warning can be
+ignored.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+</section>
+
+<section xml:id="scannerextrasteps">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="scannerextrasteps-ti1">Додаткові кроки зі встановлення</title>
+    </info>  
+
+    <para>It is possible that after selecting a port for your scanner in the <xref
+linkend="choosescannerport"/> screen, you need to take one or more extra
+steps to correctly configure your scanner.</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+
+      <listitem>
+<para>In some cases, you're told the scanner needs its firmware to be uploaded
+each time it is started. This tool allows you to load it into the device,
+after you installed it on your system. In this screen you can install the
+firmware from a CD or a Windows installation, or install the one you
+downloaded from an Internet site of the vendor.</para><para>
+    When your device's firmware needs to be loaded, it can take a long time at
+each first usage, possibly more than one minute. So be patient.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+<para>Also, you may get a screen telling you to adjust the
+<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/"name_of_your_SANE_backend".conf file.</emphasis> </para>
+      </listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Read those or other instructions you get carefully and if you don't know
+what to do, feel free to ask for help in the <link
+xlink:href="http://forums.mageia.org/en/">forums</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+</itemizedlist>
+      
+ </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/software-management.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/software-management.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6339ddfc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/software-management.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="uk" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk"
+xml:id="software-management">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="software-management-ti1">Керування програмами</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="software-management-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="software-management.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools for software
+management. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+  <orderedlist><title>Керування програмами</title>
+	  <listitem>
+  <para><xref linkend="rpmdrake"></xref></para>
+  </listitem>
+	  <listitem>
+  <para><xref linkend="MageiaUpdate"></xref><emphasis> = Update your
+system</emphasis></para>
+  </listitem>
+	  <listitem>
+    <para><xref linkend="mgaapplet-config"></xref></para>
+    </listitem>
+	    <listitem>
+    <para><xref linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"></xref><emphasis> = Configure media
+sources for install and update</emphasis></para>
+    </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+
+    <xi:include href="rpmdrake.xml"></xi:include>
+    <xi:include href="MageiaUpdate.xml"></xi:include>
+     <xi:include href="mgaapplet-config.xml"></xi:include>
+     <xi:include href="drakrpm-edit-media.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/system-config-printer.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/system-config-printer.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..79df705e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/system-config-printer.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,352 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="system-config-printer">
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!--  Language proof JohnR 2012/08/28 -->
+<!-- 2012-09-03 marja: made the link to Complete the installation process work (I hope) 
+ Lebarhon : added All in one devices in the chapter "Hewlett-Packard printers" 12/13-->
+<title xml:id="system-config-printer-ti1">Встановлення і налаштовування принтера</title>
+
+    <subtitle>system-config-printer</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center"
+xml:id="system-config-printer-im1" format="PNG"
+fileref="system-config-printer.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <section xml:id="introduction">
+    <title xml:id="introduction-ti1">Вступ</title>
+
+    <para>Завданнями з друку у Mageia керує сервер, який називається CUPS. У сервера є
+власний <link ns2:title="CUPS" ns2:href="http://localhost:631">інтерфейс
+налаштовування</link>, доступ до якого здійснюється за допомогою програми
+для перегляду сторінок інтернету. Втім, у Mageia передбачено і власний
+інструмент для встановлення і налаштовування драйверів принтерів, який
+називається system-config-printer і використовується також у інших
+дистрибутивах, зокрема Fedora, Mandriva, Ubuntu та openSUSE.</para>
+
+    <para>Вам варто увімкнути доступ до сховищ пакунків, які не є вільними, (non-free)
+до того, як ви продовжите встановлення, оскільки пакунки деяких з драйверів
+зберігаються лише у цьому сховищі.</para>
+
+    <para>Керувати встановленням драйверів до принтерів можна за допомогою розділу
+<guilabel>Обладнання</guilabel> Центру керування Mageia. Вам просто слід
+вибрати пункт <guilabel>Налаштувати друк і сканування</guilabel><footnote>
+        <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis>system-config-printer</emphasis>. Для роботи з програмою
+доведеться вказати пароль адміністративного користувача (root).</para>
+      </footnote>.</para>
+
+    <para>MCC попросить у вас дозволу щодо встановлення двох пакунків:</para>
+
+    <blockquote>
+      <para>task-printing-server</para>
+
+      <para>task-printing-hp</para>
+    </blockquote>
+
+    <para>Вам слід погодитися на встановлення цих пакунків, щоб продовжити роботу з
+програмою. За залежностями може бути встановлено до 230 МБ даних.</para>
+
+    <para>Щоб додати принтер, натисніть кнопку <guilabel>Додати</guilabel>. Система
+спробує виявити всі доступні принтери і порти. На знімку показано пункт
+принтера, з’єднаного за допомогою USB. Якщо принтер буде виявлено, його буде
+показано у першому рядку списку. За допомогою цього ж вікна можна
+налаштувати мережевий принтер.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="automatic">
+    <title>Принтер було виявлено автоматично</title>
+
+    <para>Зазвичай, це стосується принтерів, з’єднаних з комп’ютером за допомогою
+кабелю USB. Програма автоматично визначає назву принтера і показує
+її. Виберіть принтер і натисніть кнопку <guilabel>Далі</guilabel>. Якщо з
+принтером пов’язано відомий системі драйвер, його буде встановлено
+автоматично. Якщо можна скористатися одним з декількох драйверів або або
+системі не вдасться визначити найкращий драйвер, буде показано вікно з
+проханням вибрати драйвер, пояснення до якого наведено у наступному
+розділі. Продовжіть читання з розділу <xref linkend="terminate"/>.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="non_automatic">
+    <title>Принтер не вдалося виявити автоматично</title>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="printer3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Після вибору порту система завантажить список драйверів і покаже вікно для
+вибору драйвера. Ви зможете вибрати один з наведених нижче варіантів.</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>вибрати принтер з бази даних</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>надати PPD-файл</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>пошукати драйвер для звантаження</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>Якщо буде вибрано варіант з пошуком у базі даних, програма спочатку
+запропонує вам вибрати назви компанії-виробника принтера, а потім назву
+пристрою та драйвер, пов’язаний з роботою цього пристрою. Якщо можна буде
+скористатися декількома драйверами, варто вибрати з них рекомендований. Якщо
+у вас виникають якісь проблеми з роботою рекомендованого драйвера, виберіть
+той з драйверів, який працює найкраще.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="terminate">
+    <title>Завершення процедури встановлення</title>
+
+    <para>Після вибору драйвера буде відкрито вікно введення даних, які допоможуть
+системі позначити і розпізнати принтер. У першому рядку слід ввести назву
+пристрою, яку буде показано у програмах у списку доступних принтерів. Після
+введення даних засіб встановлення драйвера запропонує надрукувати тестову
+сторінку. Щойно буде закрито сторінку тестового друку, запис принтера буде
+додано до списку доступних принтерів, ним можна буде користуватися.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="network_printer">
+    <title>Мережний принтер</title>
+
+    <para>Мережні принтери — це принтери, які безпосередньо з’єднано з дротовою або
+бездротовою мережею, сервером друку або іншою робочою станцією, яка працює у
+режимі сервера друку.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>Часто, варто налаштувати сервер DHCP на автоматичну прив’язку IP-адреси до
+MAC-принтера. Звичайно ж, якщо ця адреса є фіксованою, вона має збігатися з
+IP-адресою принтера, на яку налаштовано сервер друку.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <para>MAC-адреса принтера — це серійний номер, який надається принтеру, серверу
+друку або комп’ютеру, з яким з’єднано принтер, і яку можна визначити за
+допомогою тестової сторінки, надрукованої самим принтером або наклейки на
+принтері або сервері друку. Якщо ваш принтер спільного користування з’єднано
+з системою Mageia, ви можете виконати від імені користувача root
+(адміністратора) команду <emphasis><code>ifconfig</code></emphasis>, щоб
+визначити цю MAC-адресу. MAC-адресою є послідовність цифр і літер після
+слова «HWaddr».</para>
+
+    <para>Додати ваш мережний принтер можна так: виберіть протокол, який
+використовується принтером для обміну даними мережею з вашим
+комп’ютером. Якщо ви не знаєте, який протокол слід вибрати, ви можете
+спробувати скористатися пунктом <guilabel>Мережний принтер</guilabel> -
+<guilabel>Знайти мережний принтер</guilabel> у меню
+<guilabel>Пристрої</guilabel> і вказати IP-адресу принтера у полі праворуч,
+де вказано «вузол».</para>
+
+    <para>Якщо програмі вдасться виявити ваш принтер або сервер друку, вона запропонує
+вам визначені параметри протоколу та черги друку. Втім, ви можете вибрати
+потрібний вам варіант зі списку, розташованого нижче, або вказати належну
+назву черги друку, якщо відповідного пункту немає у списку.</para>
+
+    <para>Для визначення переліку протоколів, підтримку яких передбачено у сервері
+друку, та відповідних назв черг друку зверніться до документації з сервера
+друку, яким ви користуєтеся.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="network_printing_protocols">
+    <title>Протоколи друку мережею</title>
+
+    <para>Однією з сучасних методик роботи з принтерами є розроблена Hewlett-Packard
+технологія під назвою JetDirect. За її допомогою можна здійснювати доступ до
+принтера, безпосередньо з’єднаного з мережею за допомогою порту
+Ethernet. Вам слід буде вказати IP-адресу, яка використовується принтером у
+мережі. Ця технологія використовується також у деяких ADSL-маршрутизаторах,
+у яких передбачено порт USB для під’єднання принтера. Якщо ви користуєтеся
+таким маршрутизатором, слід вказати його IP-адресу. Зауважте, що програма
+«Hp Device manager» може працювати з динамічно визначеною IP-адресою,
+визначаючи адресу файла пристрою як
+<emphasis>hp:/net/&lt;назва_принтера&gt;</emphasis> . Для такого динамічного
+визначення фіксована IP-адреса не потрібна.</para>
+
+    <para>Виберіть пункт <guilabel>AppSocket/HP JetDirect</guilabel> у списку
+протоколів і вкажіть адресу у полі <guilabel>Вузол:</guilabel>. Не змінюйте
+вміст поля <guilabel>Номер порту</guilabel>, якщо не певні, що це слід
+зробити. Після вибору протоколу виконайте вибір драйвера відповідно до вже
+описаної процедури.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="printer5-uk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Серед інших можливих протоколів такі:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Протокол друку інтернетом (ipp)</emphasis>: принтер, доступ до
+якого здійснюється у мережі TCP/IP за допомогою протоколу IPP. Наприклад,
+принтер, з’єднаний з робочою станцією, де використовується CUPS. Цей
+протокол може також використовуватися деякими маршрутизаторами ADSL.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Протокол друку інтернетом (https)</emphasis>: те саме, що і ipp,
+але з використанням передавання даних HTTP з захистом TLS. Слід вказати
+порт. Типовим номером порту є 631.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Протокол друку інтренетом (ipps)</emphasis>: те саме, що і ipp,
+але із захистом TLS.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Вузол або принтер LPD/LPR</emphasis>: принтер, доступ до якого
+здійснюється у мережі TCP/IP за допомогою протоколу LPD. Наприклад, принтер,
+з’єднаний з робочою станцією, на якій використовується LPD.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Принтер Windows через SAMBA</emphasis>: принтер у спільному
+користуванні, з’єднаний з робочою станцією під керуванням Windows або
+сервером SMB.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>Крім того, адресу URI можна додати безпосередньо. Ось декілька прикладів
+форматування адреси URI:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Appsocket</para>
+
+        <para><uri>socket://ip-адреса-або-назва-вузла:порт</uri></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Протокол друку Інтернетом (IPP)</para>
+
+        <para><uri>ipp://ip-адреса-або-назва-вузла:номер-порту/ресурс</uri></para>
+
+        <para><uri>http://ip-адреса-або-назва-вузла:номер-порту/ресурс</uri></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Протокол фонової служби лінійного принтера (LPD)</para>
+
+        <para><uri>lpd://користувач@ip-адреса-або-назва-вузла/черга</uri></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>Додаткові відомості можна знайти у <link
+ns2:href="http://www.cups.org/documentation.php/doc-1.5/network.html">документації
+до CUPS</link>.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="properties">
+    <title>Властивості пристрою</title>
+
+    <para>Ви можете переглянути і змінити параметри роботи пристрою. За допомогою меню
+можна отримати доступ до панелі налаштовування сервера CUPS. Типово, сервер
+CUPS запускається вашою операційною системою, але ви можете вибрати інший
+варіант за допомогою пункту меню <guimenu>Сервер</guimenu> →
+<guimenuitem>З’єднатись...</guimenuitem>. Інше вікно налаштовування
+параметрів сервера можна відкрити за допомогою пункту меню
+<guimenu>Сервер</guimenu> → <guimenuitem>Параметри</guimenuitem>.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title xml:id="troubleshoot">Діагностика проблем</title>
+
+    <para>Дані щодо помилок, які могли трапитися під час друку, можна знайти у файлі
+<filename>/var/log/cups/error_log</filename>.</para>
+
+    <para>Крім того, ви можете скористатися інструментом для діагностування і
+вирішення проблем. Доступ до нього можна отримати за допомогою пункту меню
+<guimenu>Довідка</guimenu> → <guilabel>Усунення проблем з друком</guilabel>.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="specificities">
+    <title>Специфічні поради</title>
+
+    <para>Драйверів, потрібних для роботи певних принтерів, немає у сховищах пакунків
+Mageia через ліцензійні проблеми або ці драйвери є непрацездатними. Якщо ви
+не можете знайти потрібного драйвера скористайтеся сторінкою системи <link
+ns2:href="http://openprinting.org/printers/">openprinting</link>, щоб
+переконатися, чи існує драйвер взагалі. Якщо виявиться, що драйвер існує,
+перевірте, чи немає пакунка з цим драйвером у сховищах Mageia. Якщо такий
+пакунок буде виявлено, встановіть його вручну. Після встановлення драйвера
+повторіть процедуру встановлення і налаштовування принтера. Про проблеми
+повідомляйте за допомогою системи стеження за вадами дистрибутива або
+форуму. Також можна повідомляти про побажання щодо роботи програм
+налаштовування та про те, чи працює принтер після встановлення. Нижче
+наведено декілька адрес, за якими можна знайти найновіші версії драйверів
+або драйвери до найновіших пристроїв.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Принтери Brother</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>На <link
+ns2:href="http://welcome.solutions.brother.com/bsc/public_s/id/linux/en/download_prn.html">цій
+сторінці</link> можна знайти список драйверів, які надаються
+Brother. Знайдіть драйвер до вашого пристрою, звантажте пакунки rpm з ним і
+встановіть ці пакунки.</para>
+
+    <para>Драйвери Brother слід встановити до запуску програми для налаштовування
+системи друку.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Принтери та багатофункціональні пристрої
+Hewlett-Packard</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>Для цих пристроїв використовуються програми з комплекту hplip. Цей комплект
+програм буде автоматично встановлено після вибору принтера. Докладніші
+відомості щодо комплекту програм можна знайти <link
+ns2:href="http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/index.html">тут</link>.
+Програму «HP Device Manager» (Керування пристроями HP) можна буде знайти у
+меню системи. Довідку щодо налаштовування принтера можна знайти <link
+ns2:href="http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/install/manual/hp_setup.html">тут</link>.</para>
+
+    <para>Багатофункціональні пристрої HP потребують встановлення драйвера принтера,
+щоб працювати і у режимі сканера. Зауважте, що іноді у інтерфейсі програми
+для сканування не передбачено можливостей зі сканування плівок або слайдів
+(не працює модуль для слайдів). У цьому випадку можна скористатися для
+сканування автономним режимом зі збереженням зображення на картку пам’яті
+або на флеш-пристрій USB, вставлений до багатофункціонального
+пристрою. Після сканування отримані зображення можна перенести з носія даних
+до сховища вашого улюбленого програмного забезпечення для роботи з
+зображеннями.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Кольорові принтери Samsung</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>Драйвери для окремих кольорових принтерів Samsung і Xerox, що працюють за
+допомогою протоколу QPDL, можна <link
+ns2:href="http://foo2qpdl.rkkda.com/">знайти тут</link>.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Принтери і сканери Epson</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>Drivers for Epson printers are available from <link
+ns2:href="http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX">this
+search page</link>. For the scanner part, you must install the "iscan-data"
+package first, then "iscan" (in this order). A iscan-plugin package can also
+be available and is to install. Choose the <emphasis>rpm</emphasis> packages
+according to your architecture. </para>
+
+    <para> It is possible that the iscan package will generate a warning about a
+conflict with sane. Users have reported that this warning can be ignored.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Принтери Canon</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>Якщо ви працюєте з принтерами Canon, вам може стати у пригоді програма, яка
+називається turboprint. Відповідний (тестовий) пакунок можна отримати <link
+ns2:href="http://www.turboprint.info/">тут</link>.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/transfugdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/transfugdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3d763e28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/transfugdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="transfugdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Written by yurchor 2013-07-03 -->
+<!-- Tproof  -->
+<!-- -->
+<title xml:id="transfugdrake-ti1">Імпортування документів і параметрів Windows(TM)</title>
+
+    <subtitle>transfugdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="transfugdrake-im1" revision="1"
+fileref="transfugdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">transfugdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора
+(root).</para>
+    </footnote> is found under the <emphasis
+role="bold">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled
+<guilabel>Import Windows(TM) documents and settings</guilabel></para>
+
+  <para>The tool allows an administrator to import the user documents and settings
+from a <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> 2000, <trademark
+class="registered">Windows</trademark> XP or <trademark
+class="registered">Windows</trademark> <trademark>Vista</trademark>
+installation on the same computer as the Mageia installation.</para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Please note that all the changes will be applied by transfugdrake
+immediately after pressing <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para>After starting transfugdrake you will see the first wizard page with some
+explanation about the tool and import options.</para>
+
+  <para>As soon as you read and understand the instructions, press the
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. This should run a detection of
+<trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> installation.</para>
+
+  <para>When the detection step is complete you will see a page which allows you to
+choose accounts in <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> and
+Mageia for the import procedure. It is possible to choose other user account
+than yours own.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Please take into account that due to migrate-assistant (the backend of
+transfugdrake) limitations <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark>
+user account names with special symbols can be displayed incorrectly.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Migration may take some time depending on the size of the document folders.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Some <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> applications
+(especially drivers) may create user accounts for different purposes. For
+example, NVidia drivers in <trademark
+class="registered">Windows</trademark>are updated using
+<emphasis>UpdatusUser</emphasis>. Please do not use such accounts for the
+import purposes.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para>When you finished with the accounts selection press
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method
+to import documents:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Transfugdrake is designed to import <trademark
+class="registered">Windows</trademark> data from <emphasis>My
+Documents</emphasis>, <emphasis>My Music</emphasis> and <emphasis>My
+Pictures</emphasis> folders. It is possible to skip import by selecting the
+appropriate item in this window.</para>
+
+  <para>When you finished with the document import method choosing press
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method
+to import bookmarks:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Transfugdrake can import <emphasis>Internet Explorer</emphasis> and
+<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> bookmarks into the bookmarks of Mageia
+<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> instance.</para>
+
+  <para>Choose the preferred import option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton>
+button.</para>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- Does not work as expected, might be due to incompatible version of OE
+   <para>
+With transfugdrake, it is possible to import <emphasis>Outlook Express</emphasis> settings and mail archives into <emphasis>Evolution</emphasis>.</para>
+
+   <para>When you finished with the mail import method choosing press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method to import mail:</para>
+-->
+<para>The next page allows you to import desktop background:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake4.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Choose the preferred option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton>
+button.</para>
+
+  <para>The last page of wizard shows some congratulation message. Just press the
+<guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake5.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/uninstall-linux.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/uninstall-linux.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1c947f0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/uninstall-linux.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="uninstall-linux" ><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-ti38">How to Uninstall Linux</title></info>
+  
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-pa200" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-it134">
+      <primary>uninstall</primary>
+    </indexterm> <indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-uninstall-linux-it139">
+      <primary>Mandrakelinux</primary>
+      <secondary>uninstall</secondary>
+    </indexterm> If for any reason you want to uninstall
+<application>Mageia</application>, you can do so. The process of
+uninstalling <application>Mageia</application> is done in two steps:</para>
+
+  
+
+  <warning>
+    <para xml:id="BId-uninstall-linux-pa206" revision="2">Removing partitions on your hard drive will inevitably result in the loss of
+all data stored on those partitions. Please make sure you've backed up all
+of the data you want to keep <emphasis>before</emphasis> proceeding.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <orderedlist inheritnum="ignore" continuation="restarts">
+    <listitem>
+      
+
+      
+
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakx-pa202" revision="4">Delete all partitions related to <application>Mageia</application> on your
+hard drive (usually partitions hosting <acronym>ext3</acronym> file systems
+and the <systemitem>Swap</systemitem> partition)  and — optionally — replace
+them with a single partition using
+<application>DiskDrake</application><phrase condition="Starter"
+xml:id="BIdNEW-uninstall-linux-ph1" revision="1"> (see <xref
+linkend="diskdrake" />)</phrase>.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakx-pa203" revision="4">Remove<indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-it135" revision="2">
+          <primary>bootloader</primary>
+
+          <secondary>uninstall</secondary>
+        </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-uninstall-linux-it136" revision="1">
+          <primary>commands</primary>
+
+          <secondary>lilo</secondary>
+        </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-uninstall-linux-it137">
+          <primary>Головний завантажувальний запис (MBR)</primary>
+        </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-uninstall-linux-it138">
+          <primary>MBR</primary>
+        </indexterm> the bootloader, <application>LILO</application> in this example,
+from the Master Boot Record (<acronym>MBR</acronym>). To do so, execute
+<command>lilo -U</command> in a console, as <literal>root</literal>. Doing
+this will not only uninstall <application>LILO</application> but will also
+restore the previous master boot record, if any.</para>
+
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakx-pa204" revision="2">If you have a different boot loader, please refer to its documentation to
+determine how to regenerate the master boot record.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+  
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/uk/userdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/uk/userdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cf728a70
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/uk/userdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="uk" xml:id="userdrake">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Written AM desmottes (lebarhon) 2012-08-27 -->
+<!-- Tproof  -->
+<!-- Preliminary lproof JohnR 2012-08-30  -->
+<!-- -->
+<title xml:id="userdrake-ti1">Користувачі і групи</title>
+
+    <subtitle>userdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="userdrake-im1" revision="1"
+fileref="userdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>Запустити цю програму можна за допомогою термінала: достатньо ввести команду
+<emphasis role="bold">userdrake</emphasis> від імені адміністратора (root).</para>
+    </footnote> is found under the <emphasis
+role="bold">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled
+"Manage users on system"</para>
+
+  <para>The tool allows an administrator to manage the users and the groups, this
+means to add or delete a user or group and to modify user and group settings
+(ID, shell, ...)</para>
+
+  <para>When userdrake is opened, all the users existing on the system are listed in
+the <guibutton>Users</guibutton> tab, and all the groups in the
+<guibutton>Groups</guibutton> tab. Both tabs operate the same way.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>1 Add User</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>This button opens a new window with all fields shown empty:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="userdrake1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>The field <emphasis role="bold">Full Name</emphasis> is intended for the
+entry of a family name and first name, but it is possible to write anything
+or nothing as well!</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Login</emphasis> is the only required field.</para>
+
+  <para>Setting a <emphasis role="bold">Password</emphasis> is highly
+recommended. There is a little shield on the right, if it is red, the
+password is weak, too short or is too similar to the login name. You should
+use figures, lower and upper case characters, punctuation marks, etc. The
+shield will turn orange and then green as the password strength improves.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Confirm Password</emphasis> field is there to ensure
+you entered what you intended to.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Login Shell </emphasis>is a drop down list that allows
+you to change the shell used by the user you are adding, the options are
+Bash, Dash and Sh.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Create a private group for the user</emphasis>, if
+checked will automatically create a group with the same name and the new
+user as the only member (this may be edited).</para>
+
+  <para>The other options should be obvious. The new user is created immediately
+after you click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">2 Add Group</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>You only need to enter the new group name, and if required, the specific
+group ID.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">3 Edit</emphasis> (a selected user)</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>User Data</guibutton>: Allows you to modify all the data given
+for the user at creation (the ID can't be changed).</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Account Info</emphasis>:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="userdrake2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>The first option is for setting an expiration date for the account.
+Connection is impossible after this date. This is useful for temporary
+accounts.</para>
+
+  <para>The second option is to lock the account, connection is impossible as long
+as the account is locked.</para>
+
+  <para>It is also possible to change the icon.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Password Info</emphasis>: Allows you to set an
+expiration date for the password, this forces the user to change his
+password periodically.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="userdrake3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Group</emphasis>: Here you can select the groups that
+the user is a member of.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>If you are modifying a connected user account, modifications will not be
+effective until his/her next login.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">4 Edit</emphasis> (with a group selected)</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Group Data</emphasis>: Allows you to modify the group
+name.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Group Users</emphasis>: Here you can select the users
+who are members of the group</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">5 Delete</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>Select a user or a group and click on <emphasis
+role="bold">Delete</emphasis> to remove it. For a user, a window appears to
+ask if home directory and mailbox must also be deleted. If a private group
+has been created for the user, it will be deleted as well.</para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>It is possible to delete a group which is not empty.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">6 Refresh</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>The User database can be changed outside of Userdrake. Click on this icon to
+refresh the display.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">7 Guest Account</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">guest</emphasis> is a special account. It is intended
+to give somebody temporary access to the system with total security. Login
+is xguest, there is no password, and it is impossible to make modifications
+to the system from this account. The personal directories are deleted at the
+end of the session. This account is enabled by default, to disable it, click
+in the menu on<guimenu> Actions -> Uninstall guest account</guimenu>.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file